Service 500

Model A-C4.
5
(Machine Code: B291/B295/B296/B297)
SERVICE MANUAL
22 September 2006
Subject to change
IIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
7. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable
liquids, gases, and aerosols.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.
2
1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
3BLASERCAUTION.WMF
Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means

Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for

details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
= Clamp
Sideways, LEF
Lengthwise, SEF
(Long Edge Feed)
(Short Edge Feed)
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
WARNING
FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH.
CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
NOTE: This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the
machine.
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-1

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-2
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-2
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-5
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ................................................................1-6
1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION..............................................................1-7
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-7
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-8
Development Unit and PCU................................................................1-10
Toner Bottle ........................................................................................1-13
Paper Trays ........................................................................................1-14
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer.....................................................1-16
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays ..........................................................1-17
Electrical Total Counter.......................................................................1-18
HDD Caution Decal.............................................................................1-18
Exposure Glass Cleaner .....................................................................1-19
1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542) ..........................................1-20
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-20
1.4.2 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .....................1-21
1.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B544) .............................................1-25
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-25
1.5.2 1-BIN TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..................................1-26
1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538) ...................................................1-32
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-32
1.6.2 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............................1-33
1.7 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545)......................................1-35
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-35
1.7.2 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................1-36
1.8 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377) ....................................................1-39
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-39
1.8.2 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................1-40
1.9 ARDF INSTALLATION (B714).................................................................1-43
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-43
1.9.2 ARDF INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................1-44
1.9.3 ARDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT .........................................................1-48
1.10 LCT INSTALLATION (B543)..................................................................1-49
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-49
1.10.2 LCT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.............................................1-50
1.11 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329) ............................................1-52
1.12 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION (B546)......................................1-53
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-53
1.12.2 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................1-54
i
1.13 1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408) ............................................................1-59
1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-59
1.13.2 1000 SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.............1-60
1.14 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ..........................................................1-63
1.15 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.........................................................1-66
1.16 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................1-68
1.17 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................1-69
1.18 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................1-71
Before You Begin… ............................................................................1-71
Seal Check and Removal ...................................................................1-72
1.18.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-73
1.19 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)..................................................1-75
1.19.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-75
1.19.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-76
1.20 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B815) .......................................1-77
1.20.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-77
1.20.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-78
Pre-installation ....................................................................................1-79
On-Site Installation..............................................................................1-85
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 2-1

2.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................2-1
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS..............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 USED TONER ..................................................................................3-1
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................3-2
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................................3-2
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS ...................................................................................3-2
3.3 FRONT DOOR ..........................................................................................3-3
3.4 DUPLEX UNIT...........................................................................................3-4
3.5 RIGHT UPPER COVER ............................................................................3-5
3.6 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT ...............................................................................3-6
3.7 REAR COVERS ........................................................................................3-7
3.7.1 REAR UPPER COVER.....................................................................3-7
3.7.2 REAR LOWER COVER....................................................................3-7
3.8 LEFT COVER ............................................................................................3-8
3.9 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................3-9
3.9.1 ARDF................................................................................................3-9
3.9.2 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-10
3.9.3 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS, OPERATION PANEL ................3-11
3.9.4 LENS BLOCK, SBU ASSEMBLY ...................................................3-12
3.9.5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS ...........................................................3-13
3.9.6 EXPOSURE LAMP .........................................................................3-14
3.9.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR ...................3-15
3.9.8 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-16
3.9.9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD .....3-17
3.9.10 SCANNER WIRE..........................................................................3-18
ii
3.10 LASER UNIT .........................................................................................3-22
3.10.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS ...................................................3-22
3.10.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................3-23
3.10.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ......................................................3-25
3.10.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR..................................3-26
3.10.5 LD UNIT........................................................................................3-27
Laser beam pitch adjustment..............................................................3-28
3.11 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ......................................................3-30
3.11.1 PCU ..............................................................................................3-30
3.11.2 DRUM...........................................................................................3-31
3.11.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS .......................................................................3-33
Pick-off pawl position adjustment........................................................3-33
3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER ............................3-34
3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 2........................................................3-35
3.11.6 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 1........................................................3-36
3.11.7 ID SENSOR..................................................................................3-37
3.12 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................3-38
3.12.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................3-38
3.12.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER .............................................................3-39
3.12.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER ...........................................................3-40
3.12.4 DEVELOPER................................................................................3-41
3.12.5 TD SENSOR.................................................................................3-43
3.13 TRANSFER UNIT..................................................................................3-44
3.13.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ...............................................................3-44
3.13.2 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-45
3.13.3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE
AND TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR ..........................................3-46
3.14 PAPER FEED........................................................................................3-47
3.14.1 PICK-UP, SEPARATION, AND FEED ROLLERS ........................3-47
3.14.2 LOWER RIGHT COVER...............................................................3-48
3.14.3 RELAY/UPPER PAPER FEED
AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES .................................3-49
3.14.4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1 ..................................3-50
3.14.5 LOWER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2 .................................3-51
3.14.6 PAPER END/PAPER HEIGHT/RELAY SENSORS ......................3-52
3.14.7 REGISTRATION SENSOR...........................................................3-53
3.14.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................3-55
3.14.9 FEED/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR..................................................3-56
3.14.10 IDLE ROLLER DUST BLADE .....................................................3-57
3.14.11 REGISTRATION ROLLER DUST BLADE ..................................3-58
3.15 FUSING UNIT........................................................................................3-59
3.15.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................3-59
3.15.2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE .........................................................3-60
3.15.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS .........................................................3-61
3.15.4 FUSING LAMPS ...........................................................................3-62
3.15.5 THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS .......................................3-64
3.15.6 HOT ROLLER/PRESSURE ROLLER...........................................3-65
iii
3.16 BY-PASS TRAY ....................................................................................3-67
3.16.1 COVER REPLACEMENT .............................................................3-67
3.16.2 BY-PASS PAPER FEED
AND PICK-UP ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...................................3-68
3.16.3 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER...............................................3-69
3.16.4 PAPER END SENSOR, PICK-UP SOLENOID.............................3-70
3.16.5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT .......................3-71
3.16.6 BY-PASS TABLE REMOVAL .......................................................3-72
3.16.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT....................................3-73
3.17 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................3-74
3.17.1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL .......................................................3-74
3.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................3-75
3.17.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ..................................3-76
3.18 DRIVE AREA.........................................................................................3-77
3.18.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH,
TRANSFER BELT CONTACT CLUTCH.......................................3-77
3.18.2 MAIN MOTOR ..............................................................................3-78
3.18.3 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR.................................................................3-79
3.18.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR............................................................3-80
3.19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS ...............................................................3-81
3.19.1 NVRAM.........................................................................................3-81
3.19.2 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY .............................................3-83
3.19.3 IOB ...............................................................................................3-84
IOB DIP Switch Settings (SW101) ......................................................3-85
3.19.4 BICU BOARD ...............................................................................3-86
3.19.5 PSU ..............................................................................................3-87
3.20 HDD, CONTROLLER BOARD...............................................................3-88
3.21 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ..................................3-89
3.21.1 PRINTING ....................................................................................3-89
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................3-89
Blank Margin.......................................................................................3-90
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................3-90
Parallelogram Image Adjustment ........................................................3-91
3.21.2 SCANNING...................................................................................3-92
Registration: Platen Mode...................................................................3-92
Magnification.......................................................................................3-92
3.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .........................................................3-93
Registration.........................................................................................3-93
3.21.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ................................................3-94
iv
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-2
4.1.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-3
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-32
4.2.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-32
4.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................4-34
4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-34
4.4 LEDS .......................................................................................................4-35
4.5 TEST POINTS .........................................................................................4-35
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION..............................................5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-1
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES .....................................................5-2
5.2.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY .....................................................................5-2
5.2.2 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK....................................................5-2
5.2.3 SERVICE TABLES ...........................................................................5-3
SP1-xxx: Feed ......................................................................................5-3
SP2-xxx: Drum......................................................................................5-7
SP3-xxx: Process................................................................................5-17
SP4-xxx: Scanner ...............................................................................5-19
SP5-xxx: Mode ...................................................................................5-35
SP6-xxx: Peripherals ..........................................................................5-68
SP7-xxx: Data Log ..............................................................................5-70
SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-76
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING: SP2-902.........................................5-109
Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-2: IPU Test Print)................................5-109
Test Pattern Table: SP2-902-3 Printing Test Patterns ......................5-110
5.2.5 INPUT CHECK .............................................................................5-111
Main Machine Input Check: SP5-803................................................5-111
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007 ............................................................5-115
5.2.6 OUTPUT CHECK .........................................................................5-116
Main Machine Output Check: SP5-804.............................................5-116
ARDF Output Check: SP6-008) ........................................................5-118
5.2.7 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS: SP5-990...............................................5-118
5.2.8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT: SP1-109 ...............................5-119
5.2.9 MEMORY CLEAR: SP5-801.........................................................5-120
5.2.10 SOFTWARE RESET ..................................................................5-122
5.2.11 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET .................5-122
System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-122
Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-123
5.3 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ...............................................................5-124
5.4 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA.....................................5-125
5.4.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824).......................................5-125
5.4.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825) ................................5-126
v
5.5 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ..................................................................5-127
5.5.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON ...............................5-127
5.5.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .......................................5-128
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis ....................................................5-128
5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-130
5.6.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE.............................................................5-130
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display........................5-130
System Settings ................................................................................5-130
Copier/Document Server Features ...................................................5-131
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings .................................................5-131
Counter .............................................................................................5-132
5.7 DIP SWITCHES.....................................................................................5-133
5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-134
5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-134
5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ....................5-138
5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-138
5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-139
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key ..............5-139
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ...........................5-139
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log .....................5-139
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1

6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-3
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-4
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE...............................................................................6-5
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................6-5
6.2.2 CONTROLLER .................................................................................6-7
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW................................................................6-11
Exposure.............................................................................................6-11
Drum charge .......................................................................................6-11
Laser exposure ...................................................................................6-11
Development.......................................................................................6-11
Image transfer.....................................................................................6-12
Separation ..........................................................................................6-12
ID sensor ............................................................................................6-12
Cleaning..............................................................................................6-12
Quenching ..........................................................................................6-12
Cleaning..............................................................................................6-12
6.4 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-13
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-13
6.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-14
Book Mode..........................................................................................6-14
ADF mode...........................................................................................6-14
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE.........................6-15
vi
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-17
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-17
6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT).......................................................6-18
6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS) ......................................................6-19
6.5.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................6-20
Overview.............................................................................................6-20
6.5.5 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES .....................................................6-21
6.5.6 SUMMARY OF IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS ....................6-23
6.5.7 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS AND RELATED SP MODES.........6-24
Text Mode...........................................................................................6-24
Text/Photo Mode ................................................................................6-25
Photo Mode ........................................................................................6-26
Pale (Low-Density Mode)....................................................................6-27
Generation Copy Mode.......................................................................6-28
6.5.8 PRE-FILTERING ............................................................................6-29
6.5.9 BACKGROUND ERASE.................................................................6-30
6.5.10 INDEPENDENT DOT ERASE ......................................................6-31
6.5.11 LINE WIDTH CORRECTION........................................................6-32
6.5.12 FILTERING ...................................................................................6-33
Interactive SP Codes ..........................................................................6-33
Text Mode MTF Filter..........................................................................6-38
Text/Photo, Photo Mode Filter ............................................................6-39
Pale, Generation Mode Filter ..............................................................6-40
Photo Mode Smoothing for Dithering ..................................................6-41
Photo Mode Grayscale .......................................................................6-41
Photo Mode Image Quality .................................................................6-42
6.5.13 OTHERS.......................................................................................6-43
Vertical Black Line Correction.............................................................6-43
Density Settings ..................................................................................6-43
ADS Level...........................................................................................6-44
6.5.14 PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF SP MODES ...............................6-45
Solving Problems ................................................................................6-45
Recommended Settings for MTF Filters .............................................6-46
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-48
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-48
6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC) ..................................................6-49
6.6.3 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-50
6.6.4 LASER BEAM PITCH CHANGE MECHANISM ..............................6-51
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES ................................................................6-52
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-53
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-53
6.7.2 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-54
6.7.3 DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................................6-55
6.7.4 DRUM PAWLS ...............................................................................6-55
6.7.5 DRUM TONER SEALS...................................................................6-55
vii
6.8 DRUM CHARGE .....................................................................................6-56
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-56
6.8.2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION ..............................6-57
Correction for Environmental Conditions ............................................6-57
6.8.3 CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS ...............6-58
6.8.4 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING............................6-59
6.8.5 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING ..........................................6-59
6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-60
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-60
6.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................................6-61
6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING ....................................................................6-61
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-62
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-62
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only) .............6-62
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................6-63
Toner bottle replenishment mechanism ..............................................6-63
Toner supply mechanism....................................................................6-64
Toner Scatter Prevention ....................................................................6-65
Sensor Control Mode ..........................................................................6-66
Image Pixel Count Mode.....................................................................6-67
6.9.6 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION .........................................6-67
Toner Near End ..................................................................................6-67
Toner End ...........................................................................................6-67
6.9.7 TONER END RECOVERY .............................................................6-68
6.9.8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS ..........................6-68
6.10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING.....................................6-69
6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING........................................................................6-69
6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING ...................................................................6-69
6.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-70
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-70
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE ...................................................................6-71
6.11.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER
RELEASE MECHANISM ..............................................................6-71
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT .................................................................................6-72
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION ...........................................................6-73
6.11.6 PAPER REGISTRATION..............................................................6-74
6.11.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-75
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY ....................................................................................6-76
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-76
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION .....................................................6-77
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION ..........................................6-78
viii
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................6-79
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-79
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................6-80
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION .....................................................6-81
Longer than A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise ..........................................6-81
Up to A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise .....................................................6-81
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM.......................6-82
Feed-in................................................................................................6-82
Inversion and Exit ...............................................................................6-82
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-83
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-83
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM..........................................................6-84
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM ......................6-84
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER
AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM ..................................6-85
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ........................................................6-86
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-86
Correction for paper width and thickness............................................6-87
Currents applied to leading edge, image areas - by-pass feed...........6-88
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM ..............................6-89
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT......................................................6-90
6.15.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-90
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE ............................................................................6-91
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM....................................6-91
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM .....................6-92
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS .....................6-92
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER...................................................................6-93
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM ............................................................6-94
6.15.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER CLEANING.........................................6-95
Small Jobs ..........................................................................................6-95
Medium Jobs ......................................................................................6-96
Large Jobs ..........................................................................................6-96
SP Settings for Post-Job Cleaning......................................................6-97
6.15.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-98
Temperature Control...........................................................................6-99
Fusing Idling Temperature ................................................................6-100
6.15.10 CPM DOWN FOR THICK PAPER ............................................6-101
6.15.11 OVERHEAT PROTECTION .....................................................6-101
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES ..................................................................6-102
6.16.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-102
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE............................................................6-103
Entering the energy saver mode.......................................................6-103
What happens in energy saver mode ...............................................6-103
Return to stand-by mode ..................................................................6-103
ix
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE......................................................................6-104
Entering off stand-by and off modes .................................................6-104
Off Stand-by mode............................................................................6-104
Off Mode ...........................................................................................6-105
Returning to stand-by mode..............................................................6-105
7. SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................SPEC-1
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS..................................................... SPEC-1
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..................................................... SPEC-3
7.3 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .......................................................... SPEC-5
x
22 September 2006 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is
open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory
for reading or writing data.
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION
ARDF
“Rating Voltage of Output

Connector, Max. DC24 V”
Scanner Unit

Finisher

B135I016.WMF Connector, Max. DC24 V”
LCT

1-1
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 22 September 2006
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
%Rh
90 27°C (80.6°F) 80%
80
70
60
32°C (89.6°F) 54%
50 Operation
40 Range
30
20
32°C (89.6°F) 15%
10
Temperature
10 20 30
10°C (50°F) 15%
B291I900.WMF
1. Temperature Range: 10 °C to 32 °C (50 °F to 90 °F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct
sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn at least 30 m3/hr/person
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd3)
6. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea
level.
9. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side
should be no more than 5 mm (0.2").
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
1-2
Installation
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
B D
A
B135I010.WMF
A: Front: >75 cm (29.6")

B: Left: > 10 cm (4")
C: Rear: > 10 cm (4")
D: Right > 10 cm (4")
NOTE: The 75 cm (29.5") recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out
the paper tray only. If the operator stands at the front of the main machine,
more space is required.
1-3
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 22 September 2006
670 mm (26.4") 180 mm (7.1")

B195I012.WMF
680 mm (26.8") 670 mm (23.4") 520 mm (20.5")*1
B195I014.WMF
*1 Without tray extended.
1-4
Installation
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily
accessible. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:

North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12.5 A
Europe/Asia 220 V ~ 240V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: more than 6.8 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10% to 15%
3. Never set anything on the power cord.
1-5
INSTALLATION FLOW CHART 22 September 2006
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack Copier
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit, LCT, or Finisher?
Yes No
Place Copier on the paper tray unit

Install the paper tray unit
Install the copier
Install the bridge unit (if required)
If the customer requires the 1-bin tray:

Remove the scanner unit
Install the 1-bin tray
Replace the scanner unit
Install the remaining options in any order
B135I510.WMF
Bridge Unit: Needed for the finishers and external output tray.
Paper Tray Unit: Needed for LCT and finishers.
Other requirements: See Overall Machine Information – Installation Option Table.
1-6
22 September 2006 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
Installation
1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Operation Instructions – System Setting................................ 1
2. Operation Instructions – Copy Reference .............................. 1
3. Exposure Glass Cleaner Holder ............................................ 1
4. Exposure Glass Cleaner ........................................................ 1
5. Paper Size Decal ................................................................... 1
6. Toner Supply Installation Decal ............................................. 1
7. Middle Front Cover ................................................................ 1
8. HDD Caution Decals (-17, -29, -57 Machines)....................... 1
9. Model Name Decal (-17, -19, -29, -57 Machines) .................. 1
10. Stamp (-17 Machine) ............................................................. 1
11. EU Safety Information (-26, -27, -57, -67 Machines) ............. 1
12. Operation Panel Indicator Decals
(-26, -27, -57, -67 Machines) ................................................. 1
13. Gasket (for Optional ARDF
(–26, -27, -29, -57, -67 Machines) ......................................... 1
14. Ferrite Core (for Optional ARDF)
(–26, -27, -29, -57, -67 Machines) ......................................... 1
1-7
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION 22 September 2006
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. Remove the main machine from the

box, and remove all shipping retainers
and tapes.
NOTE: Store all shipping retainers as
you remove them. You will need them
if the machine is moved to another [A]
location in the future.
2. Pull out the paper trays and remove all
shipping materials [A].
B195I100.WMF
3. Remove scanner cushion [B]. [C]

[B]
NOTE: Do not discard the cushion.
Store it inside the machine at [C]. You
should install it the next time you move
the machine.
4. Remove the middle front cover from
the 2nd tray.
B195I101A.WMF
5. On the right side of the machine, open [D]

the by-pass tray, duplex unit, and
transfer right cover.
6. Remove the shipping screws [D] ( x2)
and tags.
7. Remove the other shipping tag [E].
NOTE: If the paper tray unit is to be
installed, do this now. ( 1.4)
[E] B195I102.WMF
1-8
Installation
B195I101.WMF
[A]
B195I103.WMF
[C] [B] [D]
8. If the paper tray unit is not to be installed, install the middle front cover [A]
(provided in the second paper tray).
9. Attach the emblem [B] and panel [C] to the front cover [D].
10. Push the panel in until the emblem and panel move into their positions with an
audible click.
1-9
Development Unit and PCU
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B195I900.WMF [C]
B195I511.WMF
1. Open the front door.

2. Loosen [A] ( x 1) (do not remove).
3. Push the base [B] the left.
4. Open the right cover [C].
5. Raise the lever [D]
6. Pull out the PCU [E] and place it on a clean flat surface.
7. Remove clamps and wire [F].
1-10
Installation
[A]
B135I512.WMF [C]
[B]
B135I105.WMF
8. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.

NOTE: Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid
attraction to the magnetic development roller.
9. Slide the development unit [A] out and place it on the paper.
10. Remove the tape and tag [B] from the development unit
11. Remove the entrance seal plate [C] ( x 2).
1-11
[A]
[C]
[B]
B135I106.WMF
[D]
B135I513.WMF
B195I019.WMF
12. Remove the development roller unit [A], and set it on the paper.
13. Pour the developer [B] into the development unit.
NOTE: The developer lot number is embossed on the end of the developer
package. Do not discard the package until you have recorded the lot
number. ( 1-16)
1) Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer evenly along the length of the
development unit.
2) Rotate the drive gear [C] to work the developer into the unit.
3) Repeat until all the developer is in the development unit.
4) Continue to turn the drive gear until the developer is even with the top of the
unit.
14. Reassemble the development unit.
NOTE: Make sure that the earth plate [D] is positioned correctly.
15. Re-install the development unit and PCU.
1-12
Installation
[E]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B195I514.WMF
[A]
Toner Bottle
1. Raise the toner bottle holder lever [A], push the lever [B] to the side, and then
pull out the toner bottle holder [C].
2. Unscrew the bottle cap [D] and set the bottle in the holder.
NOTE: Do not touch the inner bottle cap [E].
3. Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place, and
then lower the holder lever [A] to secure the toner bottle.
NOTE: The holder lever cannot be lowered until the toner bottle has been
installed.
4. Attach the toner supply installation
decal [E]. [E]
B195I101B.WMF
1-13
Paper Trays
[A] [C] [B]
[D] [E]
B135I107.WMF
B135I109.WMF
1. Open the 1st paper tray, and then press down on the right side of the lock [A]
switch to unlock the side fences.
2. Press in on the sides of the fence release [B], and slide the side fences [C] to
the appropriate mark for the paper size.
3. Turn the dial [D] to the correct setting for the paper size.
4. Pinch the sides of the bottom fence [E] and move it to the appropriate mark for
the paper size, then load the paper.
5. Check the position of the stack.
• Confirm that there is no gap between the stack and the side fences. If you
see a gap, adjust the position of the side fences.
• After loading the stack, confirm that the right side of the stack is not on top
of both cushions.
1-14
[A]
Installation
B135I108.WMF
B135I110.WMF
[B]
6. Press down the lock [A] to lock the side fences.

7. Attach the appropriate paper size decal [B] to the paper tray.
8. Paper size decals are also used for the optional paper tray unit. Keep any
remaining decals for use with the paper tray unit.
9. Repeat this procedure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray.
1-15
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer

1. Connect the main machine to the power outlet, switch on the main machine,
and wait for the fusing unit to warm up.
2. On the operation panel, press Clear Mode J.
3. Use the number keys to enter 107.
4. Press and hold Clear/Stop D for three seconds.
5. On the touch-panel, press Copy SP.
6. Press SP Direct to highlight “SP Direct”, enter 2801, and then press .
B135I500.WMF
7. When the message prompts you to enter the lot number of the developer, enter
the 7-digit lot number, press [Yes], and then press [Execute] on the touch-panel.
This initializes the TD sensor.
NOTE: The lot number is printed on the end of the developer package.
Recording the lot number could help troubleshoot problems later. If the
lot number is unavailable, enter any seven-digit number.
8. Press SP Direct to highlight “SP Direct” and enter 2805, press , and then
press Execute on the touch-panel. This initializes the developer.
9. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
1-16
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays
Installation
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
B135I501.WMF
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
B135I502.WMF
3. Press the Paper Size Setting tab.

4. Press the button for the tray to change.
5. Change the setting and press the [OK] button.
6. Repeat for each tray installed.
7. Press Exit twice to return to the main display
• The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th paper trays are provided with paper size dial
selectors. The dial settings on the paper trays have priority over the UP
settings. However, if you select the asterisk (*) position on the paper size
dial, you can select the paper size with the UP setting.
8. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
NOTE: The test pattern print procedure is slightly different for this machine.
Use SP2-902 and select 2 for the IPU Test Print or 3 for the Print Test
Patterns. ( 5.2.3 Test Pattern Printing)
1-17
Electrical Total Counter

The electrical total counter no longer requires initialization. The new incrementing
counter is set to “0” at the factory.
HDD Caution Decal
1. Attach the HDD Caution decal [A] to the front cover.
10 mm (0.4")
25 mm (1.0")
[A]
B135I017.WMF
B195I018.WMF
1-18
Installation
Exposure Glass Cleaner
[B]
[A]
B135I111.WMF
1. Attach the exposure glass cleaner holder [A] to the left side of the machine.
2. Place the exposure glass cleaner [B] inside the holder.
NOTE: The exposure glass cleaner is used to clean the ARDF exposure glass,
the glass strip to the left of the large exposure glass.
1-19
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542) 22 September 2006
1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542)

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Knob Screw – M3 .................................................................. 1
2. Knob Screw – M4 .................................................................. 1
3. Joint Bracket .......................................................................... 1
4. Front Stand ............................................................................ 1
5. Rear Stand............................................................................. 1
6. Stand Bracket ........................................................................ 1
7. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
1-20
22 September 2006 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542)
Installation
1.4.2 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B542I557.WMF
[A]
B542I112.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Unpack the paper tray unit.
2. Remove all tape and shipping materials.
3. Remove the paper trays [A].
1-21
[B]
[F]
[J]
[E]
[H]
[A] [D]
B542I513.WMF
[C]
[G] [I]
B542I517.WMF
4. Remove the middle front cover [A] and pull out the front handles [B].
5. Using the front handles and rear handles, lift the machine and hold it over the
paper tray unit [C].
6. Slowly lower the machine onto the paper tray unit with the pegs [D] aligned with
the peg holes on the bottom of the machine.
NOTE: Do not hold the scanner unit.
7. Re-install the middle front cover [A].
8. Attach the spring washer [E] to the short knob screw [F]. Then, secure the
paper tray unit.
9. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit [G].
10. Secure the joint bracket [H] (1 long knob screw).
11. Remove the connector cover [I] of the main machine ( x 1).
12. Connect the paper tray unit harness [J] to the main machine and reinstall the
connector cover.
1-22
22 September 2006 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542)
Installation
[B]
B542I518.WMF
[A]
[C]
B542I119.WMF
13. Install the front stand [A] and rear stand [B] as shown above.
14. Install the stand bracket [C].
1-23
[A]
[A]
B542I500.WMF
15. Load paper into the paper tray and install the paper trays.
16. Attach the appropriate tray decals [A] which are included in the accessory box
for the main machine.
17. Turn on the ac switch.
18. Turn the paper size dial to the correct setting for the paper size.
19. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
1-24
22 September 2006 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B544)
Installation
1.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B544)
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Ground Bracket...................................................................... 1
2. Connector Cover.................................................................... 1
3. Base Cover ............................................................................ 1
4. Arm Cover.............................................................................. 1
5. Copy Tray .............................................................................. 1
6. Mylar Strip.............................................................................. 2
7. Stepped Screw – M3 x 8........................................................ 5
8. Screw –M3 x 8 ....................................................................... 2
9. Screw – M4 x 7 ...................................................................... 1
10. Tapping Screw – M3 x 6 ........................................................ 2
11. Tapping Screw – M3 x 14 ...................................................... 1
12. Tapping Screw – M3 x 8 ........................................................ 1
1-25
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B544) 22 September 2006
1.5.2 1-BIN TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
[B]
[C]
B544I113.WMF
B544I114.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
1. Remove Scanner Unit
NOTE: If the ARDF is installed, remove the ARDF before removing the
scanner unit.
• Remove the connector cover [A].
• Disconnect the scanner cable [B].
• Remove the scanner unit [C] ( x 3).
1-26
Installation
[B]
[A]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B544I201.WMF
[D]
B544I102.WMF
2. Unpack the 1-bin tray unit and remove the tapes.

3. Remove the front bracket [A] ( x 1) and rear bracket [B] ( x 1) from the top
of the paper exit cover [C].
4. Remove the paper exit cover [C] ( x 4).
5. Cut away two covers [D] from the base cover [E].
6. Trim the edges so they are smooth.
7. Install the base cover [E] ( x 3: stepped screw).
8. Set the 1-bin tray unit [F] on the base cover and slide onto the heads of the
stepped screws.
1-27
[A]
[E]
[D]
[G]
[C] B544I492.WMF
[B]
[F]
B544I103.WMF
9. Secure the 1-bin tray unit [A] ( x 1 M3 x14).

10. Remove the cover [B].
11. Install the grounding bracket [C] ( x 2 M3 x 6).
12. Connect the harness [D].
13. Install the connector cover [E] ( x 1 M3 x 8)
14. Re-install the front bracket [F] ( x 2 M4 x 7, M4 x 10) and the rear bracket [G]
( x 1 M4 x 10).
1-28
Installation
[A]
[B]
[E]
B544I493.WMF
[D]
[C]
B544I501.WMF
15. Attach the copy tray

Bridge Unit (B538) has not been installed:
1) Secure [A] (stepped x 2) into the side of the 1-bin tray housing.
2) Attach the copy tray [B] to the stepped screws.
Bridge Unit (B538) has been installed
1) Open the cover of the bridge unit [C].
2) First, remove the copy tray bracket [D] ( x 1).
3) Install the copy tray bracket ( x 1: tapping screw).
4) Re-install the copy tray [E] ( x 1).
1-29
[C]
[A]
[B]
B544I104.WMF
[D]
B544I500.WMF
16. Remove the scanner stand cover [A] ( x 2).

17. To adjust the height of the scanner stand, first remove [B] ( x 2) to release the
scanner stand [C].
18. Raise the scanner stand until the next set of screw holes in the main frame can
be seen through the screw holes in the scanner stand.
19. Secure the stand ( x 2: , ) and install the arm cover [D] ( x 1).
1-30
Installation
[B]
[A] B544I106.WMF
20. Attach two mylar strips [A] to the scanner stand [B].
21. Reinstall the scanner stand cover.
22. Reinstall the scanner unit.
23. Turn on the main switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
1-31
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538) 22 September 2006
1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538)

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 2
2. Connector Cover.................................................................... 1
3. Exit Mylar ............................................................................... 2
1-32
22 September 2006 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538)
Installation
1.6.2 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
[D]
B538I401.WMF
[E]
[B] B538I407.WMF
[C]
B538I500.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
1. Unpack the bridge unit and remove all tapes shipping retainers.
2. Remove the inner tray [A].
3. On the side of the machine, remove the three small covers [B].
If the optional external output tray (A825) will be installed (instead of a
finisher), do Step 4.
4. Remove the two small covers [C].
5. Remove the cover [D] ( x 1).
6. Remove the cap [E].
1-33
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538) 22 September 2006
[A]
[E] [D]
[B]
B538I402.WMF
[C]
B538I404.WMF
7. If an optional finisher is to be installed, attach two mylars [A] to the bridge unit.
8. Remove the cover [B].
9. Install the bridge unit [C] ( x 2).
10. Connect the bridge unit I/F harnesses [D] ( x 2).
11. Install the connector cover [E].
12. Turn on the main switch and check the bridge unit operation (make sure that
there are no paper jams).
1-34
22 September 2006 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545)
Installation
1.7 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545)
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Front Joint Bracket................................................................. 1
2. Rear Joint Bracket ................................................................. 1
3. Shift Tray ............................................................................... 2
4. Screw – M4 x 8 ...................................................................... 2
5. Screw – M4 x 12 .................................................................... 5
6. Ground Plate.......................................................................... 1
1-35
TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545) 22 September 2006
1.7.2 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
B545I101.WMF
[C]
[B]
B545I107.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: The bridge unit (B538) and paper tray unit (B542) must be installed before
installing this finisher.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers from outside
the unit [A].
2. Open the front door [B] and remove all tapes and shipping materials from inside
the finisher unit.
3. Save the retainer [C] and other shipping material.
NOTE: The retainer [C] must be re-installed in the finisher before moving or
shipping the finisher to another location.
1-36
22 September 2006 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545)
[A]
Installation
[B]
B545I104.WMF
[D]
[C]
B545I105.WMF
4. Install the left joint bracket [A] ( x 2 M4 x 12) and right joint bracket [B] ( x 2
M4 x 12).
5. Attach the ground plate [C] ( x 1 M4 x 12) to the center of the paper tray unit
as shown.
6. Open the front door of the finisher, and pull out the locking lever [D] ( x 1).
7. Push the finisher to the side of the machine with the holes in the finisher
aligned with the joint brackets, and then dock the finisher against the machine.
8. Push in the locking lever and secure it ( x 1), then close the front door.
1-37
TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545) 22 September 2006
[A]
B545I103.WMF
[B]
B545I106.WMF
9. Install two trays [A] ( x 1 each).

10. Connect the finisher cable [B] to the main machine below the right, rear handle.
11. Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation.
1-38
22 September 2006 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377)
Installation
1.8 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377)
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Punch unit..............................................................................1
2. Sensor arm ............................................................................1
3. Hopper ...................................................................................1
4. Step screw .............................................................................1
5. Spring ....................................................................................1
6. Spacer (2 mm) .......................................................................1
7. Spacer (1 mm) .......................................................................1
8. Tapping screw .......................................................................1
9. Tapping screw .......................................................................2
1-39
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377) 22 September 2006
1.8.2 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
[B]
B377I102.WMF
[C]
B377I103.WMF
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord. If the Two-Tray
Finisher is installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine. ( 0)
1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] ( x4).
3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x2) and paper guide [C] ( x 1).
1-40
22 September 2006 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377)
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
B377I101.WMF
[E]
B377I104.WMF
[D]
4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped x 1).
6. Install the spring [C].
7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].
8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped x 1)
1-41
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377) 22 September 2006
[A]
B377I105.WMF
[C]
[B]
B377I106.WMF
9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown.

NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The
punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine board so it
knows what type of punch unit has been installed.
10. Slide the hopper [B] into the machine.
11. Fasten the two 1 mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.
NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the holes.
12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.
1-42
22 September 2006 ARDF INSTALLATION (B714)
Installation
1.9 ARDF INSTALLATION (B714)
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 2
2. Screw – M4 x 10 .................................................................... 2
3. Attention Decal - Scanner ...................................................... 1
4. Attention Decal – Top Cover.................................................. 1
NOTE: The gasket and ferrite core for the ARDF are provided with the
accessories of the main machine. ( 1.3.1)
1-43
ARDF INSTALLATION (B714) 22 September 2006
1.9.2 ARDF INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B714I502.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
1. Unpack the ARDF and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
1-44
Installation
[A] 0 to 1 mm
0 to 1.5 mm

[B]

[C]
B541I900A.WMF
[E]
[D]
B541I900B.WMF
2. Attach and tighten stud screws , .

3. Mount the ARDF by aligning the screw keyholes [A] of the ARDF support plate
over the stud screws [B], then slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the ARDF, hold it as shown.
4. Secure the ARDF with the screws , .
5. Attach the gasket [C].
NOTE: The gasket is provided as an accessory with the mainframe.
6. Attach the ferrite core [D] to the I/F cable [E].
NOTE: The ferrite core is provided as an accessory with the mainframe.
5. Connect the I/F cable the main machine.
1-45
[A]
B541I901.WMF
[B]
B541I902.WMF
6. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
7. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the
exposure glass.
8. Close the ARDF.
1-46
[A]
Installation
B541I906.WMF
[C]
[B]
B541I903.WMF
9. Attach the decal [A] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most
suitable for the machine installed.
10. Attach the decal [B] to the cover so that the arrow on the decal lines up with the
groove [C] of the left scale as shown. As with step 9, choose the language most
suitable for the machine installed.
11. Turn on the main switch.
12. Check the ARDF operation and copy quality. Be sure to check and adjust the
registration for the ARDF with the SP modes
1-47
1.9.3 ARDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT
[B] [C] [A]
B079I901.WMF
1. Remove the tape [A] covering the elliptical hole.

2. Remove right screw [B] and install it into the elliptical hole [C].
3. Move the right side of the ARDF forward or back to adjust the position then
tighten the screw.
1-48
22 September 2006 LCT INSTALLATION (B543)
Installation
1.10 LCT INSTALLATION (B543)
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Joint Pin ................................................................................. 2
2. Stepped Screw M3 x 18......................................................... 4
1-49
LCT INSTALLATION (B543) 22 September 2006
1.10.2 LCT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[C]
[B]
[A] B543I504.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: The Paper Tray Unit (B542) must be installed before installing the LCT.
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.

2. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit [A].
3. Open the lower right cover [B] and cut the holding band [C].
NOTE: When cutting the holding band, the upper part of the band should be
cut as shown. Otherwise, paper jams may occur.
4. Remove the lower right cover.
1-50
22 September 2006 LCT INSTALLATION (B543)
Installation
[A]
[E]
[B] [D]
[C] B543I503.WMF
6. Install the joint pins [A].

7. Push the release lever [B] and slide the LCT to the right (front view).
8. Hang the LCT [C] on the joint pins, then secure the brackets [D] ( x 4).
9. Return the LCT to the previous position and connect the LCT cable [E].
10. Open the LCT cover and load the paper.
11. Turn on the ac switch and check the LCT operation.
1-51
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329) 22 September 2006
1.11 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329)
[C]
[B]
[A]
[A]
B079I904.WMF
1. Install [A] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown.

2. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the heads of the stud screws and slide
the platen cover [C] to the left.
1-52
22 September 2006 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION (B546)
Installation
1.12 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION (B546)
list.
7
5
4
2
9
1
10
6
B546I101.WMF
3
8
Description Q’ty
1. Upper Tray...........................................................................1
2. Shift Tray .............................................................................1
3. Tapping Screw - M4 x 6.......................................................2
4. Rail Ass’y.............................................................................1
5. Joint Bracket ........................................................................1
6. Tapping Screw - M4 x 16.....................................................8
7. Rail Bracket .........................................................................1
8. Tapping Screw - M4 x 6.......................................................1
9. Harness Cover.....................................................................1
10. Sensor Feeler ....................................................................1
1-53
BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION (B546) 22 September 2006
1.12.2 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B546I102.WMF
B546I104.WMF
NOTE: The bridge unit (B538) and paper tray unit (B542) must be installed before
installing this finisher.
CAUTION
Keep the power cord unplugged when starting the following procedure.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes and shipping retainers.
1-54
Installation
[A]
[B]
B546I105.WMF
[E]
[D] [C]
B546I103.WMF
2. Open the front under door and pull out the staple unit [A].
3. Remove the stapler unit lock plate [B] ( x 1).
4. Push in the stapler unit and shut the front lower door.
5. Remove the right lower cover [C] ( x 4).
6. Remove the front pressure release bracket [D] ( x 1).
7. Remove the rear pressure release bracket [E] ( x 1).
8. Reattach the cover [C].
1-55
[A]
[B]
[C]
B546I106.WMF
[D]
B546I107.WMF
9. Set the hooks [A] of the shift tray [B] in the notches in the shift tray bracket, and
secure the tray ( x2 M4).
10. Connect the shift tray sensor harness [C].
11. Install the harness cover [D] (2 hooks).
1-56
Installation
[A]
[C] B546I801.WMF
B546I108.WMF
[B]
[E]
[D]
[F]
B546I921.WMF
12. Install the upper tray [A] (2 pins).

13. Attach the sensor feeler [B] (2 pins).
14. Remove the stand bracket [C].
15. Attach the rail [D] to the rail bracket [E] as shown.
16. Install the rail bracket [F] on the left lower cover of the copier ( x 4).
1-57
[A]
[C]
[D]
B546I920.WMF
[B]
B546I511.WMF
17. Install the joint bracket [A] on the left side of the copier ( x 4).
18. Secure the rail [B] to the booklet finisher with 1 M4 screw.
19. Align the finisher on the joint bracket and lock the 2 hooks [C] of the finisher on
the joint bracket.
20. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier.
21. Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation.
1-58
22 September 2006 1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408)
Installation
1.13 1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408)
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
2
6
1 7 8
5
10
3 9
B408I502.WMF
Description Q’ty
1 Front Joint Bracket................................................................1
2 Rear Joint Bracket *1 .............................................................1
3 Rear Joint Bracket ................................................................1
4 Grounding Plate....................................................................1
5 Copy Tray .............................................................................1
6 Staple Position Decal............................................................1
7 Screw - M4 x 14....................................................................4
8 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 ..........................................................1
9 Screw - M3 x 8......................................................................1
10 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 ..........................................................1
*1
: Rear joint bracket is not required for these models.
1-59
1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408) 22 September 2006
1.13.2 1000 SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
B408I102.WMF
B408I103.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
1. The following options must be installed before installing this finisher.

- Bridge Unit (B538)
- Paper Tray Unit (B542)
2. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
NOTE: Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding
plate in Step 3.
1-60
22 September 2006 1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408)
Installation
[B]
[A]
[F]
[E]
B408I503.WMF
[C]
[D]
B408I201.WMF
2. Install the front joint bracket [A] (2 screws - M4 x 14) and rear joint bracket [B]
( x 2 M4 x 14).
3. Install the grounding plate [C] to the finisher ( x 2 M3 x 8).
NOTE: Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory
box.
4. Open the front door [D] then pull the locking lever [E].
5. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever.
6. Secure the locking lever ( x 1 knob screw M3 x 8).
7. Close the front door.
8. Install the copy tray [F] ( x 1 knob screw M4 x 10).
1-61
1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408) 22 September 2006
[B]
[A]
B408I504.WMF
B408I501.WMF
9. Connect the finisher cable [A] to the main machine below the right rear handle.
10. Attach the staple position decal [B] to the ARDF as shown.
11. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
1-62
22 September 2006 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
Installation
1.14 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
A683I518.WMF
[G]
[H]
[E]
[F]
B543I001.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Hold the key counter plates [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and
insert the key counter holder [C]
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x2).
3. Attach the key counter cover [D] ( x2).
4. Remove the connector cover [E].
5. Remove the knockout [F] from the connector cover.
6. Remove the rear upper cover [G] ( x4) and left corner cover [H] ( x2).
1-63
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION 22 September 2006
[B]
[A] A683I002.WMF
[C] A683I003.WMF
7. Connect the key counter connector [A] to CN211 on the I/O board.
8. Reinstall the covers [B] and [C].
1-64
22 September 2006 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
A683I965.WMF
9. Attach the double-sided tape to the key counter bracket.

10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape then attach the key counter
assembly [A] to the left side of the scanner unit.
NOTE: When attaching the key counter assembly, press the assembly hard
against the scanner cover. Otherwise, the key counter assembly may
come off easily.
11. Push [User Tools]> "System Settings"> “Key Counter Management”.
12. Set the following key counter functions to ON or OFF as necessary.
• Copier
• Document server
• Facsimile
• Scanner
• Printer
1-65
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER 22 September 2006
1.15 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

1. Remove the ARDF and exposure glass.
( 3.9.2)
2. Remove the rear cover [A] of the scanner
unit ( x2, x1)
3. Remove the knockout [B] [A]
[B]
B004I204.WMF
4. Push the 1st and 2nd scanners [C] to [D]

the right. [C]
5. Lift the harness guide [D]
B004I205.WMF
6. Install the heater brackets [E] ( x2, [F]

M3x6).
NOTE: Use the screws already attached
at the same position.
7. Install the heater [F] ( x2, M4x6) and
route the harness.
[E]
B004I206.WMF
1-66
22 September 2006 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
8. Install the ac harness assembly [G] ( x2,
Installation
M4x6) and connect the connector [H].
[H]
[G]
B004I207.WMF
9. Remove the rear lower cover [I] ( x4).
10. Remove knockout [J].
11. Pull out ac harness [K]. [J]
[I] [K]
12.
B004I208.WMF
13. Connect the ac harness [L] to the ac outlet [L]

[M].
NOTE: Do not remove the ground wire [M]
from the ac outlet.
14. Install the ac outlet.
15. Install the ground wire [N] ( x1, M4x6).
16. Re-install the rear cover, rear lower cover.
[N] B004I209.WMF
17. Connect the harness [O].
[O]
B004I210.WMF
1-67
TRAY HEATER 22 September 2006
1.16 TRAY HEATER
[C]
[A]
[B]
B004I531.WMF
[D]
[G]
B195I202.WMF
[E]
[H] [F]
B004I203.WMF
CAUTION
1. Attach the tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B].
2. Install the harness holder [C].
3. Remove the rear lower cover.
4. Remove the upper and lower paper trays from the main machine.
5. Install the heater assembly [D] ( x1).
6. Install the harness clamp [E].
7. Fasten the harness [F] with the clamp.
8. Route the heater harness [G] and connect it to the ac harness [H].
1-68
22 September 2006 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
Installation
1.17 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[A] [C]
[B]
B004I531.WMF
[D]
B195I201.WMF
CAUTION
1. Attach the optional tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B].
2. Install the harness holder [C].
3. Remove the rear lower cover of the machine and the rear cover of the optional
paper tray unit.
4. Remove the upper and lower paper trays of the optional paper tray unit.
5. Install the heater assembly [D] ( x1).
1-69
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) 22 September 2006
[C]
[A]
[D] [B]
B004I203.WMF
6. Install four harness clamps [A].

7. Route the harness [B] and connect it to the harness [C] and heater harness [D].
1-70
22 September 2006 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Installation
1.18 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Before You Begin…
1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the
machine. The correct type for this machine is Type "D".
Important: DO THIS NOW. IF YOU INSTALL ANY VERSION OTHER THAN TYPE "D", YOU
WILL HAVE TO REPLACE THE NVRAM AND DO THIS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AGAIN.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
Important: These settings must be set up by the customer before the Data
Overwrite Security unit can be installed.
3. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator
Authentication Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off" tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you
can do the installation procedure.
4. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator
Authentication Management"> "Available Settings
NOTE: "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected tell the customer that this setting must be selected
before you can do the installation procedure.
1-71
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) 22 September 2006
Seal Check and Removal
[A] B735I901.WMF
B735I903.WMF
[B]
CAUTION
TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER SWITCH AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do
not install the components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners
of the box.
3. When you remove each seal, the “VOID” marks [B] can be seen. In this
condition, they cannot be reattached to the box.
1-72
22 September 2006 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
1.18.2 INSTALLATION
Installation
Important
• The DOS SD card must always reside in SD card slot C2 or it can be merged
with the printer/scanner SD card in C1.
• The PostScript3 SD card must always reside in slot C2. If the DOS option is also
required, then move the DOS application to the SD card in slot C1 with SP5873.
(The PS3 option cannot be merged onto any other SD card.)
• For more information about merging applications, refer to the Printer/Scanner
Manual.
1. If the machine is on, turn off the main

power switch.
[B]
2. Disconnect the network cable. [A]
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Turn the operation switch and main
power switch off.
5. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
6. With the printed side of the SD card [B]
facing the rear of the machine, install
the SD card in SD card slot C2.
7. Reconnect the network cable, if the
network is connected to the copier.
8. Turn the main power switch on. B735I101.WMF
9. Do SP5-878 and push [EXECUTE].

10. Go out of the SP mode, turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power
switch off.
Checking and Completing the Installation
Do this procedure to confirm that the data overwrite security feature is enabled and
operating.
1. Turn the machine power on.
2. .Do SP5990 005 (Diagnostic Report) to print the diagnostic report
3. Check the diagnostic report.
• Under [ROM No./Firmware Version] you should see "B7355060/0.03"
displayed for "HDD Format Option".
• Under [Loading Program] you should see "GW1a_zoffy:B7355060/0.03"
1-73
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) 22 September 2006
Important
• The numbers (B7355060/0.03, for example) in the diagnostic report must be the
same. (The ROM number and firmware version number change after the
firmware has been upgraded.)
• If the ROM numbers or version numbers do not match, this means that the DOS
unit type was incorrect (not "Type D". If this occurs:
1. Obtain the Type D DOS unit card or confirm that the DOS unit is Type D.
2. Replace the NVRAM on the controller board.
3. Insert the Type D DOS unit SD card in Slot 2.
4. Do the DOS unit installation procedure again.
4. Push [User Tools] and select System Settings> Administrator Tools> Auto
Erase Memory Settings> On.
5. Exit User Tools mode.
[B] [C] [D]

09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
B735I904.WMF
B735I905.WMF
6. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
7. Make a Sample Copy.
8. Check the overwrite erase icon.
• The icon [B] changes to [C] when job data is stored in the hard disk.
• The icon goes back to its usual shape [B] after this function has completed
a data overwrite operation to the hard disk.
9. Remove the Document Server and Scanner key-tops, and replace them with
the blank key-tops that are supplied with the kit.
1-74
22 September 2006 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)
Installation
1.19 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)
1.19.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Description Qty
1. Bracket ............................................................................... 1
2. Screws................................................................................. 4
3. FFC (Short).......................................................................... 1
4. Harness (Short) .................................................................. 1
5. FFC (Long: Not Used) ......................................................... 1
6. Harness (Long: Not Used) ................................................... 1
7. Harness Clamp (Not Used)................................................. 1
8. ICIB...................................................................................... 1
1 2 3 4
8
B770I101.WMF
7
1-75
COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770) 22 September 2006
1.19.2 INSTALLATION
1. Remove:
[A] [B]
[A]: Rear upper cover ( x2)
[B]: Controller cover ( x2)
B770I102.WMF
2. Remove the controller box [C] ( x5).

[C]
B770I103A.WMF
[D]
3. Attach the bracket [D] ( x2). [G]
4. Attach the ICIB [E] ( x4)
5. Connect the short FFC [F].
[E]
6. Connect the short harness [G] ( x2).
7. Reinstall the controller box.
8. Turn on the machine.
[F]
9. Enable the Copy Data Security
Function:
[User Tools]> System Settings> B770I104.WMF
Administrator Tools> Copy Data Security Option
1-76
22 September 2006 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B815)
Installation
1.20 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B815)
1.20.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Description Qty
1. Long I/F Cable ..................................................................... 1
2. Paper Exit Cover.................................................................. 1
3. Rack Stack Ass'y ................................................................. 1
4. Upper Right Cover ............................................................... 1
5. Spring Plates – Operation Panel.......................................... 2
6. Hinge Stopper – Right ........................................................ 1
7. Hinge Stopper – Left ........................................................... 1
8. Adjusting Pin Spacers.......................................................... 2
9. Clamp – NK-8N.................................................................... 1
10. Ferrite Core – RFC-8 ......................................................... 1
11. Tapping Screw M3x6 (Blue) .............................................. 1
12. Tapping Screws M3x6 ....................................................... 5
13. Tapping Screw M3x8 ......................................................... 1
14. Tapping Screws M3x14 ..................................................... 4
15. Screws with Spring Washer M4x6 ..................................... 1
16. Knob Screws– M4 ............................................................. 4
17. Harness Bands .................................................................. 2
18. Cable Cover....................................................................... 1
2
1 3
18
5 6
7 8 9
17
16
15 14 B815I100.WMF
13 12 11 10
1-77
SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B815) 22 September 2006
1.20.2 INSTALLATION
This option should be pre-installed at the service center or factory and the final
installation should be done at the work site.
General Requirements
• Install the scanner on a solid base.
• Do not install the scanner in an area where it can fall when the ARDF cover is
opened.
• Install the scanner in an area that allows easy access for operation.
• Ask the customer about their requirements before you install the unit.
Specific Requirements
• The scanner unit cable should not touch the floor.
• The cables should not hang free where they can become entangled with other
equipment or furniture such as a wheelchair.
• The unit should be positioned within 380 to 1220 mm (1.3 to 4 ft.) above the floor.
• The gap between the scanner and the main unit on the left, right, or rear should
not be more than 250 mm (9.8 in.)
Gap less than 250 mm (9.8")

B815I119.WMF
Height: 380-to 1200 mm (1.3 to 4 ft.) B815I120.WMF
1-78
Installation
Pre-installation
• Remove Short Scanner I/F Cable
• Connect the Long Scanner Cable to the Copier
• Install Anti-Static Springs on the Operation Panel
• Replace the Board Shield Plates
On-Site Installation
• Move the Scanner Unit to Its Accessible Location
• Remove the Horizontal Arm
• Connect the Long Scanner I/F Cable to the Copier
• Replace the Front Rubber Feet with the Adjustment Screws
• Connect the Scanner
Pre-installation
Remove Short Scanner Cable
[B]
1. If the ARDF is attached, remove it. [A]
2. Remove:
[A]: Rear scale ( x3)
[B]: Left scale and exposure glass ( x2)
B815I101.WMF
3. Remove scanner rear cover [C] ( x2).

[C]
B815I103.WMF
1-79
4. Remove:
[A]: Lens block cover ( x4) [A]
[B]: Disconnect flat-film connector from
the lens block.
[C]: Lens block assembly ( x4) [C]
[B]
B815I102.WMF
5. Disconnect:
[D]: Original length sensor ( x1) [D] [E]
• Push the sensor forward toward the
front. It is not necessary to
disconnect or remove the sensor.
[E]: Ground wire [E] ( x1)
[F]: Short scanner I/F cable ( x2).
[F]
B815I104A.WMF
[G]
6. Remove the rear cover [G]
( x5, x1)
7. Remove the connector cap [H] and
disconnect the short scanner I/F cable
[I] from the mainframe ( x1, =x1).
8. Pull the short scanner I/F cable out of
the scanner unit.
[H]
[] B815I105.WMF
1-80
Installation
Connect the Long Scanner Cable to the Copier
[F]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[G]
B815I106.WMF
1. Position the cable [A] and ground wire [B] of the long scanner I/F cable as
shown.
2. Reattach the long scanner I/F connectors [C] and ground wire [D] (x2)
• Make sure the ground wire and cable loop behind the large boss.
3. Reattach ( Pg. 4)
• Original length sensor ( x1).
• Lens block assembly ( x4).
• Lens block cover ( x4)
4. Set the collar [E] of the long scanner I/F cable in the bracket and clamp the
cable (=x1)
5. Reinstall rear bracket [F] ( x5, x2).
6. Pull the ferrite core [G] slightly away from the back of the machine.
7. Reattach: ( Pg. 3)
• Scanner rear cover ( x2)
• Rear scale ( x3)
• Exposure glass and left scale ( x2)
1-81
Install Anti-Static Springs on Operation Panel
[B] 0 1mm
[A] 0 1mm
B815I107.WMF
1. Disconnect the screws holding the operation panel [A] ( x2. )

2. Pull the operation panel away from the copier (do not disconnect or remove)
and turn it over.
3. Peel the covers from an anti-static springs [B] and attach them as shown.
4. Press down gently on each spring to confirm that each spring is attached
securely.
5. Reattach the operation panel to the machine ( x2).
1-82
Installation
Replace the Board Shield Plates
1. Remove:
• Corner plate [A] ( x2) [B] [A]
• Rear upper cover [B] ( x2)
B815I108.WMF
2. Remove controller box [C]

( x5, x1)
[C]
B770I103A.WMF
1-83
3. Remove:
• IPU shield plate [A] ( x2)
[A]
B815I110.WMF
4. Remove the harness clamps [B] from

the old IPU shield plate and attach
them to the new plate (=x5).
5. Reattach:
• New IPU shield plate ( x2) [B]
• Controller box ( x5, x1)
• Reattach rear lower cover ( x4)
• Reattach the corner plate ( x2)
• ARDF [B]
B815I111.WMF
Important:
• This completes the pre-installation procedure for this option.
• The mainframe can now be moved to the work site.
1-84
On-Site Installation
Installation
Move the Scanner Unit to Its Accessible
Location [A]
1. Disconnect the scanner unit from the
machine ( x3)
2. Lift the scanner unit and set it at the
accessible location.
B815I112.WMF
Replace the Cover
[A] [C]
1. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( x4)
2. Remove the upper right cover and
replace it with the cover [B] provided
with the Scanner Accessibility Option
( x2 – M3 x14).
3. Attach the paper exit cover [C]
(provided with the option) ( x2).
[B]
Remove the Horizontal Arm B815I113.WMF
[A]
1. Remove:
[D]
• Right cover [A] ( x1)
• Left cover [B] ( x2) [F]
2. To remove the horizontal arm [C] of the [E]
scanner stand, remove these screws: [C]
• Top [D] ( x2)
• Right side [E] ( x6)
NOTE: Keep these screws. They are
needed to fasten the cable cover in
Step 4 (next page).
• Left side [F] ( x6) [B]
B815I114.WMF
1-85
Connect the Long Scanner I/F Cable to Copier

[E]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[G]
[D]
B815I115.WMF
1. Fasten the collar [A] of the long scanner I/F cable to the bracket [B].
2. Fasten the bracket to the side of the housing [C] ( x2)
3. Connect the cable [D] to the cable connector ( x1).
4. Use the screws removed in Step 2 on the previous page to fasten the cable
cover [E] over the cable connection and the vertical post [F] of the scanner
stand ( x4).
5. Fasten the cable clamp [G] as shown ( x1).
1-86
Installation
Replace the Front Rubber Feet with the Adjustment Screws
1. Remove the cover [A] ( x3).
2. Under the right front corner of the
scanner unit, insert a flathead
screwdriver [B] behind the metal
bracket [C] and dislodge the plastic [A]
pin [D].
[D]
3. Pull out the plastic pin and remove
the rubber foot [E].
[B]
[E] [C] B815I116.WMF
4. Remove the seal [F] from the

adjusting pin spacer [G], then attach
the pin spacer to the scanner unit.
5. Turn the metal foot [H] until it stops. [F]
6. Reinstall the cover [A] ( x3).

7. Repeat Steps 2 to 5 at the left front.
[H]
[G] [F]
[G] B815I117.WMF
1-87
Connect the Scanner
40mm
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[D] B815I118.WMF
1. Attach one ferrite core [A] to the cable 40 mm away from the scanner unit.
2. Attach one ferrite core [B] near the cable connector.
NOTE: The ferrite core is provided as an accessory with the mainframe.
3. Connect the cable [C] to the scanner.
4. Attach the safety blocks [D] behind each hinge ( x 2 each).
NOTE: These blocks prevent the ARDF from falling over if it is opened too far.
1-88
22 September 2006 PM TABLE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

2.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
Maintenance
Preventive
B291/B295/B296/B297 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
SCANNER/OPTICS
Reflector C C C Optics cloth
1st Mirror C C C Optics cloth
2nd Mirror C C C Optics cloth
3rd Mirror C C C Optics cloth
Scanner Guide Rails Do not use alcohol. Lubricate
I I I
if necessary.
Platen Sheet Cover Dry cloth or alcohol. Replace
C I I I
platen sheet if required.
Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth
APS Sensor C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
Exposure Glass (Sheet Dry cloth or alcohol
C C C
through)
DRUM (OPC) AREA

OPC Drum R R R
Charge Roller R R R
Charge Roller Cleaning
R R R
Roller
Drum Cleaning Blade 1 R R R
Drum Cleaning Blade 2 R R R
Quenching Lamp C Dry cloth
Pick-off Pawls R R R
Spurs C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
ID Sensor Perform SP3-001-2 after
C C C
blower brush cleaning.
Cleaning Entrance Seal Blower brush. Replace if
C C C
required.
Side Seal I I I
2-1
PM TABLE 22 September 2006
B291/B295/B296/B297 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Development Drive
I I I
Gears
Development Filter R R R
Developer I R I
Entrance Seal I I I
Side Seal I I I
Development Roller C C C Dry cloth
PAPER FEED
Registration Roller C C C C Water or alcohol.
Idle Roller Dust Blade Detach and tap gently on flat
C C C surface to empty. Blower
brush.
Registration Roller Dust Blower brush.
C R C
Blade
Paper Feed Guides C C C Water or alcohol.
Relay Rollers C C C Water or alcohol.
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Water or alcohol.
Bottom Plate Pad (By- Water or alcohol.
C C C
pass feed)
Registration Sensor C C C Blower brush
Paper Feed Roller Gear Silicone Grease G-501. See
L L L
note below.*1
Upper Relay Sensor C C C Blower Brush
DUPLEX UNIT
Upper Transport Roller C C C Water or alcohol.
Lower Transport Roller C C C Water or alcohol.
TRANSFER BELT UNIT

Transfer Belt C R R R Dry cloth.
Transfer Belt Cleaning To prevent damage to the
Blade cleaning blade, always
R R R
replace these items
together.
Transfer Belt Rollers C C C Dry cloth
Entrance Seal C C C Dry cloth
Transfer Entrance Dry cloth
C C C C
Guide
Used Toner Tank I C C C Empty the tank.
Note: Due to their durability and extended service life, the feed rollers, separation rollers, and
pick-up rollers of the mainframe, optional paper trays, and LCT have been removed from the
PM parts list.
2-2
22 September 2006 PM TABLE
B291/B295/B296/B297 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT
Fusing Entrance and Water or alcohol.
C C C
Exit Guide Plates
Hot Roller R R R
Pressure Roller R R R
Maintenance
Fusing Thermistors R R R
Preventive
Cleaning Roller Grease: Barrierta JFE 55/2
L L L
Bushings
Hot Roller Strippers C R C Water or alcohol.
Paper Exit Guide Ribs Water or alcohol. (See
C C C
illustration below.)
Exit Sensor C C C Blower brush
DRIVE
Drive Belts I Replace if necessary
*1
: Lubricate the paper feed clutch gear [A] with Silicone Grease G501 every P.M.
[A]
Clean here.
B195P901.WMF
B195P902.WMF
2-3
PM TABLE 22 September 2006
B714 EM 80K 160K 240K NOTE

ARDF (for originals)
Pick-up Roller C R R R Belt cleaner
Feed Belt C R R R Belt cleaner
Separation Roller C R R R Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C C C Blower brush
Drive Gears L L L Grease, G501
B542 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

PAPER TRAY UNIT
Relay Rollers C C C Dry or damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Dry or damp cloth
B543 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

LCT
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Dry or damp cloth
B408/B545 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

1000-SHEET/TWO-TRAY FINISHER
Rollers C Water or alcohol.
Brush Roller Replace if required.
I I I I
(A681 only)
Discharge Brush C C C C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if required.
Punch Waste Hopper* I I I I Empty hopper.
*: Only for B545
B546 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

BOOKLET FINISHER
Transport Belt C C C
Stapler Paddles C C C
B544 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

1-BIN TRAY UNIT
Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
2-4
22 September 2006 GENERAL CAUTIONS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transfer belt, drum, or development unit when it is
removed or re-installed, never turn off either power switch while electrical
components are active.
CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
Replacement
Adjustment
any of the procedures in this section.
3.1.1 LASER UNIT
1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode
casing. Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open
the optical housing unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment. Otherwise, an
SC condition will be generated.
3.1.2 USED TONER
1. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner
into an open flame, for toner dust may ignite.
3-1
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS 22 September 2006
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Q’ty
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pc./set) 1
A2929500 Test Chart – S5S (10 pc./set) 1
VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 187 1
A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1
A2309004 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit 1
B6455010 SD Card 1
B6456800 USB Read/Writer 1
G0219350 Loop Back Connector 1
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part Number Description Q’ty
A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1
52039502 Silicone Grease G-501 1
3-2
22 September 2006 FRONT DOOR
3.3 FRONT DOOR
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B195R901.WMF
1. Open front door.

2. To remove the front door, remove left pin [A], and right pin [B].
3-3
DUPLEX UNIT 22 September 2006
3.4 DUPLEX UNIT

[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B195R903.WMF
1. Connector cover [A] ( x1)

2. Duplex connectors [B] ( x2)
3. Duplex support arm [C] ( x1)
4. Duplex unit [D]
NOTE: Grip the duplex unit with both hands, slowly rotate it towards you and
then lift up.
3-4
22 September 2006 RIGHT UPPER COVER
3.5 RIGHT UPPER COVER
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R904.WMF
NOTE: Work carefully to avoid damaging the development roller.

• Duplex unit ( Duplex Unit)
• Transfer belt unit ( 3.13.1)
• Remove the upper right cover [A]
( x1)
Loop fastener
( x1)
( x1, Bushing x1)
3-5
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT 22 September 2006
3.6 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A] B195R902.WMF
Use this procedure to remove the complete by-pass tray unit from the machine. If
you wish to remove only the table, or some of the components of this unit, see 3.16.
1. Duplex unit ( 3.4)
2. Left cover [A] ( x1)
3. Right cover [B] ( x1)
4. Connectors [C] ( x2)
5. By-pass unit [D] ( x4)
NOTE: After removing the screws, lift to unhook the by-pass tray unit from the
frame of the machine.
3-6
22 September 2006 REAR COVERS
3.7 REAR COVERS

3.7.1 REAR UPPER COVER
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
B195R953.WMF
1. Rear upper cover [A] ( x2)

2. Controller cover [B] ( x2)
3.7.2 REAR LOWER COVER
[A]
B195R905.WMF
1. Rear lower cover [A] ( x4)
3-7
LEFT COVER 22 September 2006
3.8 LEFT COVER
[B]
[A]
B195R955.WMF
1. Left upper cover [A] ( x4)

2. Controller cover [B] ( x2)
3-8
22 September 2006 SCANNER UNIT
3.9 SCANNER UNIT

3.9.1 ARDF
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
B195R906.WMF
1. Interface connector (not shown)

2. ARDF [A] ( x2)
• Push the ARDF towards the front of the machine to align the keyholes in the
ARDF base with the heads of the stud screws and lift.
3-9
SCANNER UNIT 22 September 2006
3.9.2 EXPOSURE GLASS
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B195R907.WMF
1. Open the ARDF or platen cover.

2. Rear scale [A] ( x3)
3. Left scale [B] ( x2)
4. Exposure glass [C]
5. DF exposure glass [D]
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the white dot is
positioned at the rear left corner.
3-10
3.9.3 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS, OPERATION PANEL

[C]
[E]
[D]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B] B195R908.WMF
[C]
B195R909.WMF
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass and DF exposure glass ( 3.9.2)
3. Operation panel [A] ( x2, x1)
4. Operation panel base [B] ( x4)
5. Scanner rear cover [C] ( x4). Carefully lift in the direction of the arrow to
disconnect the tab.
6. Right cover [D] ( x3 )
7. Left cover [E] ( x2)
3-11
3.9.4 LENS BLOCK, SBU ASSEMBLY

[A]
[B]
[C]
B195R910.WMF
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass and DF exposure glass ( 3.9.2)
3. Lens cover [A] ( x4)
4. Flexible cable [B] ( x1)
5. Lens block assembly [C] ( x4)
NOTE: The elements of the lens block assembly have been factory adjusted
and paint locked at 8 points. Do not attempt to replace these items.
Replace the unit.
6. Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments ( 3.21)
3-12
3.9.5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS

[B]
[A] [C]
Replacement
Adjustment
B195R911A.WMF
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass ( 3.9.2)
3. Lens block ( 3.9.4)
4. Original size sensors [A] ( x1, x2)
5. Original size sensors [B] ( x1, x2)
6. Original size sensor [C] ( x1, x1)
3-13
3.9.6 EXPOSURE LAMP

[D] [C]
[A]
B195R912.WMF
[B]
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
3. Operation panel [A] ( x2, x1)
4. Slide 1st scanner [B] to the cutout to expose connector and screw.
5. Exposure lamp [C] ( x1, x1)
Important
• Never touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with bare hands.
• Slide the exposure lamp toward the rear to disengage the tab on its base
from the hole below and then lift out.
3-14
3.9.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR
[B]
[C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B195R913.WMF
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Scanner rear cover ( 3.9.3)
3. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
4. Scanner HP sensor [B] ( x1)
5. Platen cover sensor [C] ( x1, x1)
3-15
3.9.8 SCANNER MOTOR
[A]
[C]
[B]
B195R914.WMF
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
3. Rear bracket [A] ( x5, x2)
4. Scanner motor bracket [B] ( x3, x1, spring x1, timing belt x1)
NOTE: Loosen motor bracket [B] ( x3) to release tension on belt (motor
slides side to side).
5. Scanner motor [C] ( x2, x1)
6. Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments ( 3.21)
3-16
3.9.9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B195R915.WMF
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
3. Rear bracket [A] ( x5, x2)
4. Lamp stabilizer [B] ( x2, Standoffs x3)
5. Scanner motor drive board [C] ( x2, x2)
3-17
3.9.10 SCANNER WIRE
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B195R916.WMF
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
3. Scanner exterior panels and operation panel ( 3.9.3)
Front wire:
4. Left stay [A] ( x5)
5. Right stay [B] ( x5)
6. Front stay [C] ( x6)
7. Front scanner rail [D] ( x2)
8. To replace the scanner wire, see page 3-20.
3-18
Rear wire:
[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
B195R917.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] ( x1)

2. Scanner motor ( 3.9.8)
3. Rear bracket [B] ( x9)
4. Rear scanner rail [C] ( x2)
5. Scanner drive pulley [D] ( x1)
3-19
[A]
[B]
B195R918.WMF
B195R920.WMF
[C]
To replace the scanner wire:

1. Front and rear scanner wire bracket [A] ( x1 ea.)
2. Tension spring [B]
3. Tension bracket [C] ( x1). Loosen and do not remove!
4. Remove wires, front and rear.
5. Attach the new wires.
NOTE: Illustration above shows the front wire.
6. Pass the wire through the pulleys as shown in the illustration, and then pass
the bead-end of the wire through the slot in the pulley.
7. Turn the pulley until you see the red mark on the wire. 2 turns and 6 turns (see
top illustration)
8. Without allowing the wire to loosen, tape the wire to the pulley.
9. Pass the wire through c.
10. Complete threading the wire: dÎeÎfÎTension springÎScrew
11. Scanner wire bracket g ( x1)
3-20
[A]
[B]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[C] B195R921.WMF
Completion:
1. Adjust the 1st scanner [A] position with the scanner positioning tools (P/N
A0069104).
2. Secure the 1st scanner with the scanner wire brackets [B] ( x2)
3. Tighten tension bracket [C] ( x1)
4. Secure scanner wire pulley [D] (Allen screw x1)
1) Remove the positioning tools. After sliding the scanner to the right and left
several times, set the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket and
tension bracket again.
2) Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments
( 3.21)
3-21
LASER UNIT 22 September 2006
3.10 LASER UNIT

WARNING
any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
3.10.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See the next
page for removal instructions.)
B195R500.WMF
CAUTION
VORSICHT CATION-CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT-LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
>PS<
B195R922.WMF
3-22
22 September 2006 LASER UNIT
3.10.2 LASER UNIT

[A]
[D]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[F]
[E] [C]
B195R211.WMF
WARNING
this procedure. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
2. Raise the toner bottle holder handle [A].
3. Remove front door [B] (Pins x2)
4. Remove toner collection plate [C] ( x).
5. Remove inner cover [D] ( x 2, x 1)
6. While pressing in the top leaf on the left side, remove the shield glass cover [E].
• The shield glass cover holds the shield glass firmly in place and prevents it
from accidental removal.
• When re-attaching the shield glass cover, the top leaf lies on top of the
plastic form.
7. Shield glass [F]
3-23
[B]
[C]
B195R900.WMF
[A]
8. Shield plate [A] ( x 2)

9. While holding the LD board securely, disconnect the laser unit [B] ( x 6, Flat
film cable x1)
10. Hold the laser unit [C] by its casing, slide it out of the machine ( x 2)
3-24
3.10.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B195R928.WMF
B195R923.WMF
1. Laser unit ( 3.10.2)

2. Laser unit cover [A] ( x4, 2 hooks)
3. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x4, x1)
4. After replacing the motor, do the image adjustment. ( 3.21)
3-25
3.10.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR
[A]
B195R929.WMF
1. Laser unit ( 3.10.2)

2. Laser synchronization detector [A] ( x1, x1).
3-26
3.10.5 LD UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R513.WMF
1. Laser unit ( 3.10.2)

2. LD unit [A] ( x3, x1)
NOTE: To avoid damaging the LD board, hold it securely when disconnecting
the connectors. Hold the laser unit casing.
3. After replacing the LD board, perform SP 2-109 to adjust the laser beam pitch
(described on the next page).
3-27
Laser beam pitch adjustment

After replacing the LD board, perform the laser beam pitch adjustment. There are
two laser beam pitch adjustment procedures: one for 400 dpi, and one for 600 dpi.
These adjustments use the following SP modes.
SP2-110 Test Mode Dpi (0: 400 dpi, 8: 600 dpi)

SP2-109-1: LD Beam Pitch Adjustment – 400 dpi
SP2-109-2: LD Beam Pitch Adjustment – 600 dpi
SP2-109-3: LD Initial Setting – 400 dpi
SP2-109-4: LD Initial Setting – 600 dpi
1. Set SP2-110 to 0 (for 400 dpi), or to 8 (for 600 dpi).

2. Do SP 2-109-8 to reset all the beam pitch data.
3. For SP2-109-1 input 144.
NOTE: The entry “144” is only a starting reference value that will allow the
machine to operate. It is only a starting point for adjustment.
4. Do SP2-109-3.
5. Print the test pattern onto A3 (11" x 17") paper using SP2-902-3 No. 12.
( 5.2.3 Test Pattern Printing (SP2-902).
6. On the test pattern write 144, the value of SP2-109-1.
7. Change the value of SP2-109-1 and then print another test pattern, repeating
steps 2 to 6. Print about 5 patterns with different values for SP2-109-1 (e.g. 48,
96, 192, 240).
8. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, the image
looks like a black vertical stripe pattern.
NOTE: For example, if the pattern made with the value 192 has fewer obvious
stripes than the other printouts, the correct value is near 192.
9. Fine adjustment: Do steps 2 to 6 to adjust the laser beam pitch position until
thin lines are of uniform thickness (no stripes should appear on the printout).
NOTE: In step 3, input a value estimated to be correct (e.g., if 192 was the
closest, try 182), then do steps 4 and 5, then if necessary go back to
step 2 and try another value.
3-28
10. After adjusting the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi, adjust it for 600 dpi, using the
same procedure as for 400 dpi (use the SP modes for 600 dpi). Laser beam
pitch for 600 dpi should be 24~48 more than for 400 dpi.
OK: Adjustment Complete
Replacement
Adjustment
B195R552.WMF
NG: Adjustment Not Complete
B195R553.WMF
3-29
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 22 September 2006
3.11 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

3.11.1 PCU
[B]
[D]
[A]
B195R930.WMF
[C]
B195R931.WMF

2. Lower the by-pass tray, open the duplex unit, and open the transfer unit right
cover.
3. Spread a sheet of A4/ LTR paper on top of the open front door to catch loose
toner.
4. Loosen [A] ( x 1).
5. Push [B] slightly to the left.
6. Raise the release lever [C].
7. Hold the PCU at [D] and pull it out of the machine.
8. Cover the OPC with a sheet of paper to protect it from light.
Reinstallation
• Open the right cover before you install the PCU in the machine.
• Make sure that the PCU brackets are engaged with the rails before you slowly
push the PCU into the machine.
3-30
22 September 2006 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3.11.2 DRUM
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
B195R932.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C] B195R934.WMF
1. Remove the PCU ( 3.11.1)

2. Toner cap [A]
3. Insert cap [A] into the toner entrance hole [B].
NOTE: Make sure that the cap is inserted completely into the hole.
4. On the left side of the PCU, disconnect the
spring [C]. 3 3
5. On the right side of the PCU disconnect the

spring [D] and attach it to hooks as shown.
• To prevent breaking the weaker hook , use
a pair of needle-nose pliers to disconnect the 2 2
spring at , then re-attach to and .
• Moving this spring retracts the movable drum
cleaning blade so it does not touch the
surface of the drum when the drum is re- 1 1
installed. B195R935.WMF
3-31
[A]
[B]
B195R936.WMF
B195R97.WMF
[D] [C]
6. Turn the PCU upside-down, and remove lower PCU cover [A] ( x 2, 3 pawls).
7. Pull the drum [B] towards the front (the left side in the illustration) while
releasing the charge roller [C] using the release lever [D], and then remove
the drum .
CAUTION: Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.
8. Replace the drum and re-attach the lower PCU cover.
9. Detach the spring from , and re-attach to ,
. 3 3
CAUTION: You must return re-attach the spring

to , in order for the cleaning
blade to operate correctly.
2 2
If you fail to re-attach the spring to , the
movable cleaning blade will not contact the
drum for cleaning, but the machine will operate
without generating an error. However, copies 1 1
will gradually become dirty due to toner B195R938.WMF
collecting on the drum.

10. Re-attach the spring on the left side of the PCU.
11. After replacing the drum, perform the ID sensor initial setting using SP3001 002.
3-32
3.11.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
B195R933.WMF
1. Remove the drum. ( 3.11.2)

2. Pawl assembly [A]
3. Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1, spur x 1)
Pick-off pawl position adjustment

If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can
be adjusted using either method:
• Changing the spur position.
• Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position
CAUTION: After re-assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable
cleaning blade is re-attached to the , position. ( 3.11.2)
3-33
3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E]
B195R937.WMF
[C]

2. Two snap rings [A] ( x 2).
3. Push charge roller holder [B] toward the front of the PCU and remove the
spring [C].
4. Charge roller [D].
NOTE: Disengage the charge roller on the right side to remove. Try to avoid
touching the charge roller.
5. Cleaning roller [E].
NOTE: Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove.
6. After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller, check the value of SP2001
001. If it is not at the standard value (1500 V), set SP2001 001 to –1500 V.
NOTE: If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the
charge roller voltage will be too high.
3-34
3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 2
[D]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R939.WMF
[C]
1. Remove the OPC drum. ( 3.11.2)

2. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller. ( 3.11.4)
3. Remove the movable cleaning blade [A]. ( x 1)
Re-installation
• Engage the left end of the cleaning blade first, then make sure that both arms [B]
and [C] are through the holes on the left and right side.
• When you re-attach the snap-ring, make sure that the head of the snap ring [D] is
below the blade.
3-35
3.11.6 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 1
[A]
B195R940.WMF

2. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller. ( 3.11.4)
3. Remove the movable cleaning blade. ( 3.11.5)
4. Remove the stationary drum cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
3-36
3.11.7 ID SENSOR
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B195R941.WMF
[C]
Remove:
• Remove the PCU ( 3  .11.1)
• Fusing unit ( 3.15)
• Development unit ( 3.12.1)
1. Remove the PCU rail [A] ( x2, x1)
2. Remove the ID sensor bracket [B] ( x1, x1)
3. Remove the ID sensor [C] ( x1)
4. Do SP3-001-2 to initialize the ID sensor.
3-37
DEVELOPMENT 22 September 2006
3.12 DEVELOPMENT
3.12.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[B]
[C]
B195R943.WMF
[A]
B195R942.WMF
• Open the right upper cover and front cover.

• PCU. ( 3.11.1)
1. Spread paper on a clean flat surface that is free of pins, paper clips, staples,
screws or any other metal objects.
2. Loosen [A] ( x 1).
3. Push [B] slightly to the left.
4. Development unit [C]
NOTE: Pull slowly to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
5. Set the development unit on the spread paper.
6. If you are temporarily installing a used development unit for test purposes,
perform SP2-802-1 after installation. For more, see Section "5. Service Tables".
3-38
22 September 2006 DEVELOPMENT
3.12.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B195R945.WMF [C]
B195R944.WMF
1. Development unit ( 3.12.1)

2. Upper development cover [A] ( x2)
3. Development filter [B]
NOTE: Make sure that the surface with the red mark is facing up.
4. Make sure that the ground plate [C] is positioned correctly.
3-39
3.12.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER
[A]
B195R946.WMF
1. Development unit ( 3.12.1)

2. Upper development cover ( 3.12.2)
3. Development roller [A] ( x2)
NOTE: Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
3-40
3.12.4 DEVELOPER
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
B195R947.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
B195R948.WMF

2. Remove the development roller ( 3.12.3)
3. Tip out the old developer [A].
4. Turn drive gear [B] to ensure that no developer remains in the unit or on the
developer roller.
NOTE: Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations.
Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
5. Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer [C] evenly along the length of the
development unit.
6. Rotate the drive gear [D] to work the developer into the unit. Repeat [C] and [D]
until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges.
3-41
[A]
B195R949.WMF
7. Reassemble the development unit

8. Cover the toner entrance hole [A] with a piece of paper.
9. Install the development unit in the machine.
10. Turn on the main power switch, and wait for the machine to warmup.
11. Do SP2801 to initialize the TD sensor and enter the developer lot number.
NOTE: When performing this setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a
piece of paper. This prevents used toner falling from the PCU into the
development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering
with the Vref setting (toner density reference voltage).
12. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet [A] from the
development unit.
3-42
3.12.5 TD SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R950.WMF
1. Remove the development unit. ( 3.12.1)

2. Empty all developer from the development unit
3. TD sensor [A] ( x1)
NOTE: The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double-sided tape. Pry it
off with the flat head of a screwdriver. Use fresh double-sided tape to
re-attach the sensor.
4. Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial
setting using SP2-801.
NOTE: When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance
hole with a piece of paper.
3-43
TRANSFER UNIT 22 September 2006
3.13 TRANSFER UNIT

3.13.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[A]
[B]
B195R952.WMF
B195R951.WMF
NOTE: To avoid exposing the PCU drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the
right cover will be open for a long period.
1. Lower the by-pass tray, open the duplex unit, and open the right cover.
2. Transfer unit [A] (Hook x1)
3. Transfer belt [B] (springs x2, Hook x1)
NOTE: Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
3-44
22 September 2006 TRANSFER UNIT
3.13.2 TRANSFER BELT
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
B195R954.WMF
[B]
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. ( 3.13.1)
2. Belt drive gear [A]
3. Set screws [B] ( x2)
4. Lay on a flat, clean surface and fold the unit to release the tension on the belt
[C].
5. Transfer belt [D]
NOTE: 1) Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
2) Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and shafts
with alcohol to prevent the belt from slipping.
3) When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the
pin [E].
4) To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the
rollers and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the
edges of any of the rollers.
3-45
TRANSFER UNIT 22 September 2006
3.13.3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE AND TONER

OVERFLOW SENSOR
R
Br
Bl
[A]
[B]
B195R523.WMF
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade

1. Transfer belt unit. ( 3.13.1)
2. Transfer belt. ( 3.13.2)
3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x3)
NOTE: Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for
dust or damage.
Toner Overflow Sensor
1. Transfer belt unit. ( 3.13.1)
2. Transfer belt.
3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x3)
4. Turn over the transfer unit and empty the used toner in the transfer unit.
5. Toner overflow sensor [B] ( x1, x3)
NOTE: Re-install the color-coded wires in the correct order.
R: Red, Br: Brown, Bl: Blue
3-46
22 September 2006 PAPER FEED
3.14 PAPER FEED

3.14.1 PICK-UP, SEPARATION, AND FEED ROLLERS
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[A] [C]
B195R956.WMF
1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A]
3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)
3-47
PAPER FEED 22 September 2006
3.14.2 LOWER RIGHT COVER
[A]
[B]
B195R957.WMF

2. By-pass tray ( 3.6)
3. LCT (if installed)
4. Lower right cover [A] ( x5)
5. Vertical transport cover [B]
NOTE: Push the cover completely to the left and then press in on the right tab
to release the peg from the hole.
3-48
3.14.3 RELAY/UPPER PAPER FEED AND LOWER PAPER FEED

CLUTCHES
[D]
[E]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[F]
[C]
B195R958.WMF
[B]
1. Rear lower cover ( 3.7.2)

2. Remove the IOB. ( 3.19.3)
3. First paper feed clutch bracket [A] ( x2, bushing x1)
4. Second paper feed clutch bracket [B] ( x2, bushing x1)
5. Drive bracket [C] ( x1, spring x1, bearing x1)
6. Relay clutch [D] ( x1)
7. Upper paper feed clutch [E] ( x1)
8. Lower paper feed clutch [F] ( x1)
3-49
3.14.4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1

[B]
[B]
[A]
[B]
B195R959.WMF
[C]
B195R960.WMF
1. Upper paper tray

2. Right lower cover. ( 3.14.2)
3. Right upper cover ( 3.5)
4. Upper paper feed clutch [A] ( 3.14.3 )
5. 3 relay gears [B]
6. Upper paper feed unit [C] ( x2, x1)
3-50
3.14.5 LOWER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R962.WMF
[C]
[E]
B195R961.WMF
[D]
1. Lower the paper trays

2. Right lower cover ( 3.14.2)
3. Remove the lower paper feed clutch [A] ( 3.14.3 )
4. Relay gears [B] (x3)
5. Cover [C] ( x2)
6. Gear [D] (x1)
7. Lower paper feed unit [E] ( x2, x1)
3-51
3.14.6 PAPER END/PAPER HEIGHT/RELAY SENSORS
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
B195R963.WMF
1. Remove the appropriate paper feed unit. ( 3.14.4, 3.14.5)

2. Paper height sensor [A] ( x1)
3. Paper end sensor [B] ( x1).
4. Relay sensor bracket [C] ( x1, x1)
5. Relay sensor [D]
3-
3-52
3.14.7 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Remove [D]
• Front door ( 3-3)
• Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1) [C]
• Right upper cover ( 3.5)
• Transfer belt unit ( 3.13.1
• PCU ( 3.11.1)
3. Inner cover [A] ( x2) [B]
Replacement
4. Front registration holder [B] ( x1)
Adjustment
B195R998.WMF
5. Front registration roller gear [C] ( x1) [A]

6. Registration roller bushing [D] (spring x 1)
7. High voltage power supply board [E]

( x3, x6) [F]
8. Flywheel [F] ( x3)
9. Cover [G] ( x1, x2)
10. Right rear cover [H] ( x3) [H]
[E]
[G] B195R981A.WMF
11. Right cover switch bracket [I] ( x1) [J]

12. Rear registration holder [J] ( x1)
13. Registration roller bushing [K] ( x1,
spring x1)
[K]
[I]
B195R982.WMF
3-53
[B]
[A]
B195R983.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
B195R984.WMF
14. Guide plate [A] and registration roller [B] (spring x1, x 1)
15. Registration guide plate [C] ( x2, x1)
16. Sensor bracket [D] ( x1)
17. Registration sensor [E] ( x1, x1)
3-54
3.14.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B195R964.WMF
1. Rear lower cover ( 3.7.2)

2. Remove the IOB ( 3.19.3)
3. Bracket [A] ( x2, x1)
4. Tray lift motor [B] ( x2)
3-55
3.14.9 FEED/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
[B]
[A]
B195R985.WMF
[C]
1. Rear lower cover ( x4) ( 3.7.2)

2. Rear upper cover ( x4) ( 3.7.1)
3. Tray lift motor ( 3.14.8)
4. Support [A] ( x2, harnesses x2)
5. Timing belt [B] (Raise arm to release tension on belt.)
6. Feed/development motor [C] ( x3, x2)
3-56
3.14.10 IDLE ROLLER DUST BLADE
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R986.WMF
1. Open the duplex unit and right door.

2. Detach the dust blade [A].
3. Spread some paper on a flat surface and tap the dust blade gently to remove
paper dust collected in its dust box.
3-57
3.14.11 REGISTRATION ROLLER DUST BLADE
[A]
B195R988.WMF
[B]
[C]
B195R987.WMF
1. Open the duplex unit and open the right door.

2. Remove the PCU ( 3.11.1)
3. Remove the development unit [A].
4. Press the top of the blade [B] to unlock it and open it to the left.
5. Remove the dust blade [C] from the machine.
3-58
22 September 2006 FUSING UNIT
3.15 FUSING UNIT

CAUTION
Allow time for the unit to cool before doing the following procedure.
3.15.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL

[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[D]
[A]
B195R989A.WMF
1. Open the front door, duplex unit, and right door.

2. Set screw [A] ( x 1)
3. Fusing unit release lever [B]
4. Slide out the fusing unit [C]
NOTE: The larger knob [D] is provided to make turning the hot roller easier to free
jams.
3-59
FUSING UNIT 22 September 2006
3.15.2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE
[A]
B195R990A.WMF
1. Fusing unit ( 3.15)

2. Exit guide [A]. Press the guide to the left and then press on the right end to
release the peg from the hole.
3-60
3.15.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B195R991A.WMF

2. Fusing unit cover [A] ( x4)
NOTE: Note the positioning of the step screws x2 and the set screws x2.
3. Hot roller strippers x7 and springs x7
3-61
3.15.4 FUSING LAMPS
[C]
[E]
[A] [D]
[B]
B195R992A.WMF
B195R993A.WMF

2. Fusing unit cover ( 3.15.3)
3. Fusing entrance guide [A] ( x4)
4. Lower cover [B] ( x1)
Left side
5. Two terminals [C] ( x2)
6. Center fusing lamp lead [D] (Clamps x4)
7. Bracket [E] ( x1)
3-62
[C] [D]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B195R994A.WMF
Right side
1. Two terminals [A] ( x2)
2. Spring [B]
3. Connector bracket [C] ( x2)
4. Bracket [D] ( x2)
Important
• To avoid breaking the fusing lamps, handle them with care.
• Avoid touching the lamps with bare hands.
• Note the top/bottom positioning of the fusing lamps as you remove them. The
sizes of the holes in the holder match the sizes of the ends of the 650 W
lamp (red) and 650 W lamp (brown).
5. Remove both fusing lamps.
3-63
3.15.5 THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS
[B]
[A]
B195R995A.WMF
[C]
[D]
B195R996A.WMF

2. Fusing upper and lower cover. ( 3.15.3)
3. Center thermistor [A] ( x1, x1, holder x1)
4. End thermistor [B] ( x1, x1, holder x1)
CAUTION: The thermistors are thinly coated and extremely fragile. Handle with
care to avoid damaging them. They should be replaced every 150K.
5. Center thermostat [C] ( x2)

6. End thermostat [D] ( x2)
3-64
3.15.6 HOT ROLLER/PRESSURE ROLLER
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[B] B195R997A.WMF

2. Fusing upper and lower cover. ( 3.15.3)
3. Fusing lamps. ( 3.15.4)
4. Springs x2 [A] (both sides)
5. Arms x2 [B] (both sides)
6. Pawl bracket [C] ( x4)
3-65
[D]
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[G]
B195R970A.WMF
7. Hot roller [A]

CAUTION: The hot roller is easily damaged. Always handle it carefully.
8. C-rings x2 [B] (both ends)

9. Drive gear [C]
10. Bushings x2 [D] (both ends)
11. Pressure roller [E]
12. Fusing knob [F] ( x1)
13. Bushings x2 [G] (both ends)
NOTE: 1) Before installing the new hot roller, peel off 3 cm (1 inch) from both
ends of the protective sheet on the new roller.
2) Never touch the surface of the rollers.
3) Work carefully to avoid damaging the surface of the hot roller.
4) The standard pressure roller spring position is the upper position.
5) When reinstalling the hot roller assembly and pressure roller assembly,
make sure that the flange position of the bushings is as shown.
3-66
22 September 2006 BY-PASS TRAY
3.16 BY-PASS TRAY

3.16.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[D]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B195R976.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x1)

2. Front cover [B] ( x1)
3. Hinge cover [C] ( x1)
4. Upper cover [D] ( x2)
5. Close the duplex unit and pull out the upper cover.
3-67
BY-PASS TRAY 22 September 2006
3.16.2 BY-PASS PAPER FEED AND PICK-UP ROLLER

REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B195R977.WMF
1. Upper cover ( 3.16.1)

2. Lift up paper end feeler [A] to lock feeler in position.
NOTE: Before reinstalling the upper cover, return the paper end feeler to its
original position.
3. Replace the paper feed roller [B] ( x1)
4. Replace the pick-up roller [C].
3-68
3.16.3 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R978.WMF
1. Close the by-pass table.

2. Remove the separation roller [A] from the bottom ( x1)
3-69
3.16.4 PAPER END SENSOR, PICK-UP SOLENOID
[C]
[B] [A]
B195R979.WMF
1. Upper cover ( 3.16.1)

2. Lift paper end feeler [A].
NOTE: Before reinstalling the upper cover, return the paper end feeler to its
original position.
3. Replace the paper end sensor [B] ( x1).
4. Pick-up solenoid [C] ( x1, ) x1, spring x1)
3-70
3.16.5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[B]
[A]
B195R980.WMF
1. Hook [A]
2. Paper tray [B] ( x1).
3. Size sensor board [C].
NOTE: To avoid breaking the hook of the paper size sensor board, handle it
carefully during removal.
3-71
3.16.6 BY-PASS TABLE REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
B195R801.WMF
Note: The entire by-pass tray unit can be removed, not just the table. ( 3.6)
1. Hinge cover ( 3.16.1)
2. Harness [A] ( x1).
3. Screws [B] ( x2)
4. By-pass table [C].
CAUTION: To relieve pressure on the spring during removal, depress it as
shown in the illustration.
3-72
3.16.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R802.WMF [C]
[B]
B195R803.WMF
1. By-pass tray.
2. Paper feed unit [A] ( x2, x2)
3. Rear bracket [B] ( x4, x1, bushing x1)
4. Paper feed clutch [C] ( x1)
3-73
3.17 DUPLEX UNIT

3.17.1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL
[A]
B195R804.WMF
1. Duplex unit cover [A] ( x4)
3-74
22 September 2006 DUPLEX UNIT
3.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
B195R805.WMF
1. Duplex unit cover ( 3.17.1)

2. Sensor holder [A] ( x1)
3. Entrance sensor [B] ( x1)
3-75
3.17.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
G065R103.WMF

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Exit sensor [B] ( x1)
3-76
22 September 2006 DRIVE AREA
3.18 DRIVE AREA

3.18.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH, TRANSFER BELT CONTACT
CLUTCH
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[D]
B195R807.WMF
[C] B195R808.WMF
1. Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.7.1)

2. High voltage supply board [A] (
x6, x3)
NOTE: Make sure that you re-
connect the wires in the correct
order. They are labeled:
1Î2ÎBÎC
3. Flywheels [B] ( x3)
4. Registration clutch [C] ( x1,
x1) B195R809.WMF
5. Transfer belt contact clutch [D] ( x2, x2)
3-77
DRIVE AREA 22 September 2006
3.18.2 MAIN MOTOR
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B] B195R924.WMF
Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1)
• High voltage power supply, flywheel ( 3.18.1)
1. Remove the main cooling fan [A] ( x2)
2. Timing belt [B] x1
3. Bracket [C] ( x3)
4. Main motor [D] ( x2, x3)
3-78
22 September 2006 DRIVE AREA
3.18.3 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR

• Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1)
• Fusing unit cover ( 3.15.3) (Do not [A]
disconnect.)
• Paper output tray
[A]: Harness clamps (=x3)
[B]: Connector bracket ( x1, = x1) [C]
[C]: Main fan ( x1, x1)
Replacement
Adjustment
[B] B195R925.WMF
[D]: Motor bracket ( x4, x2)
B195R926.WMF
[E]: Fusing exit motor ( x4)
B195R927.WMF
3-79
DRIVE AREA 22 September 2006
3.18.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B195R810.WMF
[E]
[F]
B195R813.WMF
1. Open the front door

2. Raise holder handle [A]
3. Push the holder lever [B] to the right
4. Stopper [C]
5. Toner bottle holder and bottle [D]
6. Motor harness [E] (clamps x 2)
7. Toner supply motor [F] (hooks x2, x1)
NOTE: Press both sides of the motor to release it.
3-80
22 September 2006 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
3.19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

3.19.1 NVRAM
Important:
• Do not remove the NVRAM until you have uploaded its contents.
• Always touch a metal surface to discharge any static on your hands before you
touch the controller board.
• Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other components
on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips.
Replacement
1. Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC
Adjustment
report.
2. Turn off the main switch.
3. Remove the controller cover ( x2) [A]
( 3.7.1)
4. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
( x1).
5. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card slot
C3.
7. Do SP5824.
8. Touch “Execute” to start uploading the
NVRAM data. [B]
9. Turn off the main switch and remove
the SD card. B195R806.WMF
10. Remove the controller box ( x1)
3-81
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 22 September 2006
11. Remove the NVRAM (x2) from the controller board and replace them with
the new chips.
NOTE: Both NVRAM chips must be replaced.
12. Reinstall the controller box.
13. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data in SD card slot C3.
15. Do SP5825.
16. Touch “Execute” to start downloading the NVRAM data. [A
17. Turn off the main switch and remove the SD card.
19. Do SP5990 001 to print another SMC report.
20. Compare this new SMC report with the report you printed in Step 1. If any of
the SP settings are different, enter the SP settings of the first report.
21. Execute SP5907 and enter the brand and model name of the machine for
Windows Plug & Play capability.
3-82
3.19.2 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R820.WMF
1. Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1)

2. High voltage power supply [A] ( x3, x6)
3-83
3.19.3 IOB
[A] B195R821.WMF
[B]
B195R822.WMF
1. Remove the rear lower cover [A] ( x 4).

2. Remove the IOB [B] ( All, x 4, Ribbon cable x 1).
3. The IOB is identical for the B291/B295/B296/B297. However, the DIP switches
are set differently for each machine. Check the DIP switches then adjust
settings as required. (See next page.)
3-84
IOB DIP Switch Settings (SW101)

1. The position of SW 1 determines the engine speed. This switch should be UP
(ON) for the B291/B296 (35 cpm) or DOWN (OFF) for the B295/B297 (45 cpm)
NOTE: Move a switch UP to ON or DOWN to OFF.
2. SW 2, 3, 4, and 5 should all be DOWN (OFF). Do not change these settings.

This information is only for reference:
SW If set to ON
2 Switches off jam detection.
3 Engine program recovery.
4 Print output for debugging.
Replacement
Adjustment
5 Switches off SC detection.
3. SW 6, 7, 8 should be set for the area where the machine is used and serviced.
6 7 8 Location
OFF OFF OFF Japan
ON OFF OFF North America
OFF ON OFF Europe
ON OFF ON Taiwan
ON ON OFF Asia
OFF ON ON Korea
ON ON ON Not used
ON: Up
OFF: Down
3-85
3.19.4 BICU BOARD
1. Controller box [A] ( x5)
[A]
B770I103A.WMF
2. IPU shield plate [B] ( x2)

[B]
B815I110.WMF
3. BICU cover [C] ( x3)

4. BICU [D] ( x2)
[C]
[D] B195R823A.WMF
3-86
3.19.5 PSU
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B195R824A.WMF
1. Left cover ( 3.8)

2. Ground (earth) plates [A] ( x2)
3. PSU [B] ( x4, x all)
3-87
HDD, CONTROLLER BOARD 22 September 2006
3.20 HDD, CONTROLLER BOARD
[A]
[B]
B195R826.WMF
[C] B195R825.WMF
Important!
The controller boards are machine specific and are not interchangeable:
• The controller board for the B291/B296 (35 cpm) must be installed in a
B291/B296 copier.
• The controller board for the B296/B297 (45 cpm) must be installed in a
B295/B297 copier.
1. Remove the controller cover ( x 2). ( 3.7.1)
2. Controller board faceplate [A] ( x 2).
3. Controller board [B] ( x 4)
4. HDD unit bracket [C] ( x 3, x 2)
5. After replacing the HDD, execute SP 5853 to copy the stamp data from the
firmware ROM to the new disk.
3-88
22 September 2006 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.21 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

Perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following:
• Scanner Wire
• Lens Block/SBU Assembly
• Scanner Drive Motor
• Polygon Mirror Motor
• Paper Side Fence
• Memory All Clear
Replacement
Adjustment
3.21.1 PRINTING
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these
adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No. 10 to print the test pattern for
the following procedures.
3. After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0
again.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001.
Specification: 3 ± 2mm.
2. Check side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust with the
following SP modes.
SP mode Specification
B
1st paper feed SP1-002-1
2nd paper feed SP1-002-2
A
3rd paper feed (Optional
SP1-002-3
PFU tray 1)
4th paper feed (Optional 2 ± 1.5 mm
SP1-002-4
PTU tray 2)
From the duplex tray SP1-002-5
By-pass feed SP1-002-6
B195R827.WMF
LCT SP1-002-7
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
3-89
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING 22 September 2006
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within
specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the
following SP modes.
SP mode Specification
Trailing edge SP2-101-2 3 ± 2 mm D
Right edge SP2-101-4 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
C
Leading edge SP2-101-1 3 ± 2 mm
Left edge SP2-101-3 2 ± 1.5 mm
Trailing edge (duplex SP2-101-5 1.2 ± 2 mm
copy, 2nd side)
Right edge (duplex copy, SP2-101-6 0.3 ± 1.5 mm A
2nd side)
Left edge (duplex copy, SP2-101-7 0.3+2.5/-1.5 B
2nd side) mm
B195R828.WMF
A: Trailing edge blank margin

B: Right edge blank margin
C: Leading edge blank margin
D: Left edge blank margin
Main Scan Magnification
1. Use SP2-902-3, 5(Grid Pattern) to print a single dot pattern.
2. Check magnification, and then SP2-909-1 (Main Scan Magnification: Copy) to
adjust magnification if required. Specification: ±2%.
3-90
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing
registration or printing margin using a trimming area pattern.
The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration
for each paper tray station.
[C] [B]
[D] Turn
Replacement
Adjustment
clockwise
[A]
[E]
Turn
counterclockwise
B195R829.WMF
B195R830.WMF
Use SP2-902-3 No. 10 (Trimming Area) to determine whether a parallelogram

image appears. If the parallelogram pattern appears, perform the following
procedure.
1. Laser unit [A]
2. Bracket [B] ( x2)
3. Install adjustment cam [C] (P/N: A2309003)
4. Secure positioning pin [D] (P/N A2309004) with the two screws removed with
the bracket [B]. Do not tighten the screws at this time.
5. To adjust the position of the laser unit [E]
1) Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam. (See the
illustration above.)
2) Tighten the adjustment bracket.
3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not
satisfactory, repeat steps 5-1) to 5-3).
3-91
3.21.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the
following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode A
Leading Edge SP4-010
Side-to-side SP4-011
B195R832.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
Magnification
Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Sub Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a
copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 (Scanner
Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if necessary.
Specification: ±0.9%.
B195R9833.WMF
A: Main scan magnification
3-92
3.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration
Replacement
Adjustment
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration
B195R9834.WMF B195R9826.WMF
1. Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.

2. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
3. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-1 Side-to-Side Registration ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-2 Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-3 Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: Front) ±4.2 mm
SP6-006-4 Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: Back) ±4.2 mm
SP6-006-5 Rear Edge Erase ±2.0 mm
3-93
3.21.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

After clearing the memory, or if the touch panel detection function is not working
correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only.
1. Press S, press , and then press D 5 times to open the Self-
Diagnostics menu.
B195R834.WMF
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press ).
B195R9835.WMF
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
3-94
22 September 2006 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent damage to the machine, the main Enter SP mode, and then turn
machine cannot be operated until the SC has the main power switch off and
A
been reset by a service representative (see the on.
note below).
SCs that disable only the features that use the Turn the operation switch or
defective item. Although these SCs are not main switch off and on.
B shown to the user under normal conditions,
they are displayed on the operation panel only
when the defective feature is selected.
The SC history is updated. The machine can be The SC will not be displayed.
C
operated as usual. Only the SC history is updated.
shooting
Trouble-
Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs Turn the operation switch off
D displayed on the operation panel. These are re- and on.
displayed if the error occurs again.
When a Level “D” SC code occurs
When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the
operator:
• An error occurred
• The job in progress will be erased
• The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch “Reset” on
the screen to reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch “Reset”
The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and
that the previous job was lost and must be started again. After reading the
message, the operator touches “Confirm” on the screen. The next screen shows
the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the operator turns the machine
off and on.
If the operator touches “Reset”
If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to
reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy
screen.
Important
• Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.
• If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the
Service Center
4-1
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 22 September 2006
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

Important
• If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors
and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause
of the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
• If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to
replace the motor or sensors.
• When a Level “A” or “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot
display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP
mode.
• The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level “D” SC
code. This is done for Level “D” SC codes only.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to
switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the
main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
4-2
4.1.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

101 D Exposure lamp error • Exposure lamp defective
The standard white level was not • Lamp stabilizer defective
detected properly when scanning the • Exposure lamp connector defective
white plate. • Standard white plate dirty
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of
position or dirty
• SBU defective
120 D Scanner home position error 1 • SIB or scanner drive motor defective
The scanner home position sensor • Scanner motor defective
does not detect the on condition during • Harness between SIB and scanner
initialization or copying. drive motor disconnected
• Harness between SIB and scanner
drive motor power source
disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between SIB and HP sensor
disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
shooting
Trouble-
carriage defective
121 D Scanner home position error 2 • SIB or scanner motor drive board
The scanner home position sensor defective
does not detect the off condition during • Scanner motor defective
initialization or copying. • Harness between SIB and scanner
drive motor disconnected
drive motor power source
disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
HP sensor disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
143 C SBU auto adjust error • Exposure lamp defective
One of the following occurred: • Lamp stabilizer defective
When the machine was powered on, • Lamp stabilizer connection loose,
automatic adjustment of the SBU failed. disconnected or damaged
Automatic white density adjustment • White plate mounting is incorrect or
failed when reading standard white defective
plate. • Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of
position or dirty
• SBU defective
• BICU (Ri10) defective
• SIB defective
• Harness connections between SIB
and SBU loose, disconnected, or
damaged.
4-3
144 B SBU communication error • Flat film or harness connectors

Immediately after power on, the between the SBU and SIB are loose,
operation check done by the SIB for the disconnected, or damaged
SBU failed because the SBU was not • Replace SBU
operating normally. • Replace BICU
165 B Copy Data Security Unit error • The Copy Data Security Unit card not
An error occurred when the machine installed
attempted to set the Copy Data • The Copy Data Security Unit card is
Security Unit SD card. installed, but it is not the correct type
for the machine.
302 D Charge roller current leak • Charge roller damaged

A charge roller current leak signal was • High voltage supply board defective
detected. • PCU harness defective or
disconnected
304 D Charge roller current correction error • ID sensor defective
The charge roller bias correction is
performed twice even if the maximum
charge roller bias (-2000V) is applied to
the roller.
321 D F-Gate error: No laser writing signal • BICU board defective
The laser writing signal (F-GATE) does • PCI harness between the controller
not go to LOW for more than 30 board and the BICU defective or
seconds after the copy paper reaches disconnected
the registration sensor.
322 D Synchronization error • Laser synchronization board
The synchronization signal was not connectors loose, disconnected, or
issued within 500 ms after the LD fired damaged
while the polygon motor was turning at • Laser synchronization board
the prescribed number of revolutions. defective
• LD drive board defective
323 D LD drive current too high • LD unit defective (not enough power,
The LD drive board applies more than due to aging)
100 mA to the LD. • Poor connection between the LD unit
and the BICU board
• BICU defective
327 D LD unit home position error 1 • HP sensor/harness defective
The LD unit home position sensor does • LD unit home position sensor
not detect an on condition when the LD defective
unit moves to its home position. • LD positioning motor harness
defective
• LD unit movement blocked because
of incorrect connector routing
328 D LD unit home position error 2 • HP sensor/harness defective
The LD unit home position sensor does • LD positioning/harness motor
not detect an off condition when the LD defective
unit moves from its home position. • LD unit movement blocked because
of incorrect connector routing
4-4
329 D LD unit beam pitch adjusted incorrectly • After initialization of the SP modes,
The LD unit HP sensor does not detect SP2-109-3 or SP2-109-4 was not
the ON condition while changing the LD executed.
unit position for correcting the LD • The harness is blocking the LD drive
position or changing the dpi. (PCB), preventing adjustment of the
pitch.
335 D Polygon motor error 1: On timeout • Polygon motor drive board I/F
The XSCRDY signal did not go LOW harness loose, disconnected, or
(Active) within 10 sec. after the polygon damaged
motor was turned on. • Polygon motor drive board defective
• Polygon motor defective
336 D Polygon motor error 2: Off timeout • Polygon motor drive board I/F
The XSCRDY signal did not go HIGH harness loose, disconnected, or
(Inactive) within 3 sec. after the polygon damaged
motor was turned off. • Polygon motor drive board defective
337 D Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal • Polygon motor drive board I/F
error harness loose, disconnected, or
The XSCRDY signal did not go HIGH damaged
(Inactive) after the polygon motor had • Polygon motor drive board defective
shooting
been rotating normally for 200 ms.
Trouble-
338 D Polygonal Mirror Motor Error 4: • I/F harness of the polygonal mirror
Unstable Timeout motor disconnected or defective.
The XSCRDY signal is detected LOW) • Polygonal mirror motor or polygonal
(Active) after the polygonal mirror motor mirror motor driver defective.
switches on, but the signal is not • Polygonal mirror motor drive pulse is
detected LOW after 1 s has elapsed, not output incorrectly.
and not detected after another 500 ms
has elapsed.
350 D ID sensor pattern test error • ID sensor defective
One of the following readings occurred • ID sensor connector defective
10 times in the ID sensor output when • Poor ID sensor connector connection
the ID sensor pattern was checked: • I/O board (IOB) defective
1) Vsp ≥ 2.5V • Poor writing of ID sensor pattern on
2) Vsg ≤ 2.5V the drum
3) Vsp = 0V • High voltage supply board defective
4) Vsg = 0V • ID sensor dirty
351 D ID sensor Vsg test error • ID sensor defective
When the ID sensor was checked, the • ID sensor connector defective
ID sensor output voltage was 5.0V • Poor ID sensor connection
while the PWM signal input to the ID • I/O board (IOB) defective
sensor was 0. • Scanning system defective
• High voltage supply board defective
• ID sensor dirty
• Defect at the ID sensor pattern
writing area of the drum
4-5
352 D ID sensor, pattern edge detect error • ID sensor defective

The ID sensor pattern edge voltage is • ID sensor connector defective
detected to be not 2.5V twice • Poor ID sensor connector connection
consecutively during an 800 ms • I/O board (IOB) defective
interval. • High voltage supply board defective
• Dirty ID sensor
• Defect at the ID sensor pattern
writing area of the drum
353 D ID sensor, LED current abnormal at • ID sensor defective
initialization • ID sensor harness defective
One of the following ID sensor output • ID sensor connector defective
voltages is detected at ID sensor • Poor ID sensor connection
initialization. • I/O board (IOB) defective
1) Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum • Exposure system defective
PWM input (255) is applied to the • High voltage supply board defective
ID sensor. • Dirty ID sensor
2) Vsg ≥ 4.0V when the minimum
PWM input (0) is applied to the ID
sensor.
354 D ID sensor timeout abnormal at • ID sensor defective
adjustment • ID sensor harness defective
Vsg falls out of the adjustment target • ID sensor connector defective
(4.0 ± 0.2V) at the start of Vsg checking • I/O board (IOB) defective
after 20 seconds • Exposure system defective
• Poor ID sensor connector connection
• High voltage supply board defective
• Dirty ID sensor
390 D TD sensor error: Test value abnormal • TD sensor defective
The TD sensor output voltage is less • TD sensor not connected or
than 0.5V or more than 5.0V after 10 connector damaged
consecutive times during copying. • Poor connection between the TD
sensor and the I/O board (IOB)
• I/O board (IOB) defective
• Toner supply defective
391 D TD sensor error: Auto adjust error • TD sensor abnormal
During automatic adjustment of the TD • TD sensor disconnected
sensor, output voltage is less than 1.8V • Poor TD sensor connection
or more than 4.8V during TD sensor • I/O board (IOB) defective
initial setting. • Toner supply defective
395 D Development output abnormal • High voltage supply board defective
A development bias leak signal is • Poor connection at the development
detected. High voltage output to the bias terminal
development unit exceeded the upper • Poor connection at the high voltage
limit (65%) for 60 ms. supply board
4-6
401 D Transfer roller leak detected • High voltage supply board defective
A transfer roller current leak signal is • Poor cable connection or defective
detected. cable
• Transfer connector defective
402 D Transfer roller open error • High voltage supply board defective
The transfer roller current feedback • Transfer connector cable defective
signal is not detected. • Transfer connector defective
• Poor PCU connection
403 D Transfer belt position sensor error • Main motor/drive malfunction
The transfer belt position sensor does • Transfer belt contact clutch defective
not activate even if the transfer belt • Transfer belt position sensor
contact clutch has been switched on defective
twice and rotated once. • Harness disconnected
405 D Transfer belt error • Main motor/drive malfunction

The transfer belt does not move away • Transfer belt position sensor
from the drum during ID sensor pattern defective
checking. • Poor transfer belt position sensor
connection
• Transfer belt contact clutch defective
shooting
Trouble-
440 D Main motor lock • Physical overload on drive
The PLL lock signal remained HIGH mechanism
while the main motor was off, and when • Main motor drive board (PCB)
the motor was turned on, the signal defective
remained LOW for 2 sec.
450 D Feed Development Motor Error • Motor lock caused by physical
The PLL lock signal remained HIGH overload.
while the feed development motor was • Motor drive board (PCB) defective.
off, and when the motor was turned on,
the signal remained LOW for 2 sec.
490 D Exhaust fan motor lock • Too much load on the drive
An exhaust fan motor lock signal is not mechanism
detected within 5 seconds after the • Exhaust fan motor defective or a
exhaust fan motor turns on. loose object is interfering with the fan
• Poor fan motor connector connection
492 D Cooling fan motor lock • Too much load on the drive
A cooling fan motor lock signal is not mechanism
detected within 5 seconds after the • Cooling fan motor defective or a
cooling fan motor turns on. loose object is interfering with the fan
• Poor fan motor connector connection
4-7
501 B 1st tray lift malfunction

The paper height sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10
seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the
feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the paper
height sensor should de-activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom plate
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, a
message will prompt the user to reset Tray 1. After two attempts to release the
error by re-setting the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is
displayed.
• Lift motor malfunction or disconnected
• Height sensor abnormal, or connector loose
• Loose paper or object between the tray and motor
• Pick-up arm malfunction
502 B 2nd tray lift malfunction
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, a
message will prompt the user to reset Tray 2. After two attempts to re-set the
paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed.
• Lift motor abnormal or disconnected
• Height sensor defective or disconnected
• Loose paper or object between the tray and motor
• Pick-up arm malfunction
503 B 3rd tray lift malfunction (optional paper tray unit)
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, the tray
lift motor halts. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this does not solve
the problem, then this SC is displayed and tray control halts.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
504 B 4th tray lift malfunction (optional paper tray unit)
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, the tray
lift motor halts. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this does not solve
the problem, then this SC is displayed and tray control halts.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
506 B Paper tray unit main motor lock • Paper tray unit main motor defective
(optional paper tray) • Paper tray unit main motor
A main motor lock signal is detected for connection loose
more than 50 ms during rotation. • Too much load on the drive
mechanism
4-8
507 B LCT main motor lock • LCT main motor defective

A main motor lock signal is detected for • Paper tray unit main motor
more than 50 ms during rotation. connection loose
• Too much load on the drive
mechanism
510 B LCT tray malfunction
1) One of the following has occurred:
2) The LCT lift sensor does not activate for more than 18 seconds after the LCT
lift motor turned on.
3) The LCT lower limit sensor does not activate for more than 18 seconds after
the LCT lift motor turned on.
4) The LCT lift sensor is already activated when the LCT lift motor turns on.
5) After the paper end sensor is actuated while the tray is raising, the upper limit
sensor is not actuated within 5 s. A message is displayed to remind the user to
set the paper and tray control halts. Resetting the display is done by opening
and closing the LCT door.
6) The 4) state has been detected 3 times in succession.
• LCT lift motor defective or disconnected.
• Upper limit sensor defective or disconnected
• Pick-up solenoid defective or disconnected
• Paper end sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
520 D Fusing/Feed-Out Motor Error
The PLL lock signal remained HIGH • Motor lock caused by physical
while the fusing/feed-out motor was off, overload.
and when the motor was turned on, the • Motor drive board (PCB) defective.
signal remained LOW for 2 sec.
541 A Fusing thermistor open • Fusing thermistor disconnected
The fusing temperature detected by the • Fusing thermistor connector
thermistor was below 7°C (44.6oF) for 5 defective
seconds, or 2 seconds after reaching • Fusing thermistor damaged or
45oC (113oF) the temperature does not warped
reach an additional 15oC (59oF) after • Fusing temperature –15% less than
checking five times at 0.1 intervals. the standard input voltage
542 A Fusing temperature warm-up error • Fusing lamp defective

The fusing temperature does not reach • Poor fusing unit connector
the fusing standby temperature of 45oC • Thermistor warped or broken
(113oF) within 9 seconds [for the • Thermostat has tripped
B003/B006 (35 cpm)]/14 seconds [for • BICU defective
the B004/B007 (45 cpm)] after • Power supply board defective
switching on the main power or closing
the front cover, or 40 seconds after
reaching 50oC the fusing roller does not
reach warm-up temperature.
543 A Fusing overheat error (software • Power supply unit defective
detection) • I/O board (IOB) defective
A fusing temperature of over 230°C • BICU defective
(446oF) is detected for 5 seconds by • Fusing thermistor defective
the fusing thermistors at the center or
at either end of the fusing roller.
4-9
544 A Fusing overheat error (hardware circuit • Power supply unit defective
detection) • I/O board (IOB) defective
The dual monitoring circuitry of the • BICU defective
BICU detects extremely high • Fusing thermistor defective
temperature and tripped the relay
circuit off.
545 A Fusing lamp remains on • Thermistor is out of position.
After warm-up the fusing lamp remains
at full power for 10 seconds without the
hot roller rotating.
546 A Fusing ready temperature unstable • Thermistor connection loose
The fusing temperature is fluctuating. • Fusing unit connector loose
547 D Zero cross signal error • Switch the main switch off and on
One of the following occurred: • Defective fusing relay, replace the
1) The fusing relay remained off for 50 PSU
ms after power on and continued to
remain off after the after 3 attempts
to detect the zero-cross signal.
2) During 11 zero-cross signal
detections, two zero-cross signal
detections were below 44 Hz.
3) The zero-cross signal could not be
detected within 3 sec. after the
fusing relay switched on.
548 A Fusing unit installation error • Fusing unit is not installed
The machine cannot detect the fusing • Fusing unit connection loose
unit when the front cover and right
cover are closed.
557 C Zero-cross frequencyover • Nose on the ac power line
The applied power ac frequency was
detected less than 66 Hz more than 10
times, or less than 44 Hz one time.
559 A Fusing unit jam • Remove the paper that is stopped

The fusing exit sensor detected a fusing in the fusing unit.
unit paper late jam three times. The • Check that the fusing unit is clean
paper was late and the fusing exit and has no obstacles in the paper
sensor could not detect the paper three feed path.
times. • If the error persists, replace the
fusing unit
Important
• SC559 code does not operate until SP1159 has been set to "1" (ON). This sets
the machine to count the number of occurrences of paper late jams in the fusing
unit. The default setting is "0" (OFF).
• SC559 is issued after the third occurrence of a paper late jam in the fusing unit.
Once this SC has been issued, the machine cannot be used until the service
technician removes the cause of the jam and restores it to normal operation.
• The jam counter is reset after a sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing
exit sensor after the cause of the jam has been removed.
4-10
599 D 1-Bin tray motor lock • 1-bin tray motor locked from overload
A 1-bin tray motor lock signal is not • 1-bin tray motor defective
detected for more than 300 ms during • 1-bin tray motor connection loose
rotation.
601 D Communication error between BICU and • Serial line connecting the BICU and
scanner unit SIB defective
Within 800 ms after power on, after 3 • External noise on the serial line
attempts the BICU does not • SIB board defective
communicate with the SIB via the serial • BICU board defective
line.
610 D Communication timeout error between • BICU board and ADF main board
BICU and ADF serial line connection defective
The BICU cannot receive a response • External noise
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after • ADF main board defective
sending data to the ARDF. • BICU board defective
611 D Communication break error between • Serial line connecting BICU and
BICU and ADF ADF unstable
The BICU receives a break signal from • External noise
shooting
Trouble-
the ADF main board. • ADF main board defective
• BICU board defective
612 D Communication command error • Abnormal operation performed by
between BICU and ADF software
The BICU sends a command to the ADF
main board that it cannot execute.
620 D Communication timeout error between • Serial line connecting BICU and
BICU and finisher or mailbox finisher unstable
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after • BICU board and finisher main board
sending data to the finisher or mailbox. connection defective or loose
• Finisher main board defective
BICU and finisher or mailbox finisher unstable
A break (low) signal was received from • External noise
the finisher or the mailbox.
BICU and paper tray unit paper tray unit unstable
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after • BICU board and paper tray main
sending data to the paper tray unit. board connection defective or loose
• Paper tray main board defective
BICU and paper tray unit paper tray unit unstable
The BICU cannot communicate with the • External noise
paper tray unit normally as a result of • BICU board and LCT main board
receiving a break signal. connection defective or loose
• Optional paper feed unit interface
board defective
4-11
BICU and LCT LCT unit unstable
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after • BICU board and LCT main board
sending data to the LCT. connection defective or loose
• LCT interface board defective
BICU and LCT LCT unit unstable
The BICU cannot communicate with the • External noise
LCT unit normally as a result of • BICU board and LCT main board
receiving a break signal. connection defective or loose
• LCT interface board defective
630 D Communication failure with CSS (RSS) • Occurred with a SC call, CC call,
The communication from the copier was Supply Management call, User call,
detected as abnormal at the CSS or CE call.
center. This error occurs when the • Timeout while no response from the
acknowledge signal from the LADP does LADP, and signal on the RS-485
not complete normally. line between PI and LADP is
abnormal.
632 B Key/card counter device error 1
After 1 data frame is sent to the device, • The serial line from the device to the
an ACK signal is not received within 100 copier is unstable, disconnected, or
ms, and is not received after 3 retries. defective.
During communication with the device, • The serial line from the device to the
the BCU received a break (Low) signal. copier is unstable, disconnected, or
defective.
The backup battery of the counter • Replace the RAM backup battery.
device RAM is low.
After installation of the device a • Device control board defective
message alerts user to a battery voltage • Device control board backup battery
abnormal error. defective
640 C BICU-to-Controller Data Transfer Error 1: Sum Check Error
The system detected an error during • No action required
sum check for data transfer from the • The log count increments by one for
BICU to the controller board. every error
Note: This error is simply logged and the
machine does not return an error
number on the display.
641 C BICU-to-Controller Data Transfer Error 2: Frame Error
The system detected an error after data • No action required
was sent from the BICU to the controller • The log count increments by one for
board. every error
4-12
670 D Engine startup error

The BCU failed to respond with the • Connections between BCU and
prescribed time when the machine was controller board are loose,
turned on. disconnected, or damaged
• Replace the BCU
• Replace the controller board
672 D Controller startup error
• After power on, the line between the • Controller stalled
controller and the operation panel did • Controller installed incorrectly
not open for normal operation. • Controller board defective
• After normal startup, communication • Operation panel harness
with the controller stopped. disconnected or defective
692 D GAVD block I2C bus error
The I2C bus is defective. • Replace the BICU.
700 D ARDF original pick-up malfunction Original stopper HP sensor (output

After the pick-up motor is turned on, the abnormal)
original stopper HP sensor is not Pick-up motor defective (not rotating)
detected. Timing belt out of position
shooting
Trouble-
• ADF main board defective
701 D ARDF original pick-up/paper lift • Original pick-up HP sensor defective.
mechanism malfunction • Pick-up motor defective
The original pick-up HP sensor does • ADF main board defective
not activate three times consecutively
after the pick-up motor has turned on.
722 B Finisher jogger motor error • Jogger HP sensor defective
The finisher jogger HP sensor does not • Jogger motor defective
return to the home position, or move
out of the home position, within the
specified time.
724 B Finisher staple hammer motor error • Staple jam
Stapling does not finish within 600 ms • Stapler overload caused by trying to
after the staple hammer motor turned staple too many sheets
on. • Staple hammer motor defective
725 B Finisher stack feed-out motor error • Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does • Stack feed-out motor overload
not activate within a certain time after • Stack feed-out motor defective
the stack feed-out motor turned on.
726 D Finisher shift tray 1 lift motor error • Shift motor defective or overloaded
Tray shift does not finish within the • Shift tray lift motor defective or
specified time after the shift motor overloaded
turned on, or the stack height sensor
does not activate within the specified
time after the shift tray lift motor turned
on.
4-13
727 B Finisher stapler rotation motor error • Stapler rotation motor defective or
Stapler rotation does not finish within overloaded
the specified time after the staple • Stapler rotation motor connection
rotation motor turned on, or the stapler loose or connector defective
does not return to its home position
within the specified time after stapling
finished.
729 B Finisher punch motor error • Punch motor defective or overloaded
After the punch motor is turned on, the • Punch HP sensor defective
punch HP sensor does not activate • Punch motor connection loose or
within the specified time. connector defective
730 B Finisher stapler positioning motor error • Stapler positioning motor defective or
After the stapler motor is turned on, the overloaded
stapler does not return to its home • Stapler HP sensor defective
position within the specified time, or the • Stapler positioning motor connection
stapler HP sensor does not activate loose or connector defective
within the specified time after the
stapler motor is turned on.
731 D Finisher exit guide open/close motor • Finisher exit guide open/close motor
error defective
After the finisher exit guide open/close • Open/close sensor defective
motor is turned on, the open/close
sensor does not activate within the
specified time.
732 D Finisher upper tray shift motor error • Upper tray shift motor defective or
The upper tray shift motor does not overloaded
stop within the specified time. • Upper tray shift sensor defective
733 D Finisher lower tray lift motor error • Lower tray lift motor defective or
The stack height sensor does not overloaded
activate within a certain time period • Upper stack height sensor defective
after the lower tray lift motor turned on. • Lower tray lower limit sensor
defective
734 D Finisher lower tray shift motor error • Lower tray shift motor defective or
The lower tray shift motor driving the overloaded
lower tray does not stop within the • Lower tray shift sensor defective
specified time.
740 D Booklet finisher error 1: Not Saddle Stitch • See description below
741 D Booklet finisher error 2: Saddle Stitch
SC740 and SC741 are issued when an error occurs in the 1000-Sheet Saddle-
Stitch Finisher B546. Specific details about these SC codes are not displayed on
the operation panel display. However, you can determine the specific cause of an
error by observing the number of flashes and the lengths of the intervals between
flashes.
4-14
To Read SC740/SC741 from LED 2

1. Remove the upper rear cover.
2. Look at LED 2 and observe the number of flashes and the lengths of the
intervals between flashes.
ON: 300ms OFF: 200ms
LED ON
LED OFF
2sec 1sec Break: 500ms Break: 500ms Break: 500ms
START 1 4 2 Repeat
B195T901.WMF
What You See What It Means
shooting
Trouble-
500 ms ON, 500 ms OFF Finisher operating normally
2 s ON, 1 s OFF START
Example: 1-4-2 The numbers refer to the flashes and intervals in the
illustration above.
1 300ms ON, 500ms OFF
4 300ms ON, 200ms OFF (Repeats 3 times), 300ms ON, 500ms OFF (break)
2 300 ms ON, 200ms OFF, 300 ms ON, 500ms OFF (break)
Returns to START and repeats (2 s ON, 1 s OFF, then 1-4-2)
4-15
Pattern Error Status Possible Cause

1-1-1 Shutter The shutter position switch does not • Transport motor
movement turn on within 1 second after the defective
transport motor starts to turn in reverse. • Shutter position
1-1-2 The shutter sensor does not deactivate switch defective
within 1 second after the transport • Shift tray safety
motor starts to turn in reverse. switch defective
1-1-3 The shutter position switch is off when
the shift tray safety switch is off.
1-2-1 Exit motor After the exit motor turns on, the exit • Exit motor
motor sensor does not send the proper defective
signal to the finisher board. • Exit motor sensor
1-2-2 The exit motor sensor does not send defective
the clock signal to the finisher board for
certain period while the exit motor is on.
1-3-1 Upper exit plate The upper exit guide 2 switch does not • Guide plate motor
movement turn on within 1s after the guide plate defective
motor turns on. • Upper exit guide 2
1-3-2 The upper exit guide sensor does not switch defective
activate within 1s after the guide plate • Upper exit guide
motor turns on. sensor defective
1-3-3 The upper exit guide 2 switch does not • Shift tray safety
turn on when the shift tray safety switch switch defective
is off.
1-3-4 The guide plate motor sensor does not
send the clock signal to the finisher
board for certain period while the exit
motor is on.
1-4-1 Jogger motor After the jogger motor turns on to move • Jogger motor
the jogger fence from its home position, defective
the jogger HP sensor does not • Jogger HP sensor
deactivate within 2s. defective
1-4-2 After the jogger motor turns on to return
the jogger fence to its home position,
the jogger HP sensor does not activate
within 2s.
1-5-1 Stapler motor After the stapler motor turns on to move • Stapler motor
the stapler unit from its home position, defective
the stapler unit HP sensor does not • Stapler unit HP
deactivate within 4s. sensor defective
1-5-2 After the stapler motor turns on to
return the stapler unit to its home
position, the stapler unit HP sensor
does not activate within 4s.
1-6-1 Staple hammer The staple hammer HP sensor does not • Staple hammer
motor deactivate within 0.5s after the staple motor defective
hammer motor turns on. • Staple hammer HP
1-6-2 The staple hammer HP sensor does not sensor defective
activate within 0.5s after the staple
hammer motor turns on.
4-16

1-7-1 Tray lift motor The tray lift motor does not stop within • Tray lift motor
15s after being turned on. defective
The shift tray HP sensor does not • Lift motor sensor 1
activate within 15s after the tray lift defective
motor turns on.
• Lift motor sensor 2
1-7-2 The shift tray upper limit switch turns on defective
while the shift tray is being raised.
• Shift tray HP
1-7-3 Lift motor sensors 1 & 2 do not send sensor defective
the clock signals to the finisher board
• Shift tray upper
every 200ms while the tray lift motor is
limit switch
on.
defective
1-8-1 Shift tray height Abnormal communication data between • Shift tray height
sensor finisher board and shift tray height sensor defective
sensor. • Finisher board
1-8-2 No communication between finisher defective
board and shift tray height sensor for a
certain period.
1-8-3 The finisher board detects a connection
error with the connector for the shift tray
shooting
Trouble-
height sensor.
1-8-4 Adjustment error during shift tray height
sensor adjustment.
1-9-1 Back-up RAM The check sum is abnormal when the • Finisher board
main switch is turned on. defective
1-10-1 Communication Communication error between finisher • Finisher board
board and copier mainframe. defective
1-10-2 Communication error between finisher • Booklet unit board
board and booklet unit board. defective
• Poor connection of
the interface
harness
1-11-1 Positioning After the positioning plate motor turns • Positioning plate
plate motor on to move the positioning plate from its motor defective
home position, the positioning plate HP • Positioning plate
sensor does not deactivate within HP sensor
1.25s. defective
1-11-2 After the positioning plate motor turns
on to return the positioning plate to its
home position, the positioning plate HP
sensor does activate within 1s.
1-12-2 Folder roller The folder roller motor sensor doesn’t • Folder roller motor
motor send the clock pulse to the booklet unit defective
board within a certain period after the • Folder roller motor
folder roller motor turns on. sensor defective
1-13-1 Shutter guide After the shutter guide motor turns on to • Shutter guide
motor move the shutter guide from its home motor defective
position, the shutter guide HP sensor • Shutter guide HP
does not deactivate within 0.4s.
4-17

1-13-2 After the shutter guide motor turns on to sensor defective
return the shutter guide to its home
position, the shutter guide HP sensor
does not activate within 1s.
1-14-1 Booklet jogger After the booklet jogger motor turns on • Booklet jogger
motor to move the booklet jogger plate from motor defective
its home position, the booklet jogger HP • Booklet jogger HP
sensor does not deactivate within 0.5s. sensor defective
1-14-2 After the booklet jogger motor turns on
to return the booklet jogger plate to its
home position, the booklet jogger HP
sensor does not activate within 1s.
1-15-1 Front stapler The front staple hammer HP switch • Front stapler motor
motor does not turn off within 0.5s after the defective
front stapler motor turns on. • Front staple
1-15-2 The front staple hammer HP switch hammer HP
does not turn on within 0.5s after the switch defective
front stapler motor turns on during jam •
recovery.
1-16-1 Rear stapler The rear staple hammer HP switch • Rear stapler motor
motor does not turn off within 0.5s after the defective
rear stapler motor turns on. • Rear staple
1-16-2 The rear staple hammer HP switch hammer HP
does not turn on within 0.5s after the switch defective
rear stapler motor turns on during jam
recovery.
1-17-1 Folder plate After the folder plate motor turns on to • Folder plate motor
motor error return the folder plate to its home defective
position, the folder plate HP sensor • Folder plate HP
does not activate within 0.3s. sensor defective
1-17-2 After the folder plate motor turns on to • Folder plate return
move the folder plate from its home sensor defective
position, the folder plate HP sensor
does not deactivate within 0.3s. • Folder plate motor
sensor defective
1-17-3 After the folder plate motor turns on to
return the folder plate to its home
position, the folder plate return sensor
does not deactivate within 0.3s.
1-17-4 The pulse count from the folder plate
motor sensor is lower than the target
minimum.
1-18-1 Connector The connector of the shutter guide HP • Poor connection or
sensor is not connected. no connection of
1-18-2 The connector of the folder plate HP the shutter guide
sensor is not connected. HP sensor
4-18

1-18-3 The connector of the folder plate return connector
sensor is not connected. • Poor connection or
no connection of
the folder plate HP
sensor connector
• Poor connection or
no connection of
the folder plate
return sensor
connector
1-19-1 Switch When the booklet entrance guide • Booklet entrance
sensor, lower door sensor and booklet guide safety
exit cover sensor are all activated switch defective
(doors closed), the booklet entrance • Lower door safety
guide safety switch does not turn on switch defective
within 1s after a copy job or warm-up
idling begins. • Booklet exit cover
safety switch
1-19-2 When the booklet entrance guide defective
sensor, lower door sensor and booklet
exit cover sensor are all activated
shooting
Trouble-
(doors closed), the lower door safety
switch does not turn on within 1s after a
copy job or warm-up idling begins.
1-19-3 When the booklet entrance guide
sensor, lower door sensor and booklet
exit cover sensor are all activated
(doors closed), the booklet exit cover
safety switch does not turn on within 1s
after a copy job or warm-up idling
begins.
4-19
818 C Watchdog error

The bus is being held by another • System program defective; switch off/on,
device, or a CPU-device infinite or change the controller firmware if the
loop has occurred. A module that problem cannot be solved
the watchdog is monitoring has not • Controller board defective
closed properly at the conclusion of • Controller option malfunction
its task, or the module cannot
continue processing.
819 C Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM • System program defective
overflow occurred during system • Controller board defective
processing. One of the following • Optional board defective
messages was displayed on the • Replace controller firmware
operation panel.
0x696e init died
0x766d vm_pageout: VM is full
4361 Cache Error
Other
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read
the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
820 D Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU • Controller board defective

The central processing unit returned an error • Software defective
during the self-diagnostic test.
821 D Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC
The ASIC provides the central point for • ASIC (controller board defective)
the control of bus arbitration for CPU
access, for option bus and SDRAM
access, for SDRAM refresh, and for
management of the internal bus gate.
NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel.
822 B Self-diagnostic error 3: HDD

3003 Check performed when HDD is installed: • HDD defective
• HDD device busy for over 31 s. • HDD harness
• After a diagnostic command is set for disconnected, defective
Sthe HDD, but the device remains • Controller board defective
busy for over 6 s.
A diagnostic command is issued to the
HDD device but the result is an erro
3004 No response to the self-diagnostic • HDD defective
command from the ASIC to the HDDs
4-20
823 B Self-diagnostic Error: NIC • Network interface board defective

The network interface board returned an • Controller board defective
error during the self-diagnostic test.
824 D Self-diagnostic error 4: NVRAM
NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is • NVRAM defective
damaged, NVRAM socket damaged • Controller board defective
• NVRAM backup battery
exhausted
• NVRAM socket damaged
826 D Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM/Optional NVRAM • Make sure NVRAM is

The NVRAM or optional NVRAM returned an error seated correctly in its
during the self-diagnostic test. socket
• Replace the NVRAM on
the controller board
827 D Self-diagnostic Error: RAM • Update controller firmware again

The resident RAM returned a verify error • Replace RAM DIMM
shooting
Trouble-
828 D Self-diagnostic error 7: ROM

• Measuring the CRC for the boot • Software defective
monitor and operating system • Controller board defective
program results in an error. • ROM defective
• A check of the CRC value for
ROMFS of the entire ROM area
results in an error.
NOTE: For more details about this SC 833, SC834 error, execute SP5990 to print an
SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on
the operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the
SMC report.
829 B Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM • Replace the optional memory board
The optional RAM returned an error • Controller board defective
838 D Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator • Replace the controller board

A verify error occurred when setting data
was read from the clock generator via
the I2C bus.
4-21
850 B Net I/F error

• Duplicate IP addresses. • IP address setting incorrect
• Illegal IP address. • Ethernet board defective
• Driver unstable and cannot be • Controller board defective
used on the network.
851 B IEEE 1394 I/F error Not supported by this machine.

Driver setting incorrect and cannot • NIB (PHY), LINK module defective;
be used by the 1394 I/F. change the Interface Board
• Controller board defective
853 B Wireless LAN Error 1

During machine start-up, the • Wireless LAN card missing (was
machine can get access to the removed)
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
854 B Wireless LAN Error 2

During machine operation, the • Wireless LAN card missing (was
machine can get access to the removed)
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
855 B Wireless LAN error 3

An error was detected on the • Wireless LAN card defective
wireless LAN card (802.11b or • Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
Bluetooth).
856 B Wireless LAN error 4

An error was detected on the • Wireless LAN card defective
wireless LAN card (802.11b or • PCI connector (to the mother board)
Bluetooth). loose
857 B USB I/F Error

The USB driver is not stable and • Bad USB card connection
caused an error. • Replace the controller board
860 B HDD startup error at main power on

• HDD is connected but a driver • HDD is not initialized
error is detected. • Level data is corrupted
• The driver does not respond with • HDD is defective
the status of the HDD within 30
s.
4-22
861 D HDD re-try failure

At power on the HDD was detected. • Harness between HDD and controller
Power supply to the HDD was board disconnected, defective
interrupted after the system entered • HDD power connector disconnected
the energy save mode, but after the • HDD defective
HDD was awakened from the • Controller board defective
energy save mode it did not return
to the ready status within 30 sec.
863 D HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot • HDD defective
be read normally, due to bad Note: If the bad sectors are generated at
sectors generated during operation. the image partition, the bad sector
information is written to NVRAM, and the
next time the HDD is accessed, these bad
sectors will not be accessed for read/write
operation.
shooting
Trouble-
864 D HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD • HDD defective
cannot respond to an CRC error
query. Data transfer did not execute
normally while data was being
written to the HDD.
865 D HDD access error

HDD responded to an error during • HDD defective.
operation for a condition other than
those for SC863, 864.
866 B SD card error 1: Confirmation

The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD card
in the controller slot immediately after the machine is turned on. The program on
the SD card contains electronic confirmation license data. If the program does not
contain this license data, or if the result of the check shows that the license data in
the program on the SD card is incorrect, then the checked program cannot
execute and this SC code is displayed.
• Program missing from the SD card
• Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card
867 D SD card error 2: SD card removed

The SD card in the boot slot when • Insert the SD card, then turn the machine
the machine was turned on was off and on.
removed while the machine was on.
4-23
868 D SD card error 3: SC card access

An error occurred while an SD card • SD card not inserted correctly
was used. • SD card defective
• Controller board defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC
card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
870 B Address book data error

Address book data on the hard • Software defective. Turn the machine
disk was detected as abnormal off/on. If this is not the solution for the
when it was accessed from either problem, then replace the controller
the operation panel or the firmware.
network. The address book data • HDD defective.
cannot be read from the HDD or
SD card where it is stored, or the
data read from the media is
defective.
More Details
• Do SP5846 050 (UCS Settings – Initialize all Directory Info.) to reset all
address book data.
• Reset the user information with SP5832 006 (HDD Formatting– User
Information).
• Replace the HDDs.
• Boot the machine from the SD card.
872 B HDD mail receive data error

• The machine detected that the • HDD defective
HDD was not operating correctly • Machine was turned off while the HDD
at power on. was being accessed.
• The machine detected that the • Do SP5832 007 to format the mail RX
HDD was not operating correctly data on the HDD.
(could neither read nor write)
while processing incoming email
873 B HDD mail send data error

An error was detected on the HDD • Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD – Mail TX
immediately after the machine was Data) to initialize the HDD.
turned on, or power was turned off • Replace the HDD
while the machine used the HDD.
874 D Delete All error 1: HDD

A data error was detected for the • Turn the main switch off/on and try the
HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All operation again.
option was used. • Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit
Note: The source of this error is the again. For more, see section “1.
Data Overwrite Security Unit B660 Installation”.
running from an SD card. • HDD defective
4-24
875 D Delete All error 2: Data area

An error occurred while the • Turn the main switch off/on and try the
machine deleted data from the operation again.
HDD.
Note: The source of this error is the
Data Overwrite Security Unit B660
running from an SD card.
876 D Log data abnormal • Software error. Update the firmware

An error was detected in the handling of • NVRAM defective
the log data at power on or during • HDD defective
machine operation. This can be caused
by switching the machine off while it is
operating.
880 B File Format Converter (MLB) error

A request to get access to the MLB • MLB defective, replace the MLB
was not answered within the
shooting
Trouble-
specified time.
900 D Electrical total counter error

The total counter contains • NVRAM incorrect type
something that is not a number. • NVRAM defective
• NVRAM data scrambled
• Unexpected error from external source
901 D SC901 Mechanical total count error • Mechanical total counter

The IO board cannot receive the mechanical total defective
count data.
920 B Printer error 1

An internal application error was • Software defective; turn the machine
detected and operation cannot off/on, or change the controller firmware
continue. • Insufficient memory
4-25
925 B Net File function error

The NetFile file management on the • Refer to the four procedures below
HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile (Recovery from SC 925).
management file is corrupted and
operation cannot continue. The
HDDs are defective and they
cannot be debugged or partitioned,
so the Scan Router functions
(delivery of received faxes,
document capture, etc.), Web
services, and other network
functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed
below the SC code:
Here is a list of HDD status codes:

Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label read or check
(-7) “filesystem” repair failed
(-8) “filesystem” mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
4-26
Recovery from SC 925

Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865) with SC 925, do
the recovery procedures for SC860 ~ SC865.
Procedure 2
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn
the machine power off and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then
initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting –
Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
• Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
• Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
• All captured documents will be erased
• DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased
• Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased.
• The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management
shooting
Trouble-
information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time).
Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do “Delivery Settings” to print all received fax
documents that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer
Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
Procedure 3
If “Procedure 2” is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD
Formatting – All), then turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask
the customer before you do this SP code.
Procedure 4
If “Procedure 3” is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
4-27
951 D F-gate error at write request • Software defective

After the IPU receives an F-gate signal, it receives • BICU defective
another F-gate signal.
953 D Scanner setting error • Software defective
The IPU does not respond with the scanner
setting signal required to start scanning
processing.
954 D Printer setting error • Software defective
The IPU does not respond with the settings that
are required to start image processing by the
printer.
955 D Memory setting error • Software defective
The IPU does not respond with the settings that
are required to start image processing using the
memory.
4-28
980 NVRAM value error

A critical SP code setting is not within range. If the See the description
machine is allowed to operate in this condition, this below
could lead to toner overflow and damage the
machine.
SP Code Acceptable Range
SP2005 004 Charge Roller Adjustment 2 -1000 to -2000 V
SP2802 001 TD Sensor Manual Setting VTS 1.00 to 5.00 V
SP2802 002 TD Sensor Manual Setting VTMAX 1.00 to 5.00 V
SP2802 003 TD Sensor Manual Setting VTMIN 1.00 to 5.00 V
SP9503 004 DFU 51 to 255
SP9508 001 DFU 51 to 255
SP9508 002 DFU 51 to 255
SP9517 002 DFU 401 to 802
Recovery from SC980
Continued use of the machine with one or more of the SP codes listed above out of
range could lead to toner overflow or other problems that could cause damage to
the machine.
shooting
Trouble-
1. Enter the SP mode and check the setting of SP2802 001, 002, 003.
2. If these SP codes are within range, turn the machine power off and on.
-or-
If one or more of these SP codes is out of range, do SP2801 001 (TD Sensor
Initial Setting) then turn the machine power off and on.
3. Enter the SP mode and do SP5990 001 (SMC Printout – SP Mode Data List).
4. Check the following SP codes and confirm that their settings are within range.
SP No. Name Range
2005 004 Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 2 -1000 to -2000 V
SP2802 001 TD Sensor Manual Setting – Vts 1.00 to 5.00 V
SP2802 002 TD Sensor Manual Setting – Vtmax
SP2802 003 TD Sensor Manual Setting – Vtmin
4-29
984 D Print image data transfer error • Controller board defective

The image transfer from the controller to the • BICU defective
engine via the PCI bus does not end within 15 s • Connectors between BICU
after starting. and controller loose or
defective
985 D Scanner image data transfer error • Controller board defective
The image transfer from the engine to the • BICU defective
controller via the PCI bus does not end within 3 s • Connectors between BICU
after starting. and controller loose or
defective
• SIB defective
986 D Software write parameter setting error • Software defective
An unstable area at the storage destination in the
settings table is set NULL for the parameter
received by the write module.
990 D Software error 1

The software performs an • Software defective, re-boot*1
unexpected function and the
program cannot continue.
991 C Software error 2
The software performs an • Software defective, re-boot*1
unexpected function. However,
unlike SC990, recovery processing
allows the program to continue.
*1
: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:
1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the
software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because
another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
995 D Machine Type Information Error • Replace the controller board with
After the machine is powered on, a the correct type of board.
mismatch is detected between the CPM
information sent from the controller to
the engine. The controller board was
replaced with the incorrect type of
controller board.
996 D FCU Board Error

The FCU board is installed but it • FCU board hardware or firmware
has not entered READY status. defective
• Replace FCU board
4-30
997 B Software Error 4: Cannot select application function

An application does not start after • Software bug
the user pushed the correct key on • A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
the operation panel. application is not installed or not installed
correctly.
998 D Software Error 5: Application cannot start

Register processing does not • Software bug
operate for an application within 60 • A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
s after the machine power is turned application is not installed or not installed
on. No applications start correctly, correctly.
and all end abnormally.
999 D Program download error

The download (program, print data, language data) from the IC card does not
execute normally.
• Board installed incorrectly
• BICU defective
shooting
Trouble-
• IC card defective
• NVRAM defective
• Loss of power during downloading
• Important Notes About SC999
• Primarily intended for operating in the download mode, logging is not performed
with SC999.
Note: If the machine loses power while downloading, or if for some other reason
the download does not end normally, this could damage the controller board or the
PCB targeted for the download and prevent subsequent downloading. If this
problem occurs, the damaged PCB must be replaced.
4-31
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 22 September 2006
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.2.1 SENSORS
Component (Symbol) CN Condition Symptom
Scanner Home Position Open SC121 is displayed.
504-5(SIB)
(S1) Shorted SC120 is displayed.
Open APS and ARE do not function properly.
Platen Cover (S2) 504-8 (SIB)
Shorted No symptom.
CPU cannot detect the original size
505-3, 4 Open properly. APS and ARE do not function
Original Width (S3)
(SIB) correctly.
Shorted
CPU cannot detect the original size
505-8,9 Open properly. APS and ARE do not function
Original Length-1 (S4)
(SIB) correctly.
Shorted
SC328 is displayed when the laser
Open
LD Unit Home Position 204-B2 beam pitch is changed.
(S6) (IOB) SC327 is displayed when the laser
Shorted
beam pitch is changed.
The add toner indicator blinks even if
Open
Toner Density (TD) 222-5 there is toner in the development unit.
(S7) (IOB) SC390-01 is displayed.
Shorted
The Paper Jam indicator will light
Open
202-B2 whenever a copy is made.
Paper Exit (S8)
(IOB) The Paper Jam indicator lights even if
Shorted
there is no paper.
The Paper Jam indicator lights even if
Open
224-B2 there is no paper.
Registration (S9)
(IOB) The The Paper Jam indicator will light
Shorted
whenever a copy is made.
Image Density (ID) 203-5 Open SC350-03 is displayed after copying.
(S10) (IOB) Shorted SC350-01 is displayed after copying.
Add Paper is displayed even if there is
Open paper. If this condition occurred four
Upper Paper Height 220-2 times, SC501-02 will be displayed.
(S11) (IOB)
SC501-01 is displayed.
Shorted
Add Paper is displayed even if there is
Lower Paper Height 214-2 Open paper. If this condition occurred four
(S12) (IOB) times, SC502-02 will be displayed.
Shorted SC502-01 is displayed.
4-32
22 September 2006 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
Component (Symbol) CN Condition Symptom

The Paper End indicator lights even if
Open paper is placed in the upper paper
220-8 tray.
Upper Paper End (S13)
(IOB) The Paper End indicator does not light
Shorted even if there is no paper in the upper
paper tray.
The Paper End indicator lights even if
Open
paper is placed in the lower paper tray.
214-8
Lower Paper End (S14) The Paper End indicator does not light
(IOB)
Shorted even if there is no paper in the lower
paper tray.
Open
220-5 whenever a copy is made.
Upper Relay (S15)
Shorted
there is no paper.
Open
214-5 whenever a copy is made.
Lower Relay (S16)
Shorted
there is no paper.
shooting
Trouble-
Transfer Belt Position 202-A10 Open No symptom
(S19) (IOB) Shorted SC403 is displayed
4-33
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS 22 September 2006
4.2.2 SWITCHES
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
“Doors/Covers Open” is displayed even if the
Open
Right Lower 216-4 right lower cover is closed.
Cover (SW1) (IOB) The LCD goes blank when the lower cover is
Shorted
opened.
102-1~4 Open The machine does not turn on.
Main (SW3) (PSU) The machine does not turn off.
Shorted
107-1
“Doors/Covers Open” is displayed even if the
Open
Front Cover 107-1 front cover is closed.
Safety (SW4) (PSU) “Doors/Covers” Open is not displayed even if the
Shorted
front cover is opened.
4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating
Fuse Symptom at power on
115V 210 ~ 230V
Power Supply Board
FU1 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V “Doors/Covers Open” is displayed
6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V “Doors/Covers Open” for the finisher is
FU2
displayed
FU3 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V Paper end condition
FU5 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V SC302, or SC403, or SC405 displayed
FU6 3.15A/125V 3.15A/250V
FU9 5A/125V 5A/250V
FU10 3.15A/250V 2A/250V
FU11 5A/250V 5A/250V
FU101 15A / 125V 8A/250V No response
FU102 10A / 125V 5A / 250V No response
FU103 2A / 125V 1A / 250V Normal operation (optional heaters do not work)
4-34
22 September 2006 LEDS
4.4 LEDS
BICU LED Sequences
LED 101 LED 102 LED 103
(Green) (Yellow) (Red)
Normal Operation Flashes Off Flashes
System Startup Flashes On (1~2s) then Off Flashes
Firmware Update: Normal Flashes On Flashes
Execution
Firmware Update: Error Flashes Flashes Flashes
Firmware Update: Normal End Flashes Off Flashes
Energy Save Mode Off Off Off
Controller LED Sequences

LED 1 LED 2
(Red) (Red)
shooting
Trouble-
System Startup (including Self-Diagnostics) On Off
Self-Diagnostic Error On On
Normal Operation Flashes Off
Firmware Update: Normal Execution Flashes Flashes
Firmware Update: Error Off Off
Firmware Update: Normal End On On
NOTE: LED 1 monitors Data Bus Bit 14, LED 2 monitors Data Bus Bit 15.
4.5 TEST POINTS

Controller Board
Number Monitored Signal
TP1 GND
TP3 GND
TP6 GND
TP8 DB0 RXD
TP9 DB0 TXD
TP10 GND
TP11 +5VE
TP12 GND
TP13 +5V
TP14 +5VE
TP15 GND
TP16 R_FGATE
TP17 W_FGATE
4-35
22 September 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
5. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is
open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory
for reading or writing data.
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to
switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the
main power switch off.
Service
Tables
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine
off and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each
time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to
“1”.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine off and on.
• Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
• The administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.
5-1
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES 22 September 2006
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Please note these general changes in this section:
• Group 8(Data Log 2) is a new group of counters.
• Along with the addition of Group 8, many of the Group 7 counters have been
removed.
5.2.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY
Notation What it means
[range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
adjusted in the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each
key press.
* Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value
(factory setting) is restored.
1111 An SP number set in bold-italics denotes a “Special Service
Program” mode setting that appears only after entering the SP
mode by pressing [#] on the 10-key pad and “Copy SP” on the
touch-screen together.
35 cpm B291/B296
45 cpm B295/B297
DFU Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
5.2.2 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
4. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the
machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in
again each time the machine is turned on.
5. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to
“1”.
6. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine off and on.
• Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
• The administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.
5-2
22 September 2006 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5.2.3 SERVICE TABLES

SP1-xxx: Feed
1001* Leading Edge Registration
Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern
(SP2-902-3, No.11).
[+9 ~ –9 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm]
Use to toggle between ± before entering the value. Specification: 3 ±2 mm
1002* Side-to-Side Registration

Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from the 3rd paper feed station using
the trimming area pattern (SP2-902-3, No.11). Tray3, Tray4 for Paper Feed Unit.
Use the key to toggle between + and – before entering the value. Specification:
2 ±1.5 mm
1002 1 Tray 1 [–9 ~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm step]
1002 2 Tray 2 [–9 ~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm step]
1002 3 Tray 3 [–9~ +9/ +2.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 4 Tray 4 [–9~ +9/ +2.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 5 From Duplex Unit [–9 ~ +9/ +0.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 6 Bypass Feed [–9 ~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 7 LCT [–9 ~ +9/ +1.5 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
1003* Registration Buckle Adjustment

Adjusts the relay clutch timing at registration. Relay clutch timing determines the
Service
Tables
amount of paper buckle at registration. (A “+” setting causes more buckling.)
1003 1 Trays 2,3,4 LCT [–9 ~+9 / 0 /1 mm step]
1003 2 Duplex
1003 3 Bypass
1003 4 Tray 1 Feed [–9 ~+9 / 1 /1 mm step]
1003 5 Bypass Thick Paper [–9 ~+9 / -2 /1 mm step]
1007* By-pass Feed Paper Size Display

Displays the paper width sensor data for the by-pass feed table.
1012* Exit Junction Solenoid Start Timing

Adjusts the timing of the solenoids at the entrance and exit of the paper exit
section to accommodate the increased speed of the duplex unit.
This SP has been added to compensate for the increased operation speed of the
duplex unit for this machine. Increase the value if the leading edges are jamming.
Decrease the value if trailing edges are bending at the entrance
1012 1* Exit Entrance Junction 35 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 370 ms / 10 ms]
Solenoid 45 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 300 ms /10 ms]
1012 2* Exit Last Junction Solenoid 35 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 370 ms / 10 ms]
45 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 370 ms /10 ms]]
5-3
1103* Fusing Idling

Switches fusing idling on/off. When on, printing will not start until enough time has
elapsed so the hot roller can reach optimum temperature. This ensures even heat
on the hot roller.
Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete (this may occur if the
room is cold.) You must switch SP1103-1 ON before you set the fusing interval
with SP1103-2.
1103 1* Enable Fusing Idling 0 = Off, 1 = On
1103 2* Fusing Idling Interval [0 ~ 60 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 sec.]
1103 3* Fusing Pre-Rotation Sets the machine to fusing idling only for 5 sec. for every
job (when the original is set on the ARDF, when the
ARDF cover is opened, etc.) and the fusing unit has
reached the reload temperature (optimum temperature
for operation).
0: Off. No 5 sec. idling done before a job.
1: On. 5 sec. idling done before every job.
Note
• The pre-fusing idling set with SP5959 executes after
the 5 sec. idling selected with this SP is finished.
• The idling stops if a new job is received before the
idling completes.
1104* Fusing Temperature Control

Selects the fusing temperature control method. After changing this setting, be sure
the power the machine off and on again with the main power switch to enable the
new setting.
[0~1 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal (ON/OFF control). Allows full application from ac power supply to bring
the hot roller up to the target fusing temperature then shuts off. Determines the
on time from the present temperature (detected by the thermistor on the hot
roller) and the temperature of 1 cycle before.
1: Phase (hysterisis) control. Sets the upper and lower limits for the temperature;
at the lower temperature the fusing lamp is on and at the higher temperature
the fusing lamp is off.
Change this setting to “0” only if the user has excessive electrical noise or
interference on the power supply line. Such interference can cause voltage to drop
when power is applied using the ON/OFF control method.
Interference can be caused by the general poor quality of the power supply lines,
or if the machine is sharing a power supply with other electrical devices such as
fluorescent lights. Before changing this setting, make sure that the machine is
connected to a power supply not shared by other electrical equipment.
Note: Selecting Phase control (“1”) could cause the fusing temperature control
board to emit low pitched noise.
5-4
1105* Fusing Temperature Adjustment

Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the roller
for the quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine has two
fusing lamps: one heats the center of the roller, the other heats both ends. Each
fusing lamp can be adjusted separately.
The “re-load temperature” is the “print ready temperature. When the fusing
temperature exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a re-
load temperature (Re-load Temp. = Fusing. Temp – SP Value.) that is higher
than the SP1-105-2 setting.
1105 1 Roller Center: Trays 35 cpm: [120 ~ 200/ 160 / 1 deg.]
45 cpm: [120 ~ 200 / 170 / 1 deg.]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
1105 2 Roller Ends: Trays 35 cpm: [120 ~ 200 / 165 / 1 deg.]
45 cpm: [120 ~ 200 / 175 / 1 deg.]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.
1105 3 Roller Center: Bypass 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg.]
45 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg.]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller for bypass feed.
1105 4 Roller Center: Ends 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg.]
45 cpm: : [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller for bypass feed.
1105 5 Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center [0 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 step]
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting depends
on the target temperature.
Reload temp. = Target Temp – This SP Setting
Note: Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1 (Roller
Service
Tables
Center: Trays)
1105 6 Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends [0 ~ 60 / 10 / 1 step]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends on
the target temperature.
Reload temp. = Target Temp – This SP Setting
Note: Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 2 (Roller
Ends: Trays)
1105 7 Roller Center: Bypass 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg]
(Thick Paper) 45 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller for thick paper.
1105 8 Roller Ends: Bypass (Thick 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg]
Paper) 45 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller for thick paper.
1105 9* Re-load Temp. Minus: 35 cpm: [0 ~ 60 / 0oC/ 5]
Roller Center (Thick Paper) 45 cpm: [0~ 60 / 5oC /1]
Sets the temperature for re-heating the hot roller center for thick paper.
1105 10* Re-load Temp. Minus: 35 cpm: [0 ~ 60 / 0oC/ 5]
Roller Ends (Thick Paper) 45 cpm: [0~ 60 / 5oC /1]
Sets the temperature for re-heating the hot roller ends for thick paper.
5-5
1106 Fusing Temperature Display

1106 1 Roller Center Displays the fusing temperature for the center of the hot roller.
1106 2 Roller Ends Displays the fusing temperature for the ends of the hot roller.
1106 3 I/O Board Temp. Displays in the internal temperature of the machine when it
at Power On was powered on.
1109* Fusing Nip Band Check

Checks the fusing nip band.
[0=Off, 1=On]
1111* Paper Reverse Timing (Duplex) [+5 ~ –5 / 0 mm / 1 mm step]

Adjusts the timing for stopping the rotation of the reverse roller after the trailing
edge of the paper passes the duplex entrance sensor.
Adjust the timing if paper frequently jams at the inverter gate in the duplex unit.
1159 Fusing Jam SC Setting

This SP setting determines whether SC559 is issued after three paper late jams
occur in the fusing unit. After this SP code is turned on, a counter monitors the
number of paper late jams that occur in the fusing unit. After the 3rd occurrence of
a fusing jam, SC559 is issued and the machine cannot be used until the service
technician releases the error.
Note: Switching the machine off/on does not reset this jam counter. The counter is
reset after the cause of the jam has been removed and a sheet of paper
successfully passes the fusing exit sensor.
[0~1/0/1] 0:OFF, 1:ON
1801* Motor Speed Adjustment

Adjusts the speeds of the main motor, feed/development motor, and fusing exit
motor. Each step decreases or increases motor speed in 0.15% increments
1801 1 Main Motor [-4 ~ +4 / 0 / 0.15%]
1801 2 Feed/Development Motor [-4 ~ +4 / 0 / 0.15%]
1801 3 Fusing/Exit Motor [-4 ~ +4 / 0 / 0.15%]
5-6
SP2-xxx: Drum
2001* Charge Roller Bias Adjustment

2001 1* Copying [–1000 ~ –2000 / –1500V / 10V step]
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for copying.
2001 2* ID Sensor Pattern [0 ~ 700 / 250V / 10V step]
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when making the VSDP ID sensor
pattern (for charge roller voltage correction). The actual charge roller voltage is
this value plus the value of SP2001 1.
2005* Charge Roller Bias Correction

2005 1* Charge Roller Voltage Correction 1 [0.1 ~ 1.0 / 0.85 / 0.05 step]
Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of VSP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage
increases by 30 V (e.g., from –500 to –530).
2005 2* Charge Roller Voltage Correction 2 [0.1 ~ 1.0 / 0.90 / 0.05 step]
Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of VSP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage
decreases by 30 V (absolute value).
2005 3* Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 1 [–1000 ~ –2000 / –1500V / 10V step]
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.
2005 4* Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 2 [–1000 ~ –2000 / –2000V / 10V step]
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.
2005 5* Charge Roller Voltage Step [0 ~ 100V / 30V / 10V step]
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
Service
Tables
2101* Printing Erase Margin
Adjusts the leading edge (top), trailing edge (bottom), left, and right margins
2101 1* Leading Edge (Top) [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 3 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: ±2 mm
2101 2* Trailing Edge (Bottom) [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 3 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: ±2 mm
2101 3* Left Edge [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 2 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: ±1.5 mm
2101 4* Right Edge [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 2 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: ±1.5 mm
2101 5* Trailing Edge - Back side [0.0 ~ 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm step]
Recommended: 2 ±1.5 mm
2101 6* Back Side - Right [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm step]
Recommended: 2 ±1.5 mm
2101 7* Back Side - Left [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm step]
Recommended: 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
2103* LD Power Adjustment DFU

Adjusts the intensity of the laser for the copier, printer, and fax unit. The Copier
and Printer/Fax settings can be adjusted separately.
2103 1* LD1 (Copier) 35 cpm: [–30~+64/–24/1 LSB step
45 cpm: [–30~64/5/1 LSB step]]
2103 2* LD2 (Copier) 35 cpm: [–30~+79/–24/1 LSB step
45 cpm: [–30~79/–5/1 LSB step]]
2103 3* LD1 (Printer, FAX) [–50 ~ –35 / –25 /1 LSB step]
2103 4* LD2 (Printer, FAX) [–50 ~ –35 / –25 /1 LSB step]
2103 5* LD1 Adjustment Start/End OFF/ON
2103 6* LD2 Adjustment Start/End OFF/ON
5-7
2109* LD Beam Pitch Adjustment

Adjusts the beam gap for the dual beam system. After replacing the LD unit or
replacing or clearing the NVRAM, use this SP mode to adjust the laser beam
pitch.
This adjustment is performed by specifying the number of pulses to the stepper
motor that will adjust the angle of rotation of the LD unit from the home position.
2109 1* 400 dpi [400 dpi: [8~ 262 / 144 / 1 pulse step]
Adjusts the laser beam pitch value for 400 dpi resolution.
After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing NVRAM, use this SP and SP2-
109-3 to adjust the laser beam pitch.
2109 2* 600 dpi [600 dpi: [30 ~ 284 / 168/ 1 pulse step]
Adjusts the laser beam pitch value for 600 dpi resolution.
After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing NVRAM, use this SP and SP2-
109-4 to adjust the laser beam pitch.
2109 3* 400 dpi Initial Setting
Initializes the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi using the value for SP2-109-1.
After entering a value for SP2-109-1, this SP must be used.
2109 4* 600 dpi Initial Setting
Initializes the laser beam pitch for 600 dpi using the value for SP2-109-2.
After entering a value for SP2-109-2, this SP must be used.
2109 5* Auto Pitch Adjustment [0 ~ 65535 / 1000 / 1 step]
Interval
Sets the interval for automatic laser beam pitch adjustment.
When the number of times that the resolution has been changed reaches this
value, the laser unit position is automatically corrected.
2109 6 Current LD Unit Position
Displays the current LD unit position (number of pulses from home position). If this
is different from the value of 2-109-1 or 2-109-2, LD unit positioning has failed.
2109 7 Beam Pitch Change Counter
Displays how many times the LD unit position has been changed (how many times
the resolution has changed.)
When the laser beam pitch adjustment is done, this counter is reset to zero.
2109 8 Beam Pitch Data Reset
Resets the values of SP2-109-6 and SP2-109-7.
After replacing the LD unit, this SP mode must be performed. See the LD Unit
Removal Procedure.
2110 Test Mode dpi DFU, [See below / 8/ 0 ~ 18]

Sets the scanning resolution (dpi).
Note: Any setting other than 0, 4, or 8 will cause an error.
0 = 400 x 400 dpi 15 = 439 x 430 dpi
1 = 391 x 406 dpi 16 = 476 x 476 dpi
4= 300 x 300 dpi 17 = 483 x 465 dpi
8= 600 x 600 dpi 18= 465 x 483 dpi
5-8
2112 Polygon Motor Off Timer [0 ~ 60 s / 10 s / 5 s step]

Input the time that the polygon motor is to switch off after the printer has remained
idle for the specified time and entered the standby mode.
If set to zero, the polygon motor never switches off in standby mode. However, if
the machine enters the energy saver mode, the polygon motor will ignore the zero
setting and switch itself off.
2201* Development Bias Adjustment

2201 1* Development Bias [-200 ~ -700 / -560V / 10V step]
Adjusts the development bias for copying.
Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum.
2201 2* ID Sensor Pattern [- 200 ~ -700 / -400V / 10V step]
Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern for VSP
2207 Forced Toner Supply

Forces the toner bottle to supply toner at 1-second intervals for up to 30 seconds.
To start, press .
2208* Toner Supply Mode [0: Sensor control, 1: Image pixel count]
Selects the toner mode.
If you select 1, SP2-209-002 should be set to its default value. Use image pixel
count modes only as a temporary measure if the ID or TD sensor is defective.
2209* Toner Supply Rate
Service
Tables
2209 1 Toner Rate [10 ~ 800 / 60 mg/s / 5 mg/s step]
Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by the toner supply motor. The
length of time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by the TD
sensor and ID sensor.
Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time. Use a lower value if
the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black.
2209 2* Toner Supply Correction Data [25 ~ 300 / 300 / 25 step]
Displays the toner supply correction coefficient (K). It can also be used to adjust K,
but the value is changed again when VT is measured for the next copy.
The toner supply rate depends on the amount of toner in the toner bottle. This
change is corrected using this coefficient. This SP can be used to check the toner
supply condition. The lower the value of K, the lower the toner density
2210* ID Sensor Pattern Interval

Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern prints.
2210 1* Job Page Count [0 ~ 200 / 10 / 1]
Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing. For users that do not make
many copies daily, set a smaller interval to compensate for the effects of seasonal
and weather changes.
2210 2* Forced Page Count [2 ~ 999 / 200 / 1]
Forces creation of the ID sensor pattern to prevent low density copies for
customers who use the copier for long copy jobs.
5-9
2213* Copies After Toner Near-End

Selects the number of copies that can be printed once the copier has detected
toner near-end.
[0~2/0/1 step]
[0: 90 copies, 1: No copies, 2: 10 copies]
Notes:
• If "1" is selected the machine stops printing when the TD sensor output drops
below the prescribed level.
• Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of very high density.
2220* Vref Manual Setting

Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after replacing
the development unit with another development unit that contains toner.
[1.0 ~ 5.00 V / 4.00V / 2.0 step]
1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit and
the machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit into SP2-
220.
3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220 back to
the original value.
Notes:
2223* Vt Display
2223 1 Current
Displays the TD sensor output voltage for the immediately previous copy.
2223 2 Average Previous 10 copies
Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor outputs (from the previous 10
copies).
2223 3 Rate of Change
Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor output.
2223 4 GAIN
Displays the GAIN value used to calculate the on time for the toner supply motor.
2223 5 Image Pixel Count
Displays the image pixel count.
5-10
2301 Transfer Current Adjustment

2301 1 1st Side of Paper 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 35 / 1µA step]
45 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 45] / 1µA step]
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper (image area).
If the user uses thicker paper, the current may have to be increased to ensure
sufficient transfer of toner.
2301 2 2nd Side of Paper 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 35 / 1µA step]
45 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 40] / 1µA step]
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper (image area).
2301 3 Leading Edge 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 20 / 1µA step]
45 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 20] / 1µA step]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge of the paper.
Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity
and high temperature conditions.
2301 4 Bypass Feed (45ppm) 45 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 45 / 1µA step]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray (image area) for the
45 CPM(45 cpm).
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the bypass tray, use a higher setting.
2301 5 Leading Edge Bypass Feed 45 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 60 / 1µA step]
(45ppm)
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the
by-pass tray for the 45 CPM(45 cpm).
Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity
and high temperature conditions.
2301 6 Bypass Feed (35 ppm) 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 35 / 1µA step]
Service
Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray (image area) for the
Tables
35 CPM (35 cpm).
2301 7 Leading Edge Bypass Feed (35 ppm) 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100µA / 45 / 1µA step]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the
by-pass tray for the 35 CPM (35 cpm).
5-11
2309* Transfer Current Correction

2309 1 Paper Lower Width (a) [0 ~ 297 / 150 / 1 mm step]
Adjusts the lower paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage,
and development bias corrections.
Use this SP when an image problem (e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs with a
small width paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value, the transfer current
will be multiplied by the factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or SP2-309-5 (by-pass).
2309 2 Paper Upper Width (b) [0 ~ 297 / 216 / 1 mm step]
Adjusts the upper paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage,
and development bias corrections.
As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in SP2-309-4 (paper tray) and SP2-309-6
(by-pass).
2309 3 Paper Tray (alpha) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step]
Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less
than the setting of SP2-309-1.
2309 4 Paper Tray (beta) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step]
2309 5 By-Pass Feed (gamma) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm step]
2309 6 By-Pass Feed (delta) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm step]
2801* TD Sensor Initial Setting

Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to enter
the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the edge of the
developer package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor
to make the TD sensor output about 3.0 V. Press “Execute” to start. After finishing
this, the TD sensor output voltage is displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or
adding new developer.
2802* TD Sensor Manual Setting

Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually for the following.
2802 1 VTS [1.00 ~ 5.00V / 4.78V / 0.02V step]
Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT).
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that
already contains toner. For example, when using a development unit from another
machine for test purposes. To adjust VT, use a similar procedure as for SP2-220.
2802 2 VTMAX [1.00 ~ 5.00V / 4.78V / 0.02V step]
Adjusts the maximum value for SP2802 1.
2802 3 VTMIN [1.00 ~ 5.00V / 1.00V / 0.02V step]
Adjusts the minimum value for SP2802 1.
2805* Developer Initialization

Performs the developer initialization. Press “Execute” to start. This SP should be
performed after doing SP2801-1 at installation and after replacing the drum.
5-12
2902 Test Pattern

2902 2 IPU Test Pattern Pattern 0 ~ 15 ( 5.2.4)
Prints the test patterns for the IPU chip.
This SP mode is useful for finding whether the BICU or the SBU is defective. If the
printout is not OK, the BICU is defective.
2902 3 Printing Test Pattern Pattern 0 ~ 38( 5.2.4)
Prints the printer test patterns. Select the number of the test pattern that you want
to print.
This SP mode is useful for finding whether the LDDR or the BICU is defective. If
the printout is not satisfactory, the LDDR is defective.
2909* Main Scan Magnification

Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode and printer
mode. Press to toggle ±.
2909 1* Copier [–2.0 ~ +2.0 / 0 / 0.1% step]
2909 2* Printer [–2.0 ~ +2.0 / 0 / 0.1% step]
2911 Transfer Current On/Off Timing

2911 1 La (On Timing) [–30 ~ +30 / 0 mm / 1 mm step]
Adjusts the transfer current on timing at leading edge.
2911 2 Lb (Switch Timing) [0 ~ +30 / 10 mm / 1 mm step]
Adjusts the transfer current switch timing. This determines when the leading edge
stops and the image area current begins (see SP2-301).
2911 3 Lc (Off Timing) [–30 ~ +30 / 5 mm / 1 mm step]
Adjusts the transfer current off timing. (e.g. –5 mm is 5 mm before the trailing
Service
Tables
edge.)
2912* Drum Reverse Rotation Interval DFU
2913* Print Density for Test Pattern [0 ~ 15 / 15 / 1]

Sets the print density for the patterns printed with SP2-902-3.
5-13
2914* Process Control Setting

2914 1* C-alpha [0 ~ 400 / 150 / 10V step]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from
the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on
the value of SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem (such as white spots at the center of black
dots or breaks in thin black lines) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from
the by-pass feed tray.
2914 2* C-beta [0 ~ 400 / 0 / 10V step]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from
the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on
the value of SP2-309-2.
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with a
small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray.
2914 3* B-gamma [0 ~ 300 / 200 / 10V step]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the
by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the
value of SP2-309-1.
2914 4* B-delta [0 ~ 300 / 50 / 10V step]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the
by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the
value of SP2-309-2.
2920 LD Off Check DFU
2960* Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = No, 1 = Yes]

Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
2964* Transfer Cleaning Blade Forming [0 ~ 30/ 0 / 1 sheets]

Applies a pattern of toner to the transfer belt at a defined interval between sheets
on the transfer belt in order to reduce friction between the belt surface and the
cleaning blade.
Under conditions of high temperature and high humidity, the density control
feature may reduce the amount of toner, which also reduces the amount of toner
on the surface of the transfer belt. With less toner on the belt, the friction between
the belt and the blade increases, and could cause the blade to bend or scour the
surface of the belt.
5-14
2969* LD – PWM Selection

2969 1* Printer Output LD – PWM Selection [1 ~ 4 / 1 / 1 step]
Changes the LD power PWM control for printed copies. A smaller value produces
a lighter image. Use this SP to adjust the image density for printing from a
personal computer or printing a received fax message.
1: 87.5% 2: 75% 3: 62.5% 4: 50%
2969 2* Fax Output LD – PWM Selection [1 ~ 4 / 1 / 1 step]
Changes the LD power PWM control for printed fax messages. A smaller value
produces a lighter image. Use this SP to adjust the image density for printing fax
messages.
1: 87.5% 2: 75% 3: 62.5% 4: 50%
2971 Toner Full Sensor Count DFU
2972* Grayscale Limit

A new feature of this machine that controls the halftone density level to prevent
deterioration of the OPC. The halftone density is detected by the ID sensor, and
the machine adjusts the intensity of the LD beam according to the upper/lower
limit setting.
2972 1* Upper Limit [0 ~ 100 / 63 / 1 step] (35 cpm only)
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.
A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale. If the
image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark areas, reduce
this value to make the borders clearer.
2972 2* Lower Limit [0 ~ 100 / 57 / 1 step] (35 cpm only)
Service
Tables
Defines the lower limit for grayscale.
A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the scale.
2973* Grayscale Copy Interval Check [0 ~ 1000 / 100 / 10 step]

Sets the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the OPC. If
the number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if the door is
opened and closed, charge correction is executed.
2974* Image Density Adjustment [1 ~ 5 / 3 / 1 step]

Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and ID
sensor output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
2975* Toner End Detection ON Time [0 ~ 2,000 / 0 / 10 s step]

Sets a time limit for issuing the toner near end warning on the operation panel.
The time may need to be shorter for customers who run especially large print jobs
(working at night, for example) to ensure earlier warning of the toner near end
condition so toner out does not interrupt a long job.
0: Normal end detection (90 sheets after near-end detected (SP2213)
5-15
2976* Toner Bottle Total Time On [0 ~ 2,000,000 / 0 / 1 ms step]

Displays the total ON time of the toner supply motor, calculated from when the
toner bottle was replaced. Use this to check that the toner end count (SP2975) is
working properly.
When SP2975 is set to any value other than “0”, this value is displayed when it
matches the setting of SP2975. When SP2975 is set to “0”, SP2976 is disabled.
SP2976 is automatically set to zero by toner end recovery.)
2980* Charge Counter [0 ~ 1000000 / 0 / 1 step]

Sets the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before the
charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in the polarity
of the carrier.
The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and
cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to increase after a specified
number of copies can compensate for this effect.
2981 Polygon Mirror Rotation Switch DFU

Switches the number revolutions per minute of the polygon mirror motor.
0: Rpm determined by engine
1: Rpm for 35 CPM (35 cpm)
2: Rpm for 45 CPM(45 cpm)
5-16
SP3-xxx: Process
3001* ID Sensor Initial Setting
3001 1 ID Sensor PWM Setting [0 ~ 255 / 100 / 1 step]
Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call error
after clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
3001 2 ID Sensor Initialization —
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum (VSG) is
adjusted automatically to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
Press “Execute” to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the ID
sensor, replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
3103* ID Sensor Output Display

Displays the current VSG, VSP, VSDP, and grayscale control.
If the ID sensor does not detect the ID pattern, “VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V” is
displayed and an SC code is generated.
If the ID sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum, “VSP = 0.0 V/VSG =0.0
V” is displayed and an SC code is generated.
3103 1* Vsg (Drum Surface Output) [0V ~ 5.00V]
3103 2* Vsp (Pattern Output) [0V ~ 5.00V]
3103 3* Vsdp (Immediate Post-Pattern Output). [0V ~ 5.00V]
3103 4* Vsm/Vsg (Grayscale Post-Pattern Output) [0V ~ 5.00V]
3905* Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning After Job

Toner and carbon clinging to the hot roller strippers can cause poor print quality.
Service
To prevent this, toner and carbon are dislodged from the hot roller strippers in two
Tables
ways: 1) switching the fusing motor on/off after every print job, and 2) freely
rotating the hot roller for 5 s at the beginning of every print job. These SP set up
operation of the first method (switching the fusing motor on/off after a print job.)For
details, see Section “6.6.2 Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning”. Also see SP 5959.
3905 1* Number Rotations
This SP sets the number of times the 1st Cleaning is done for the number of
pages prescribed with SP3905 002 have been printed.
[0.0~1.0/1.0/0.1]
Note:
• All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60 sec. after the
cleaning cycle ends.
• Raising this setting can increase wear on the hot roller and cleaning roller and
shorten the service life of the hot roller.
3905 2* Number of Pages
This SP prescribes the number of pages to accumulate before the fusing motor is
switched on/off (1 cycle).
[0 ~ 1000 / 5 / 1]
Unless you change this setting, 15 sec. after a total of 5 pages have been printed
(the accumulated total of several small jobs), the fusing motor will switch on for 15
sec. and then switch off. This 15 sec. off/15 sec. on at the end of a cleaning job is
the 1st Cleaning.
5-17
3905 3* No. addtnl. sheets for 2nd HR stripper cleaning

This SP prescribes the number of pages to print continuously before the fusing
motor is switched on/off twice.
[6 ~ 49 / 30 / 1]
Unless you change this setting, 15 sec. after the end of every print job of 30 to 49
continuous pages, the 1st Cleaning will be done twice (fusing motor is switched
on/off twice at 15 sec. intervals).
3905 4* No. addtnl. sheets for 3rd HR stripper cleaning
This SP prescribes the number of pages to print continuously before the 1st
Cleaning is done once at the end of the print job, pauses 45 sec., and then
executes again.
[50 ~ 999/ 100 / 1]
Unless you change this setting, 15 sec. after the end of every print job of 50 to 999
continuous pages, the fusing motor will switch on for 15 sec., switch off for 4 sec.
switch on for 15 sec. and then switch off. Switching the fusing motor on again for
15 sec. after 45 sec. have elapsed after the 1st Cleaning is called the 2nd
Cleaning.
3905 5* No. of times for 3rd HR stripper cleaning
This SP prescribes the number of times that the cleaning pattern of SP3905 004 is
repeated for the number of pages prescribed by SP3905 004.
[0~5/0/1]
Unless you change this setting, the cleaning pattern of SP3904 (1st Cleaning,
then the 2nd Cleaning after 35 sec.) is not repeated. If you change this setting to
"1" for example, then the pattern will be repeated once.
3905 6* Job/HR stripper cleaning priority setting
This SP setting determines whether cleaning is canceled if another job starts while
cleaning is in progress.
0: New job priority
1: Cleaning priority
Setting this SP to "1" ensures that every cleaning cycle executes completely
before another job is allowed to start.
5-18
SP4-xxx: Scanner
4008* Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
Adjusts the magnification of the sub scan direction during scanning. Changing this
value changes the scanner motor speed. Press to toggle ±.
[–0.9 ~ 0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1% step]
4010* Scanner Leading Edge Registration

Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning. Press to toggle ±.
[–0.9 ~ 0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
As you enter a negative value, the image moves toward the leading edge.
4011* Scanner Side-to-Side Registration

Adjusts side-to-side registration for scanning. Press to toggle ±.
[–4.6 ~ +4.6 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
As you enter negative values, the image will disappear at the left, and as you
enter positive values, the image will appear at the left.
4012* Scanner Erase Margin

Adjusts scanning margins for the leading and trailing edges (sub scan) and right
and left edge (main scan).
Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin greater than the
printer margin.
4012 1* Leading Edge [0 ~ 9 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: 3 ± 2 mm)
4012 2* Trailing Edge [0 ~ 9 / 0.5 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: 2 ± 2 mm)
4012 3* Right [0 ~ 9 / 0.5 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: +2.5 ~ -1.5 mm)
Service
Tables
4012 4* Left [0 ~ 9 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: 2 ± 1.5 mm)
4013 Scanner Free Run

Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp off.
[OFF] [ON]
5-19
4020* ADF Scan Glass Dust Check

This function checks the narrow scanning glass of the ADF for dust that can cause
black lines in copies. If dust is detected a system banner message is displayed,
but processing does not stop.
4020 1* Check On/Off Change
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF when the
original size is detected before a job starts. This function can detect dust on the
white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on the glass. Sensitivity of
the level of detection is adjusted with SP4999 2.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off. No dust warning.
1: On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job.
Note: Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and the white
plate above the scanning glass.
4020 2* Detect Level
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is
available only after SP49991 is switched on.
[0~8/ 4/ 1]
If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise the
setting to increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when you see not
black streaks in copies, lower the setting.
Note: Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the
originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not
detected and the warning remains on.
4301 APS Sensor Output Display

Displays the time required to detect the size of the paper on the scanner exposure
glass.
(7) [00011111] (0)
4303* APS A5/LT Size Detection

Determines whether an original of non-standard size is detected as A5/HLT size
by the APS sensor.
0: Non-standard size not detected as A5/HLT
1: Non-standard size detected as A5/HLT LEF
2: Non-standard size detected as A5/HLT SEF
If 0 is selected, “Cannot detect original size” will be displayed.
4305* Original Size Detection

Selects whether or not the copier APS sensor detects the original as 8K/16K or
A4/LT.
0: Normal (APS detects standard sizes)
1: A4 or LT original size detect enabled
1: 8K, 16K paper size detect enabled (Taiwan only)
5-20
4307* APS Sensor Output Display

Determines whether or not the original size is detected while the exposure lamp
lights during initialization.
0: Original size detection at power on disabled.
1: Original size detection at power on enabled
4428 A456B24 DFU
4495* Scanner Evaluation Mode DFU

This SP is used to test the operation of the scanner in the book (platen) mode and
ARDF mode.
[0~2/0/1]
0: Normal mode
1: Contact Glass Check. Exposure glass (book mode) evaluation mode with
image through processing
2: DF Glass Check. Scanning glass (ARDF mode) (Lamp on> Shading> F-Gate
assert at read position> Image through processing
4550* Scanner: Text: Print

These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for text printed after
scanning.
Note:
• As a general rule, adjust the level (coefficient) before adjusting the strength.
• Raising the brightness or contrast level may increase the occurrence of moiré
Service
Tables
4550 1 MTF Filter Level: Main Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main/sub scan
4550 2 MTF Filter Level: Sub Scan directions.
[0~15/8/1]
0: Weakest Å 8: Default Æ 15: Strongest
4550 3 MTF Filter Strength: Main Scan Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan
4550 4 MTF Filter Strength: Sub Scan directions.
[0~7/4/1]
4550 5 Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing for originals that
contain dithered images.
[0~7/0/1]
0: Default (Off) Æ 7: Strongest
4550 6 Brightness Sets the overall brightness of the image.
[1~255/128/1]
4550 7 Contrast Sets the overall contrast of the image.
[1~255/128/1]
4550 8 Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to
improve the appearance of background.
[0~7/0/1]
*1 When the CCD converts the original image to electrical signals, the contrast is reduced due to
the influence that adjacent white and black pixels have on one another as a result of lens
properties. Typically, you will see very narrow width and spacing between black and white areas.
MTF corrects this problem and emphasizes image detail.
5-21
4551* Scanner: Text: OCR

These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for OCR scan mode.
Note:
[0~15/8/1]
[0~7/4/1]
4551 5 Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing.
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[0~7/0/1]
5-22
4552* Scanner: Text/Photo

These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for Text/Photo mode.
Note:
[0~15/8/1]
[0~7/4/1]
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[0~7/0/1]
Service
Tables
5-23
4553* Scanner: Photo

These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for Photo mode.
Note:
[0~15/8/1]
[0~7/4/1]
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[0~7/0/1]
5-24
4556* Scanner Grey Scale

These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for Grayscale..
Note:
[0~15/0/1]
[0~7/0/1]
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[0~7/0/1]
Service
Tables
4600* SBU Version

This SP displays the ID code of the SBU. This is an 8-byte display. Bytes 3 to 0
are fixed (0010). Bytes 7 to 4 display the ID code of the SBU.
4605* Scanner Adjustment

Use these SP codes to 1) display the status of the white level peak adjustment for
the SBU, and 2) do the adjustment manually.
4605 1* Flag Display Displays the status of standard white plate density adjustment:
1: White level peak density adjusted
0: White level peak density not adjusted
4605 2* Start Sets the machine in the standard white plate density adjustment
mode (a message is displayed on the LCD). Place a T6200 text
chart on the exposure glass and press [1] to do the white level
peak density adjustment with the standard white plate. After
execution a message tells you whether the adjustment
succeeded or not.
0: Off
1: On
4605 3* Flag Reset Resets the flag that indicates the status of the standard white
plate density adjustment.
5-25
4610* Standard White Level Adjustment: This Time

After the white peak level density has been adjusted manually with SP 4605 2, this
SP code detects the difference between the adjustment and the target reference
and stores this value in NVRAM.
[0~255/150/1]
4613* Standard White Pre-Level Adjustment: Last Time DFU
4616* Standard White Level Adjustment: At Factory DFU
4624* BK Adjustment DFU

These SP codes allow you to confirm the values for rough and detail adjustments
of the black level even and odd channels when the machine was turned on. You
can also adjust these values manually with the 10-key pad. If you change any of
these SP codes manually, be sure to turn the machine off and on to enable the
new settings.
4624 1 EVEN Rough adjustment, this time
4624 2 ODD [0~255/200/1]
4624 3 EVEN Detail adjustment, this time
4624 4 ODD [0~255/200/1]
4629* Gain Adjustment: Current

When the machine is turned on, the SBU performs separate fine adjustments for
Ech (the even channel) and Och (the odd channel). These SP codes read the
values of adjustments done after the machine was powered on. These SP codes
should display 223±1, set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine gain
adjustment and sent to the DAC.
You can use these SP codes to adjust the value manually. Be sure to turn the
printer off and on to enable any settings that you change.
4629 1 EVEN EVEN Channel (Ech) [0~255/0/1]
4629 2 ODD ODD Channel (Och) [0~255/0/1]
4640* SBU Setting DFU Black Level Loop Count

4640 1 Black Level Loop Count: Offset 1 [0~255/0/1]
4640 2 Black Level Loop Count: Offset 2
4641* SBU Setting DFU White Level Loop Count

Displays the number of loops executed during white peak level adjustment for
AGC (Automatic Gain Control). This SP is for display only and the value cannot be
adjusted.
[0~255/0/1]
5-26
4646* SBU Setting DFU Time-out Flag

This SP determines whether the automatic scanner adjustment loop has exceeded
the prescribed number of loops and flagged a timeout.
[0~OxFF/0/1]
The position of the bits that display "1" tell you where the error has occurred.
Bit No. Where the Error Occurred
Bit 0 (LSB) Ech Black Level Error
Bit 1 Och Black Level Error
Bit 2 Ech Gain Adjustment Timeout
Bit 3 Och Gain Adjustment Timeout
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 (MSB) Reference Ajustment Timeout
4647 SBU Setting DFU SBU Preset Error Flag

This flag indicates that an ASIC read error has occurred, or that a hardware
transmission error has occurred at LM98513.
[0~OxFF/0/1]
The position of the bits that display "1" tell you where the error has occurred.
Bit No. Where the Error Occurred
Bit 0 (LSB) LM98513 Read Error
Bit 1 GASBUP Read Error
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3
Service
Tables
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 (MSB)
4655* BK Adjustment: Prev. DFU

These SP codes allow you to confirm the values for rough and detail adjustments
of the black level even and odd channels before the machine was powered on.
You can also adjust these values manually with the 10-key pad. If you change any
of these SP codes manually, be sure to turn the machine off and on to enable the
new settings.
4655 1 EVEN Rough adjustment – EVEN channel. [0~255/0/1]
4655 2 ODD Rough adjustment – ODD channel. [0~255/200/1]
4655 3 EVEN Detail adjustment – EVEN channel. [0~255/200/1]
4655 4 ODD Detail adjustment – ODD channel. [0~255/200/1]
5-27
4659* Gain Adjustment: Prev

values of the adjustments in effect before the machine was powered on. These SP
codes should display 223±1, set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine
gain adjustment and sent to the DAC.
4659 1 EVEN [0~255/0/1]
4659 2 ODD
4674* BK Rough Adjustment: Factory DFU

4674 1 EVEN [0~255/200/1]
4674 2 ODD
4674 3 EVEN
4674 4 ODD
4678* Gain Adjustment: Factory DFU

values of the adjustments in effect before the machine was powered on. These SP
codes should display 223±1, set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine
gain adjustment and sent to the DAC.
46781 EVEN [0~255/0/1]
46782 ODD
4691* White Peak Level

4691 1 EVEN [0~255/0/1]
4691 2 ODD
4694* Black Level

4694 1 EVEN [0~255/0/1]
4694 2 ODD
4800 SBU Setting DFU Black Level Adjustment Mode

This SP switches the black offset compensation mode on and off. Black offset
correction is done during automatic image density correction (ADS).
Note: This SP operates only if the black offset correction circuit is built into the
SBU.
0: Off
1: On
5-28
4801* SBU Setting DFU Standard White Level Adjustment Loop Count
Displays the number of loops executed during white peak level adjustment for
AGC (Automatic Gain Control). This SP is for display only and the value cannot be
adjusted.
4901* SBU Setting DFU
4995 Scanner Evaluation Mode DFU
4903* Filter Setting

Many filter setting SP modes have discussions in section 6. ( 6.2)
4903 5 Full Size Mode 0: No. Normal operation
1: Yes. Main scan magnification always full-size
Selects whether the copy is always full size, even if the magnification ratio has
been changed. Set to 1 to check the main scan magnification. If the magnification
is not 100%, the image processing circuits could be malfunctioning.
This SP is used to determine whether magnification is operating correctly. If this
SP is set to 1 can make it easier to determine which part of the IPU is
malfunctioning.
4903 7 Image Shift in Magnification DFU, [0~7199 / 0 / 1 step]
Adjusts the amount of pixel shift in the main scan direction in the magnification
mode.
4903 8* Fax 25%, 50% Reduction DFU, [0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
Determines whether 25% and 50% reduction is available in the fax mode.
0: Off
Service
Tables
1: Conducts fax mode OR processing for main scan for resolution below 100 dpi
in only Text mode.
2: Conducts pre-filter processing for fax mode.
3: Conducts fax Text mode OR processing for main scan for resolution below 100
dpi. Pre-filter processing is done in every mode except Fax Text mode.
4903 10 to 4903 16, Pre-Filter Processing ( 6.5)
The following 5 SP modes Selects the filter processing setting for smoothing in
order to reduce the incidence of moiré in images in different original modes.
Specifically, they set 1) the compression rate for parallel lines in the main scan
direction and for long lines in the sub scan direction, and 2) the strength of
smoothing.
Enter the appropriate number with the10-key pad then press .
These settings attempt to smooth lines without making them standout. Increasing
the strength of a setting can reduce the incidence of moiré but can also decrease
sharpness.
4903 10* Pre-Filter: Text [0~9 / 0 / 1]
4903 12* Pre-Filter: Photo Mode [0~9 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 13* Pre-Filter: Text/Photo [0~9 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 15* Pre-Filter: Light [0~9 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 16* Pre-Filter: Generation [0~9 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 20 to 4903 35, Text Mode MTF Filter Coefficient and MTF Filter Strength
The following 15 SP modes select either the MTF filter coefficient (Level) or the
MTF filter strength for text mode at various reproduction ratios. Each SP applies to
either the main-scan direction or the sub-scan direction. ( 6.5)
4903 20* Main Filter Level: Text 25%-64% [0~15 / 9 / 1 step]
4903 21* Sub Filter Level: Text 25%-64% [0~13 / 13 / 1 step]
4903 22* Main Filter Strength: Text 25%-64% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
5-29
4903 23* Sub Filter Strength: Text 25%-64% [0~15 / 2 / 1 step]

4903 36 to 4903 38, Photo Mode MTF Filter Coefficients ( 6.5)
4903 36: Selects the MTF filter coefficient for edges in the photo mode
4903 37: Selects the filter coefficient for smoothing in the photo mode. The higher
the number you select, the greater the applied smoothing effect.
4903 38: Selects the MTF filter coefficient sharpening an entire image in the Photo
mode.
For 4093 36 and 4093 38, the higher the number you select, the greater the effect
on sharpening low contrast text and thin lines. However, a high setting could
cause background to drop or, or cause moiré to appear in photos shaded with
dots. (0:Off, 1: Softest, 7: Sharpest)
4903 36* Photo MTF (Edge) [[0~7 / 0 / 1]
4903 37* Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode [0~7 / 2 / 1]
4903 38* Photo MTF (All) [[0~7 / 0 / 1]
4903 39 to 4903 52, Text/Photo Mode MTF Filter Coefficient ( 6.5)
The following 8SP modes select the filter coefficients for either the edges (Edge)
or for the entire image (All) for the Text/Photo mode at various reproduction ratios.
Generally, increasing the value can improve the appearance of low contrast text;
however, it can also cause background to fade or drop out completely or increase
the incidence of moiré. Each SP has a range of 0~7 (0:Off, 1: Softest, 7: Sharpest)
4903 39* Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 25-64% [0~7 / 1 / 1]
4903 40* Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 25-64% [0~7 / 4 / 1]
4903 55 and 4903 56, MTF Filter Coefficients for Light Originals ( 6.5)
These modes select the MTF filter coefficient (Level) and strength for originals
scanned in the Pale mode. While these SPs can improve the appearance of low
contrast originals, a high setting can also increase the incidence of moiré.
4903 55* Filter Level: Light Original [0~6 / 6 /1]
4903 56* Filter Strength: Light Original 0: 1/32x, 1: 1/16x, 2: 1/8x, 3: 1/4x, 4: 1/2x, 5: 1x,
6: 2x, 7: 4x
4903 57 and 4903 58, MTF Filter Coefficients for Generation Copy ( 6.5)
These modes select the MTF filter coefficient (Level) and strength for originals
scanned in the Generation Copy mode. While selecting a higher number
strengthens the effect of the filter to improve contrast, a very high setting can
increase the incidence of moiré.
4903 57* Filter Level: Generation Copy [0~6 / 3 /1 step]
5-30
4903 58* Filter Strength: Generation 0: 1/32x, 1: 1/16x, 2: 1/8x, 3: 1/4x, 4: 1/2x, 5: 1x,
Copy 6: 2x, 7: 4x
4903 60 to 4903 64, Independent Dot Erase Level
The following 4 SP modes select the independent dot erase level for originals
scanned in different modes. While selecting a higher setting erases more dots,
setting a very high setting can cause very fine text or other detail to fade or drop
out completely.
1: Weakest (fewest dots erased), 15: Strongest (most dots erased)
4903 60* Independent Dot Erase: Text Mode [0~15 / 5 / 1 step]
4903 62* Independent Dot Erase: Text/Photo [0~15 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 63* Independent Dot Erase: Light Original [0~15 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 64* Independent Dot Erase: Generation Copy [0~15 / 8/ 1 step]
4903 65 to 4903 69, Background Erase Level
The following 5 SP modes adjust the threshold for background erase in originals
scanned in different modes. A higher setting reduces more dirty background, but a
very high setting can cause the image to reverse or cause other unexpected
results. For all these modes, 0 = off (default).
4903 65* Background Erase Level: Text Mode [0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 66* Background Erase Level: Photo Mode [0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 67* Background Erase Level: Text/Photo Mode [0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 68* Background Erase Level: Light Original [0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 69* Background Erase Level: Generation Copy [0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
4903 75 to 4903 77, Line Width Correction
4903 75: Determines whether line thickness is adjusted in the main and/or sub
scan direction. Enter the appropriate number with the 10-key pad then press
4903 76 and 4903 77: Select the threshold for line width detection in originals
copied in the Generation Copy mode. Higher numbers make it easier to thicken
Service
Tables
thin lines.
4903 75* Line Width Correction: Generation Mode 0: None, 1: Thin,
2: Thin, 3: Thick
4903 76* LWC Threshold (Main Scan): Generation Mode [0~5 / 1 / 1 step]
4903 77* LWC Threshold (Sub Scan): Generation Mode [0~5 / 1 / 1 step]
4903 79 to 4903 93, Filter Strength: Edge, Filter Adj.: Edge Detection, Filter Adj.:
Magnification ( 6.5)
The following 15 SP modes modify the effects of the MTF filter coefficients set by
SP 4903 39 to 4903 52. The related SP mode is in parenthesis in the right column.
See page 6-28for details about how they work.
4903 79* Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 25-64% [0~3 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 039)
4903 80* Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25-64% [0~15 / 3 / 1] ] (SP4903 039)
4903 81* Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 25-64% [0~15 / 12 / 1] (SP4903 039)
4903 83* Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154% [0~15 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 043)
4903 91* Filter Strength: Photo (Edge) [0~3 / 2 / 1] (SP4903 036)
4903 92* Filter Adj.: Photo (Edge Det.) [0~15 / 0 / 1] (SP4903 036)
4903 93* Filter Adj.: Photo (Mag.%) [0~15 / 15 / 1] (SP4903 036)
5-31
4904* IPU Setting

Many IPU setting SP modes have discussions in section 6. ( 6.5)
4904 1* Grayscale Photo Mode 0: Dithering and smoothing
1: Error diffusion and MTF filter processing
Selects the method of grayscale processing for the Photo Mode.
“Dithering and smoothing” is the same as the setting for “Print Photo” selected on
the operation panel in Photo Mode. Dithering can be adjusted with SP4903 037.
“Error diffusion and MTF filter processing” is the same as the setting for “Normal”
or “Glossy Photo” selected on the operation panel in Photo Mode. Error diffusion
can be adjusted with SP4903 036 and 038.
4904 2* Quality Photo Mode Value Method Lines Effect
0 4-Value Error --- Best resolution
Diffusion
1 Dither 8x 8 75 Screening
3 Dither 8x 8 106 Best grayscale
2 Dither 6 x 6 142 Grayscale priority
4 Dither 4 x 4 212 Resolution priority
Selects the size of the dither matrix for the photo mode.
4904 3* Density Setting for Low 0: Selects γ normal density
Density Original Mode 1: Digitizes to near binary image
Selects the density γ factor for the low-density original mode.
Use to achieve better balance between text and images, correct shadows that
appear around text in handwritten documents, to enhance documents written in
pencil, or to achieve stark contrast when copying blueprints, building plans, etc.
4904 4* Density Setting for Copied 0: Selects γ normal density
Original Mode 1: Digitizes to near binary image
Selects the density γ factor for the copied original mode.
4904 5* Special Text Density [0~7 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: Weaker, 7: Stronger
Enter the appropriate number with the 10-key pad then press . This SP code
adjusts the density of the image to eliminate vertical black lines in originals that
were caused by previous scanning with a dirty optics.
While selecting a higher setting to erase more lines, selecting a very high setting
can cause low contrast areas to become faint or cause them to drop out. ( 6.5)
4904 7* Error Diffusion Pattern 0: Edge threshold pattern is used.
1: Texture Pattern (matrix) 0 is used
2: Texture Pattern (matrix) 1 used.
3: Texture Pattern 2 (matrix) used.
Adjusts the threshold level for error diffusion processing in the Text/Photo mode.
The effect of error diffusion can vary, depending on the image of the original.
Adjust this setting if the results of the texture in copies is not what you expect,
especially before starting a large copy job.
4904 8to 4904 12, Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.), Photo (Edge Det.)
The following 5 SP modes adjust the setting for edge detection during grayscale
processing of originals scanned with the Custom Setting of the Text/Photo mode
and Photo mode in the specified magnification range. At defined edges error
diffusion executes on text to create sharp lines to better define text characters, but
in other areas, error diffusion executes grayscale processing for photographs.
Select a lower setting for better reproduction of photographs and a higher setting
for sharper text. A lower setting improves the appearance of photographs, but can
cause text and thin lines to drop out. A higher setting sharpens text and thin lines,
but can also cause grayscale areas to degrade. ( 6.5)
4904 8* Gray Adj: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25-64% [0~15 / 8/ 1]
5-32
4904 9* Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154%

4904 10* Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 155-256%
4904 11* Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 257-400% [0~15 / 8/ 1]
4904 13* Gray Adj.: Photo (Edge Det.) [0~15 / 0 / 1]
4904 20 to 4904 23, Text (General) Quality ( 6.5)
The following 4 SP modes allow adjustment together with other SP codes to
improve image quality of originals copied in Text Mode at magnification within the
specified magnification range. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of
pictures without moiré, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of text
and thin lines.
0: Off, 1: Pictures highest priority, 13: Text/thin lines highest priority
4904 20* Text (General) Quality 25-64% [0~13 / 0 / 1]
4904 21* Text (General) Quality 65-154% 45 cpm [0~13 / 0 / 1]
35 cpm [0~13 / 0 / 1]
4904 22* Text (General) Quality 155-256% [0~13 / 0 / 1]
4904 23* Text (General) Quality 254-400%
4904 24* Photo (General) Quality [0~10 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: Picture high priority, 10:Text high priority
Allows overall adjustment of photo images in originals scanned in the Photo mode.
Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moiré, and
select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of sharp text. ( 6.5)
4904 25 to 4904 28, Text/Photo (General) Quality ( 6.5)
The following 4 SP modes allow adjustment with other SP codes to improve
quality of images scanned in the Text/Photo mode and in the specified
magnification range. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures
without moiré, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of sharp text.
0: Off, 1: Pictures highest priority, 10: Text highest priority
Service
Tables
4904 25* Text/Photo (General) Quality 25-64% [0~10 / 0 / 1]
4904 29* Pale (General) Quality [0~13 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: Picture high priority, 13:Text high priority
Allows adjustment with other SP codes to improve the overall quality of images
scanned in Pale Mode. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures
without moiré, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of text and thin
lines. ( 6.5)
4904 30* Generation (General) [0~13 / 0 / 1]
Quality 0: Off, 1: Picture high priority, 13:Text high priority
Allows adjustment with other SP codes to improve the overall quality of images in
originals scanned in Generation Copy mode. Select a lower setting to prioritize
reproduction of pictures without moiré, and select a higher setting to prioritize
reproduction of text and thin lines. ( 6.5)
5-33
4905* Image Data Path

SP4905 1 allows switching between filter and magnification processing of the
image for testing.
SP4905 4 allows switching of the printout for testing.
4905 1* Filter Mag. Path Switch DFU
0: Uses settings of each application and mode
1: Through filter
2: Through magnification
3: Through filter, magnification
4905 4* Printout Type Selection DFU
0: Uses settings of each application, mode
1: Reverses image logic (normally inverse
black/white).
4909* Image Data Path

SP4909 1 selects the method for image quality through processing.
SP4909 20 Forces switching of the data output format between writing for the
Ri10, CDIA for testing.
4905 1* Image Quality DFU
Through Processing 0: : Normal operation
1: Grayscale through processing
2: Gamma correction through processing
3: Printer gamma, grayscale through processing
4905 20* Image Data Path – DFU
Printer 0: Normal operation
1: Sets output from the Ri10 to the CDICA for grayscale
output (1 pixel/8bits)
2: Sets output from the Ri10 to the write unit for
grayscale output (4 pixles/8bits)
3: Sets output from the Ri10 to the CDICA for grayscale
output (1 pixel/8bits), also sets output from the Ri10 to
the write unit for grayscale output (4 pixels/8bit)
5-34
SP5-xxx: Mode
5024* mm/inch Display Selection 0: Europe/Asia (mm), 1: North America (inch)

Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
5044* Operation Panel Bit SW DFU
5045 Accounting Counter

Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.
Note: You can change the setting only one time.
[0 to 1/ 1]
0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black (K).
1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Color Total, Black Total, Color
Copies, Black Copies, Color Prints, Black Prints.
5051 Toner Refill Detect Display

This SP switches on/off the message that prompts the operator when it is necessary
to replenish toner in the machine.
ON: Message displayed (Default)
OFF: Message not displayed
5055 Display IP add Display IP Address

Switches the banner display of the IP address off and on. (Default: *Off)
Service
[OFF] ON
Tables
For example, if this SP is switched on, the IP address will be displayed below "Ready"
while the printer is in standby mode:
Ready
169.254.187.055
5104* A3/DLT Double Count

Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except from the
bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4
x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5106* Density Level Setting [1~7 / 4 / 1 notch per step]

Selects the image density level used in ADS mode.
Example: If you set SP5106 6 to “2”: Pressing the Auto Image Density key toggles
the display off and manual notch 2 is selected.
Adjust this SP if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic
density adjustment
5112 Non-Std. Paper Sel.

Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes. If “1” is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper size
using the UP mode.
5-35
5113 Optional Counter Type

001 Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key Card Down
3: Pre-paid Card
4: Coin Rack
5: MF Key Card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
002 External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external device for
user access control.
Note: “SDK” refers to software on an SD card.
[0~3/1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
5118 Disable Copying

Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine
5120 Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal

Do not change. Japan Only
[0~2/1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
5121 Counter Up Timing

Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at paper
exit. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Feed count
1: No feed count
5127* APS Off Mode 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

Selects whether the APS function is enabled or disabled with the contact of a pre-
paid card or coin lock.
5-36
5131* Paper Size Type Selection 0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe

Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper. (Default depends on
DIP SW 101 setting.)
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the archive
files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
5150* By-Pass Length Setting 0: Off, 1: On

Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to
600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5162* App. Switch Method 0: SW, 1: HW

Determines whether the application screen is switched with a hardware switch or
software switch.
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
5167 Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is
used when the receiving fax is accounted for by an external accounting device.
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
5169 CE Login
Service
Tables
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
5179* Bypass Tray Paper Size Error

This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the machine
detects the wrong paper size for the job and jams during feed from the bypass tray.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Off
1: On
5212 Page Numbering

5212 3 Duplex Printout Left/Right Position Horizontally positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
5212 4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers printed
on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
5-37
5228 Scan Binary Bound DFU
5302 Set Time DFU

Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before
delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440~1440/1 min.]
JA: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +6- (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
5307 Summer Time

Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to
Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets you
set these items:
- Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
- Day and time to go back automatically in October.
- Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
Digits Meaning
1st, 2nd Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of 0 cannot be
input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven-digit
setting)
3rd Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday
4th The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit. If “0” is
selected for “Sunday”, for example, and the selected Sunday is the start of
the 2nd week, then input a “2” for this digit.
5th, 6th The time when the change occurs (24-hour as hex code).
Example: 00:00 (Midnight) = 00, 01:00 (1 a.m.) = 01, and so on.
7th The number of hours to change the time. 1 hour: 1
8th If the time change is not a whole number (1.5 hours for example), digit 8
should be 3 (30 minutes).
001 Setting Enables/disables the settings for 002 and 003.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
003 Rule Set (Start) The start of summer time.
004 Rule Set (End) The end of summer time.
5-38
5401 Access Control DFU

This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
5401 6 User Recognition – Copier This SP codes are provided for future
5401 16 Use Recognition – Document Server customization of the access control
5401 26 User Recognition – Fax feature. This is to be done at the
factory, not in the field.
5401 36 User Recognition – Scanner
5401 46 User Recognition – Printer
5401 76 User Recognition – Expanded Function 1
5401 103 Default Document ACL
Whenever a new login user is added to the address book in external certification
mode (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default document ACL is updated according
to this SP setting.
[0~3/0/1]
0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a machine that is not using document server.
5401 200 SDK1 Unique ID "SDK" is the "Software Development
5401 201 SDK1 Certification Method Kit". This data can be converted from
5401 210 SDK2 Unique ID SAS (VAS) when installed or
uninstalled.
5401 211 SDK2 Certification Method
5401 220 SDK3 Unique ID
Service
Tables
5401 221 SDK3 Certification Method
5404 User Code Count Clear

Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use
of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5501* PM Alarm
5501 1* PM Alarm Level [0~9999 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Alarm off
1~9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1~9999) ≥ PM counter
5501 2* Original Count 0: No alarm sounds
Alarm 1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the ARDF ≥ 10,000
5504* Jam Alarm Japan Only

Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
5-39
5505* Error Alarm

Sets the error alarm level. Japan only DFU
[0~255 / 50 / 100 copies per step]
5507 Supply Alarm

5507 1 Paper Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply.
(0:Off 1:On) DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number
transfer sheets for each paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5,
DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
5507 2 Staple Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed in
(0:Off 1:On) the finisher. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
5507 3 Toner Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the toner end. DFU
(0:Off 1:On) 0: Off, 1: On
If you select “1” the alarm will sound when the copier
detects toner end.
5507 128* Others The “Paper Supply Call Level: nn” SPs specify the paper
5507 132* Interval: A3 control call interval for the referenced paper sizes. DFU
5507 133* Interval: A4 [00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
5507 134* Interval: A5
5507 141* Interval: B4
5507 142* Interval: B5
5507 160* Interval: DLT
5507 164* Interval: LG
5507 166* Interval: LT
5507 172* Interval: HLT
5-40
5508 CC Call (Japan Only)

5508 1 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.
5508 2 Continuous Jams [0~1/1]
5508 3 Continuous Door Open 0: Disable
1: Enable
5508 4 Low Call Mode Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to
reduce the number of calls.
[0~1/1]
0: Normal mode
1: Reduced mode
5508 11 Jam Detection: Time Sets the length of time to determine the length of an
Length unattended paper jam.
[03~30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is
enabled (set to 1).
5508 12 Jam Detection Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to
Continuous Count initiate a call.
[02~10/1]
enabled (set to 1).
5508 13 Door Open: Time Length Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine
when to initiate a call.
[03~30/1]
enabled (set to 1).
5508 21 Jam Operation: Time Determines what happens when a paper jam is left
Service
Tables
Length unattended.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
5508 22 Jam Operation: Determines what happens when continuous paper jams
Continuous Count occur.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
5508 23 Door Operation: Time Determines what happens when the front door remains
Length open.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
5-41
5801 Memory Clear

Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP
codes, print an SMC Report.
5801 1 All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
5801 2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy
process settings.
5801 3 SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control
Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.
5801 4 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
5801 5 MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
5801 6 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings.
5801 7 Fax Application Not used.
5801 8 Printer Application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the
printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
5801 9 Scanner Application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner
SP modes.
5801 10 Web Service/ Network Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and
Application thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
5801 11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP
addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
5801 12 R-Fax Deletes received faxes.
5801 14 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
5801 15 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)
settings.
5801 16 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)
settings.
5801 17 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
5801 18 SRM Memory Clr Initializes information in non-volatile RAM.
5801 19 LCS Memory Clr Initializes information in non-volatile RAM.
5802* Printer Free Run [Disable] [Enable]

Performs a free run. The scanner scans once and the printer prints for the number
of copies requested. To perform the free run, after selecting “1”, press the Copy
Window to enter copy mode, input the number of copies, and then press the Start
key. To stop the free run, press #.
5803 Input Check

Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. ( 5.2.5)
5804 Output Check

Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. ( 5.2.6)
5-42
5807 Option Connection Check

5807 1 ARDF Execution will return either a “1” or “0”:
5807 2 Bank (Paper Tray Unit) 0: Device not connected correctly.
5807 3 LCT 1: Device connected correctly.
5807 4 Finisher (1000-sheet, Two-Tray
finisher)
5811 Machine No. Setting DFU

This SP presents the screen used to enter the 11-digit number of the machine.
The allowed entries are "A" to "Z" and "0" to "9". The setting is done at the factory,
and should not be changed in the field.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting

Use these SP modes to input service and support telephone numbers. Enter the
number and press
Press the key to input a pause. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the
telephone number.
5812 1* Service Service representative telephone number.
5812 2* Facsimile Fax number of service representative
5812 3* Supply Supplier of consumables
5812 4* Operation Operation support
5816 Remote Service

5816 1 I/F Setting
Service
Turns the remote diagnostics off and on.
Tables
[0~2/1]
0: Remote diagnostics off.
1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on.
2: Network remote diagnostics.
5816 2 CE Call
Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or
NRS; to do this, push the center report key
5816 3 Function Flag
Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS network.
[0~1/1]
0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network.
1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network.
5816 6 Device Information Call Display
Controls if the item for initial setting of the screen for the NRS device-information
notification-call is shown.
[0~1/1]
0: Enabled. Item initial setting not shown.
1: Disable. Item for initial setting shown.
5816 7 SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL during
an RCG send for the NRS over a network interface.
[0~1/1]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
5-43
5816 8 RCG Connect Timeout

Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) connects during a call via the NRS network.
[1~90/1 sec.]
5816 9 RCG Write to Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to the
RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
5816 10 RCG Read Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from the
RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
5816 11 Port 80 Enable
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80 on
the NRS network.
[0~1/1]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
5816 21 RCG – C Registed
This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag.
1: Installation completed
2: Installation not completed
5816 22 RCG – C Registed Detail
This SP displays the Cumin installation status.
0: Basil not registered
1: Basil registered
2: Device registered
5816 23 Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
5816 27 Connect Timeout DFU
Timeout time for connection to the GW URL. Operates only for Cumin.
Default: 30
5816 28 Send Timeout DFU
HTTP send timeout.
[0~100/30/1]
5816 29 Receive Timeout DFU
HTTP receive timeout.
[0~100/30/1]
5816 30 Retry Timeout DFU
HTTP connection retry interval. This is the interval between retry attempts when
connection with the GW URL fails.
Default: 3
5816 31 Retry Count DFU
The number of HTTP connection retries. This is the number of retry attempts to
make connection with the GW URL. After the last attempt, the attempt to connect
stops.
Default: 3
5816 32 Connect Send Delay DFU
HTTP connection request transmission delay. This is the standby time between the
send request and the actual sending.
Default: 5
5-44
5816 33 Max Multipart DFU

This the number of TX/RX transmissions for a multi-part message to the GW URL.
Default 10
5816 34 Firm DL Interval DFU
Firmware update retry interval. This is the time interval between attempts to
complete a firmware update.
[0~Oxffff/300/1]
5816 35 Firm DL Retry Count DFU
Firmware update retry attempts. This is the number of times the system attempts to
complete a firmware update.
[0~255/3/1]
5816 61 Cert. Expire Timing DFU
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
5816 62 Use Proxy
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
5816 63 Proxy Host
The is the address of the HTTP proxy server used to effect communication
between Cumin-M and the Gateway. The length of the address is limited to 127
characters (characters beyond the 127th character are ignored).
5816 64 Proxy Port Number
This is the port number of the HTTP proxy used to effect communication between
Cumin-N and the Gateway.
[0~0xffff/0/1]
5816 65 Proxy User name
This is the user name used for certification of the HTTP proxy. The length of the
name is limited to 31 characters (characters beyond the 31st character are ignored).
Service
Tables
5816 66 Proxy Password
This is the certification password of the HTTP proxy. The length of the password is
limitd to 31 characters (characters beyond the 31st character are ignored).
Note: The proxy number, user name, and password comprise proprietary customer information
required by the service technician to do the necessary settings for Cumin-N. To prevent
unauthorized access this information, these SP settings do not appear in the SMC report.
5816 67 CERT: Up State
Displays the state of the certification update used for Cumin. If Cumin has not been
set up, These SP settings are done automatically as soon as Cumin is set up.
0 The certification used by Cumin is set correctly.
1 The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the
GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful update.
3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed
update.
4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is
being sent to the GW URL.
11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification
setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
notified of the certification update request.
13 The notification of the request for certification update has completed
successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request
from the rescue GW URL.
14 The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue
GW URL, and the certification is being stored.
5-45
15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful completion of this event.
16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of
the failure of this event.
17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the
GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but
an certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being
recorded.
18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is
being notified of the failure of the certification update.
5816 68 CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the notification requesting the
certification update.
0 Normal. No request for certification update in progress.
1 Certification update in progress due to expiration of certification.
2 SSL error has been issued after the certification has expired.
3 There has been a shift from a common to individual certification.
4 There has been a common certification without ID2.
5 No certification has been issued.
6 GW URL does not exist.
5816 69 CERT: Up ID
The ID of the request for certification.
5816 83 Firm Up Status
Displays the status of the firmware update.
5816 84 Non-HDD Firm Up
This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD
installed.
5816 85 Firm Up User Check
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the
firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the previous
version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware
update is done with the firmware files from the URL.
5816 86 Firmware Size
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the
firmware update execution.
5816 87 CERT: Macro Version
Displays the macro version of the NRS certification
5816 88 CERT: PAC Version
Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.
5816 89 CERT: ID2 Code
Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).
Asteriskes (****) indicate that no NRS certification exists.
5816 90 CERT: Subject
Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following 17
bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****) indicate that no
DESS exists.
5816 91 CERT: Serial Number
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asteriskes (****) indicate that no
DESS exists.
5816 92 CERT: Issuer
Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the
following 30 bytes. Asteriskes (****) indicate that no DESS exists.
5816 93 CERT: Valid Start
Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
5-46
5816 94 CERT: Valid End

Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
5816 200 Manual Polling
No information is available at this time.
5816 201 Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device.
0 Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set.
1 The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.
2 The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling
request.
3 The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set.
4 The NRS module has not started.
5816 202 Letter Number
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device.
5816 203 Confirm Execute
Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.
5816 204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816
203.
0 Succeeded
1 Inquiry number error
2 Registration in progress
3 Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4 Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
Service
Tables
6 Communication error
7 Certification update error
8 Other error
9 Inquiry executing
5816 205 Confirm Place
Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer
to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL.
5816 206 Register Execute
Executes Cumin Registration.
5816 207 Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0 Succeeded
2 Registration in progress
3 Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4 Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6 Communication error
7 Certification update error
8 Other error
9 Registration executing
5-47
5816 208 Error Code

Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
Illegal Modem Parameter -11001 Chat parameter error
-11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Operation Error, Incorrect -12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without
Setting acquiring device status.
-12003 Attempted registration without execution of
an inquiry and no previous registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for
certification and ID2.
Error Caused by -2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the
Response from GW URL correct international prefix for the telephone
number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
5816 250 CommLog Print
Prints the communication log.
5821* Remote Service Address (Japan Only)

5821 1* CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code. After changing this
setting, you must switch the machine off and on.
5821 2* RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h ~ FFFFFFFFh/ 00000000h /
5824 NVRAM Data Upload

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number)
from NVRAM on the control board to a flash memory card.
While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents a
software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
5825 NVRAM Data Download

Downloads the content of a flash memory card to the NVRAM on the control
board.
5-48
5828 Network Setting

5828 50 1284 Compatibility Enables and disables bi-directional communication on the
(Centro) parallel connection between the machine and a computer.
[0~1/1]
0:Off
1: On
5828 52 ECP (Centro) Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for
data transfer.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5828 65 Job Spool Setting Switches job spooling spooling on and off.
0: No spooling 1: Spooling enabled
5828 66 Job Spool Clear This SP determines whether the job interrupted at power
off is resumed at the next power on. This SP operates
only when SP5828065 is set to 1.
1: Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: Clears spooled job.
5828 69 Job Spool Protocol This SP 8etermines whether job spooling is enabled or
dispabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 Reserved (Not Used)
3 SMB 7 Reserved (Not Used)
5828 84 Setting List Print Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings.
Settings List
Service
Tables
5828 90 TELNET Operation Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is
SettingsTELNET (0:OFF disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
1:ON) [0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5828 91 Web Operation Web Disables or enables the Web operation.
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5-49
5832 HDD Formatting

Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution
ends, cycle the machine off and on.
5832 1 HDD Formatting (All)
5832 2 HDD Formatting (IMH)
5832 3 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
5832 4 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
5832 5 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
5832 6 HDD Formatting (User Info1)
5832 7 Mail RX Data
5832 8 Mail TX Data
5832 9 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
5832 10 HDD Formatting (Log)
5832 11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
5833 e-Cabinet Enable

Enables the e-Cabinet function. Then, the user names in the cabinet are enabled for
use with the POP server.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5834 Operation Panel Image Exposure 0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable)

Enables and disables the operation panel read (dump) feature. After powering on
the machine, set this option to 1 to enable this feature.
To reset the machine to 0, the machine must be turned off and on again. Selecting
0 for this option without cycling the power off and on does not restore the default
setting (0).
5836 Capture Setting

5836 1 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5836 2 Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the
initial system screen.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
5-50
5836 71 Reduction for Copy Color [0~3/1]

0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
5836 72 Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/1]
Text 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
5836 73 Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/1]
Other 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
5836 74 Reduction for Printer [0~3/1]
Color 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
B&W 0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
B&W HQ 1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
5836 81 Format for Copy Color [0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
DFU
5836 82 Format for Copy B&W [0~3/1]
Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 83 Format Copy B&W Other [0~3/1]
5836 84 Format for Printer Color [0~3/1]
DFU
5836 85 Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1]
5836 86 Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1]
Service
HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Tables
5836 91 Default for JPEG [5~95/1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when optional
File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
5-51
5839 IEEE 1394 Not supported by this machine.

This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed.
5839 7 Cycle Master
Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable (Off)
1: Enable (On)
5839 8 BCR Mode
Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394 standard
bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM. (NVRAM: 2-bits)
[Always Effective]
5839 9 IRM 1394a Check
Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode other
than IRM.
[0~1/1]
0: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a
1: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node switches to
IRM.
5839 10 Unique ID
Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system administrator.
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator.
Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used.
ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and the
Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the serial
bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration.
5839 11 Logout
Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1-bit)
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disable (refuse login). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of
login request (standard operation)
ON: Enable (force logout). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of login
request, and the initiator forces the login.
5839 12 Login
Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related).
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB exclusive it) is ignored.
ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect.
5839 13 Login MAX
Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits)
[0~63/1]
0: Reserved
63: Reserved
5-52
5840 IEEE 802.11b

5840 6 Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth
setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
5840 7 Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
5840 11 WEP Key Select
Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests.
[00~11/00/1]
Note: There are four settings (binary numbers): 00, 01, 10, 11. These settings are
possible only after the wireless LAN card has been installed.
00: 1st key. If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the
request is refused.
01, 10, 11: 2nd, 3rd, 4th keys are "Reserved".
5841 Supply Name Setting

Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry
button on the User Tools screen.
5841 1 Toner Name Setting: Black
5841 7 Org Stamp
5841 11 StapleStd1
5841 12 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B698
Service
Tables
5841 13 StapleStd3 Standard Staples for B700/B701
5841 14 Staple Std4
5841 21 StapleBind1
5841 22 StapleBind2 Booklet Staples for B700
5841 23 StapleBind3
5842* Net File Analysis Mode Setting DFU

This is a debugging tool. It sets Bit Groups
the debugging output mode of 0 System & other groups (LSB)
each Net File process. 1 Capture related
Bit SW 0011 1111 2 Certification related
3 Address book related
4 Machine management related
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
6 Repository related
5-53
5844* USB
5844 1* Transfer Rate Full Speed / Auto Change
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
Full Speed: (12 Mbps fixed)
Auto Change: 480 Mbps/12 Mbps auto adjust
5844 2* Vendor ID [0x0000~0xFFFF/ 0x05CA /1], DFU
Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05CA Ricoh Company.
5844 3* Product ID [0x0000~0xFFFF/ 0x0403 /1], DFU
Sets the product ID.
5844 4* Device Release Number [0000~9999/ 0100 /1], DFU
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number
recognized as the BCD.
5845* Delivery Server Setting

Provides items for delivery server settings.
5845 1* FTP Port No. [0~65535 / 3670 / 1]
Sets the FTP port number used when image files are sent to the Scan Router
Server.
5845 2* IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
5845 3* Retry Time [60~900/300/1 sec.]
Sets the length of time to elapse before attempting to resend image files to the
Scan Router Server after an error occurs.
Note: This SP setting is ignored if SP5845 004 is set to "0".
5845 4* Retry Attempts [0~99/3/1]
Sets the number of attempts to resend image files to the Scan Router Server after
an error occurs.
Note: SP5845 003 sets the time to elapse between retry attempts.
5845 6* Delivery Error Display Time Netfiles: [0~999 / 300 / 1]
Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed
when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and
an external device.
5845 8* IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255
Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.
5845 9* Delivery Server Model [0~4/ 0 / 1]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
5-54
5845 10* Delivery Svr Capability

Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
[0~255 / 0 / 1]
(7) [0000 0000] (1)
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exists
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)
5845 11 Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
5846* UCS Setting

5846 1 Machine ID (for Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
6-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
Service
Tables
8-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
5846 2 Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After
clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine
off and on.
5846 3 Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
[2000~50000/1]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
5846 6 Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1 s]
0: No retries
5846 7 Delivery Server Retry Times
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1]
5-55
5846 8 Delivery Server Maximum Entries

Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the users
of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[20000~50000/1]
5846 10 LDAP Search Timeout
Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1~255/1]
5846 40 Addr Book Migration (SD -> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD. You must cycle
the machine off and on after executing this SP.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the HDD.
3. Insert the SD card with the address book data in SD card Slot C3.
4. Turn the machine on.
5. Do SP5846 040.
7. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot C3.
Notes:
• Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD with the
data from the SD card.
• We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card with
SP5846 051 before you execute this SP.
• After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data is
deleted from the source SD card. If the operation fails, the data is not erased
from the SD card.
5846 41 Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic
machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with
the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the
NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the
HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this
SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full address book
access to all users.
Procedure
2. Install the new HDD.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully,
any user can access the address book.
5846 47 Initialize Local Address Book
Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine
managed with UCS.
5846 48 Initialize Delivery Addr Book
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery
address book that is controlled by UCS.
5-56
5846 49 Initialize LDAP Addr Book

Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP
address book that is controlled by UCS.
5846 50 Initialize All Addr Book
Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by
UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not
deleted.
5846 51 Backup All Addr Book
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
5846 52 Restore All Addr Book
Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
5846 53 Clear Backup Info.
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the
files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-
protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
5846 60 Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
1 Japan Only
2
3
Service
4 --- Not Used ---
Tables
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
5846 62 Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the
length of the password.
[0~32/1]
Note:
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.
• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group
password policy to control access to the address book.
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the
[0~32/1]
Note:
5-57

book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the
[0~32/1]
Note:
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the
[0~32/1]
Note:
5846 91 FTP Auth. Port Settings
Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0~65535/1]
5846 94 Encryption Start
Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP
server.
[0~255/1] No default
5846 98 Bit SW2 DFU
These are the output items of debug mode for the address book in the UCS module
(User information Control Service).
0: Off
1: On
Bit 0 Cache Trace
Bit 1 New Database Trace
Bit 2 Access Control Trace
Bit 3 Back-up Restore Trace
Bit 4 API Encryption/Encoding Trace
Bit 5 Text Encoding Trace
Bit 6 Address Book Encryption Trace
Bit 7 Not Used
5-58
5846 99 Bit SW DFU

These are the output items of debug mode for address book in the UCS module
(User information Control Service).
0: Off
1: On
Bit 0 UCS API Trace (Always On)
Bit 1 GWIPC Trace (Always On)
Bit 2 Message Trace (Always On)
Bit 3 Lock Condition Trace (Always On)
Bit 4 Database Trace
Bit 5 FTP Trace
Bit 6 LDAP Trace
Bit 7 I/O Process Trace
5847 Net File Resolution Reduction

5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by
the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile.
“NetFile” refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
5847 2 Rate for Copy B&W Text [0~6/1] 0: 1x
5847 3 Rate for Copy B&W Other [0~6/1] 1: 1/2x
5847 5 Rate for Printer B&W [0~6/1] 2: 1/3x
5847 6 Rate for Printer B&W HQ [0~6/1] 3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
Service
Tables
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x1
1
: “6: 2/3x” applies to 003, 005, 006 only.
5847 21 Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95/1]
5-59
5848 Web Service

5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
5848 1 Access Control. : NetFile (Lower 4 Bits Only)
Bit switch settings.
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to Desk Top Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
5848 2 Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4 Bits) 0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop
Binder.
5848 3 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Bits) Switches access control on and off.
5848 4 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON
5848 5 Acc. Ctrl.: Delivery Input (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 7 Acc. Ctrl Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 9 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 11 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4
Bits)
5848 21 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 22 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4
Bits)
5848 41 Acc. Ctrl: Security Setting (Lower 4 Bits
only)
5848 99 Repository: Download Image Setting
This is a bit-switch setting. Only the lower 4 bits are enabled/disabled.
(7)00000000(0) (1)
B291S932 (2)
(3)
Set to "0" (disabled) or "1" (enabled) as needed for image download.

(1) Mac OS
(2) Windows OS
(3) OS other than Mac or Windows
Note: This SP is used primarily by designers.
5848 100 Repository: Download Image Max. Size [1~1024/1 K]
5848 201 Access Ctrl: Regular Trans
No information is available at this time.
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5-60
5848 210 Setting: Log Type: Job 1 DFU

[0~0xFFFFFFFF/0/1] Note: These SP codes are for display
5848 211 Setting: Log Type: Job 2 DFU only; they cannot be changed.
[0~0xFFFFFFFF/0/1]
5848 212 Setting: Log Type: Access DFU
[0~0xFFFFFFFF/0/1]
5848 213 Setting: Primary Srv DFU
5848 214 Setting: Secondary Srv DFU
5848 215 Setting: Start Time DFU
[0~0xFFFFFFFF/0/1]
5848 216 Setting: Interval Time DFU
[1~100/1/1]
5848 217 Setting: Timing DFU
[0~2/0/1]
0: Transmission off
1: Transmission 1 by 1
2: Periodic transmission
）
5849 Installation Date
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
5849 1 Display The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation
Date” or “Inst. Date”.
5849 2 Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the
printout for the total counter.
[0~1/1]
0: No Print
Service
1: Print
Tables
5850* Address Book Function Japan Only
The machine is shipped ready to use with a G3 line. Some addresses in the
address book may be registered for a G3 line. If a G4 line is added later, use this
SP to switch all lines at once to G4. If the G4 line becomes unusable for some
reason, use this SP to switch easily back to G3.
Search
PABX G3Auto G3 G3-1 G3-2 G3-3 I-G3 G4
PSTN G3Auto G3 G3-1 G3-2 G3-3 I-G3 G4
Replacement
PABX G3Auto G3 G3-1 G3-2 G3-3 I-G3 G4
PSTN G3Auto G3 G3-1 G3-2 G3-3 I-G3 G4
Execute Exit
B291S931.WMF
5-61
5851 Bluetooth Mode

Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
5853* Stamp Data Download

Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM
and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This
SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
Note: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
5856 Remote ROM Update

When set to “1” allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is
cycled off and on.
[0~1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5857 Save Debug Log

001 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is
switched on.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
002 Target (2: HDD 3: SD Card)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected
by SP5858will be stored if an error is generated
[2~3 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
005 Save to HDD
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
006 Save to SD Card
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the SD
Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.
5-62
010 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)

Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD
Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key
specified.
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010 or
011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
013 Free Space on SD Card
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto an
SD card.
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
016 Make HDD Debug
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
017 Make SD Debug
Service
Tables
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
5858* Debug Save When

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP58583 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC
error codes.
58581* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores SC codes generated by copier engine
errors.
58582* Controller SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON Stores SC codes generated by GW controller
errors.
58583* Any SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON [0~65535 / 0 / 1]
58584* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON Stores jam errors.
5859* Debug Log Save Function

5859 1* Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
5859 2* Key 2 functions that use common memory on the controller
5859 3* Key 3 board. ( 5.3.1)
5859 4* Key 4 [-9999999~9999999 / 0 / 1]
5859 5* Key 5
5859 6* Key 6
5859 7* Key 7
5859 8* Key 8
5859 9* Key 9
5859 10* Key 10
5-63
5860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
5860 20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1~168/72/1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received
during this prescribed time.
5860 21 MDN Response RFC2298Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
5860 22 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0~1/1]
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From” item switched.
5860 25 SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Occasionally, all SMTP certifications may fail with SP5860 006 set to "2" to enable
encryption during SMTP certification for the SMTP server. This can occur if the SMTP
server does not meet RFC standards. In such cases you can use this SP to set the
SMTP certification method directly. However, this SP can be used only after SP5860
003 has been set to "1" (On).
Bit0: LOGIN
Bit1: PLAIN
Bit2: CRAM_MD5
Bit3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit4 to Bit 7: Not Used
5866 Email Date Field DFU

5866 5 Add Date Field
This SP code adds the current date to the date field of an email alert that informs
the operator that an error has occurred.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Date not added
1: Date added
5866 100 Log Format
This SP sets the output level for the MIRS module (Machine Information Report
Service).
5870 Common Key Info Writing

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
5870 1 Writing Note: These SPs are for future use and currently are not used.
5870 3 Initialize
5-64
5871 HDD Function Disable DFU

Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD.
After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the
setting.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Note: This SP is intended for use during installation of the Data Overwrite Security
Unit B735 (a new option). For more, see section “1. Installation”.
5873 SD Card Appli Move

Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, please refer to
the "Printer/Scanner Option Manual (Machine: D315)..
5873 1 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
5873 2 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
5875 SC Auto Reboot

This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error
occurs.
Note: The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.
5875 1 Reboot Setting The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an
SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again,
the machine does not reboot.
5875 2 Reboot Type The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
Service
Tables
5878 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security (DOS) Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier. For
more, see "1.18 Data Overwrite Security (B735)" in Section "1. Installation".
5886 ROM Update

The setting of this SP allows or prohibits updating the ROM.
*0:YES, 1:NO
5907 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name

Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names
should be registered again.
After selecting, press the “Original Type” key and “#” key at the same time. When
the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913 Switchover Permission Time

5913 2 Print Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not
operating because a key has not been pressed.
[3~30/1 s]
5-65
5913 102 Print Application Set

This SP prescribes the time interval to expire before the machine shifts to another
application when another application currently holds access control for the
standby mode while there is no key input.
[0~1/1/1]
5915 Mechanical Counter Detection 0: Not detected, 1: Detected, 2: Unknown

Confirms that the mechanical counter inside the inner cover is connected.
5923* Border Removal Area Switching [0~1 / 0 / 1]

Toggles between two settings that affect the appearance of the pages for border
removal and printed facing pages: (1) Using the original area as the allotted area, or
(2) Using only the copy paper as the allotted area.
0: Original
1: Paper
5958* Feed Clutch Start Timing Adjustment, DFU

Adjusts the clutch timing to optimize the intervals between fed sheets to reduce
jams in the feed unit.
59581* Start Timing: Tray 1, 2 [35 ~ 57.5 / 42.5 / 2.5mm] DFU
59582* Start Timing: Tray 3, 4, LCT 35 ~ 57.5 / 42.5 / 2.5mm] DFU
59583* Leading Edge Detection [19~34 / 26.5 /2.5 mm] DFU
5959* 1st Print Delay Timing [0~60 / 0 / 1 s]

Sets the amount of time the machine waits to project the latent image onto the
drum after the feed/development motor, main motor, and fusing/feed-out motor
switch on.
This setting allows the drum and hot roller to turn freely in order to allow more time
for cleaning toner and carbon that has accumulated on the hot roller strippers.
Changing this can improve image quality but can also slow down the first print
time. Adjust only when necessary.
5961* Large Capacity Exit Mode 0: OFF, 1: ON

Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-
Tray finisher is installed.
5962* 8K 16K Paper Mode 0: Off, 1: On.

Switches on/off the use of 8-kai, and 16-kai paper sizes.
If ‘Off’, 8-kai, 16-kai paper sizes are not displayed after pressing the selection key.
If ‘On’, 8-kai, 16-kai paper sizes displayed after pressing the selection key. For this
setting to take effect, “2” must be selected for SP5131.
With “2” (Europe) selected for SP5131, the ADF can select 16-kai LEF. With
SP5962 set for “0” (Off), the nearest size is detected as shown below.
Size Loaded 16-kai SEF 6-kai LEF 8-kai SEF
Size Detected B5 SEF B5 LEF B4 LEF
5963 Power Consumption Reduction Mode DFU
5-66
5967* Copy Server Set Function 0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
5970* Debug Serial Output DFU

Determines whether the debug information is output by the serial port when the
machine is powered on.
[0~1 / 0 / 1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5974 Cherry Server

Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, “Light” or “Full
(Professional)”, is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
5985 Device Setting

The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP
to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions
built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
Service
5985 1 On Board NIC 0: Disable 1: Enable
Tables
5985 2 On Board USB
5990 SP Print Mode (SMC Printout)

5990 1 All (Data List) Prints all of the system parameter lists for the item
5990 2 SP (Mode Data List) selected. ( 5.2.7) Input the number for the item that
5990 3 User Program you want to print, and then press : “Execute” on the
5990 4 Logging Data touch panel.
5990 5 Diagnostic Report
5990 6 Non-Default
5990 7 NIB Summary
5990 8 Capture Log
5990 21 Copier User Program
5990 22 Scanner SP
5990 23 Scanner User Program
5-67
SP6-xxx: Peripherals
6006* ADF Registration Adjust
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading edge registration for simplex and duplex
original feeding in ARDF mode. Press to toggle ±.
SP6006 5 sets the maximum setting allowed for rear edge erase.
6006 1* Side-to-side [–3 ~ +3 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
6006 2* Leading Edge (Thin Original) [–30 ~ +30 / 0.0 / 0.17 mm step]
6006 3* Leading Edge (Duplex Front) [–42 ~ +42 / 0.0 / 0.12 mm step]
6006 4* Leading Edge (Duplex Rear) [–42 ~ +42 / 0.0 / 0.12 mm step]
6006 5* Rear Edge Erase [–20 ~ +20 / –3.0 / 0.5 mm step]
6007 ADF Input Check

6007 1 Group 1 Displays the signals received from sensors and
6007 2 Group 2 switches of the ARDF.( 5.2.5)
6007 3 Group 3
6008 ADF Output Check

Switches on each electrical component (ARDF motor, solenoid, etc.) of the ARDF
for testing. ( 5.2.6)
6009 ADF Free Run

Performs a free run with the ARDF for duplex and stamp testing. Input the number
for the item you want to check, and then press to start.
This is a general free run controlled from the copier. For more detailed free run
modes, see the ARDF manual.
6009 1 Duplex Mode OFF/ON
6009 2 Stamp Mode OFF/ON
6010* ADF Stamp Position Adjustment [–7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps]

Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
6016* Original Size Decision Priority Japan

Bit 0 1
7 DLT SEF 11"x15"
North America
Bit 0 1
6 DLT SEF 11" x 15"
5 LT LEF US Exec LEF
4 LT SEF 8"x10" SEF
3 LG SEF F4 SEF
Europe
Bit 0 1
2 DLT SEF 8-K SEF
1 LT SEF 16-K SEF
0 LT LEF 16-K LEF
Determines which original sizes are detected when an original is detected that is
larger than the size assigned to the original size sensor. This provides an alternate
selection for detection, other than that assigned with SP5131.
5-68
6017* Sheet Through Magnification [–50.0 ~ +50.0 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for ADF mode.
Use the key to toggle between + and - before entering the value
6105* Staple Position Adjustment [–3.5~+3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm step]

Adjusts the staple position in the main scan direction when using the two-tray
finisher.
Press to toggle ±. A larger value shifts the staple toward the edge of the paper.
6113* Punch Hole Adjustment

Adjusts the punch hole position.
SP6113 1: 2-hole punches for Japan, North America, Europe, and 4-hole punches
for Northern Europe.
SP6113 2: 3-hole punches for North America, and 4-hole punches for Europe.
Press to toggle ±. A larger value shifts the holes toward the edge of the paper.
6113 1* 2-Holes [–7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps]
6113 2* 3-Holes [–7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps]
6902* Fold Position Adjustment

Allows fine adjustment of the fold position on paper when the Booklet Finisher is
connected and used.
6902 1* A3/DLT [-30~+30 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
6902 2* B4 [-20~+20 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
6902 3* A4/LT [-15~+15 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Service
Tables
5-69
SP7-xxx: Data Log

7001* Main Motor Operation Time Display: 00000000~99999999 min
The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by
counting the main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the
drum to revolve to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of
copies can be used to analyze problems and could be useful for future product
development.
7401* Total SC Counter Displays the total number of service calls that have
occurred. Display range: 0000~9999
7403* SC History
7403 1* Latest Displays the most recent service calls successive
7403 2* Latest 1 groups of 10.
7403 3* Latest 2
7403 4* Latest 3
7403 5* Latest 4
7403 6* Latest 5
7403 7* Latest 6
7403 8* Latest 7
7403 9* Latest 8
7403 10* Latest 9
7502* Total Paper Jam Displays the total number of copy jams.
Counter Display range: 0000~9999
7503* Total Original Jam Displays the total number of original jams.
Counter Display range: 0000~9999
5-70
7504* Paper Jam Counter by Jam Location Display range: 0000~9999

Displays the total number of copy jams by location.
A “Paper Late” error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the
precise time. A “Paper Lag” paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the
sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Error No. Error
1* At Power On
3* Tray 1: On
4* Tray 2: On
5* Tray 3/LCT: ON
6* Tray 4: On
7* External Tray: On
8* Registration: ON
9* External Tray: ON
10* Internal Tray: ON
13* Duplex Exit 2: ON
14* Duplex Exit 3: ON
16* Exit 1: Off
17* ---
18* ---
19* Ent. Duplex 1: Off
23* Exit Duplex: Off
24* ---
25* Finisher Entrance
26* Finisher Proof Tray
27* Finisher Shift Tray
28* Finisher Stapler
Service
Tables
29* Finisher Exit
30* Mailbox Entrance
31* Mailbox Proof Tray
32* Mailbox Relay
33* Mailbox MBX
35* Booklet FIN Entrance
36* Booklet FIN Transport
37* Booklet FIN Early
38* Booklet FIN Staple
39* Booklet FIN Late Saddle Stitch
40* Ent. FIN Off
41* Exit FIN Off
57* LCT Tray
58 Vert. Trans 1: ON
59 Vert. Trans 2: ON
60 Registration: OFF
61 Transport Sensor 4
63 External Tray: OFF
64 ---
66 Duplex Exit 1: OFF
67 ---
68 Relay Sensor 2: OFF
69 Duplex Feed: OFF
73 Exit Duplex: ON
74 1-Bin Tray Sensor: OFF
5-71
7505* Total Original Jam by Location Display range: 0000~9999

Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur when the
original does not activate the sensors.
Note:
• A “Check In” failure occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the
precise time.
• A “Check Out” failure occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer
than the prescribed time and causes a jam.
• The 3rd column in the table below tells you the correct component name used
in the service manual.
Operation Panel Display Service Manual Name
1 At Power On ---
3 Registration Sensor Check In Failure Skew Correction Sensor
4 Nip-in Sensor Check In Failure Interval Sensor
5 Registration Sensor (On Check) ---
6 Relay Sensor (On Check)
7 Inverter Sensor (On Check)
53 Registration Sensor Check Out Failure Skew Correction Sensor
54 Nip-in Check Out Failure Interval Sensor
55 Registration Sensor (Off Check)
56 Relay Sensor (Off Check)
57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check)
7506* Jam Count by Copy Size

7506 5* A4 LEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
7506 6* A5 LEF
7506 14* B5 LEF
7506 38* LT LEF
7506 44* HLT LEF
7506 132* A3 SEF
7506 133* A4 SEF
7506 134* A5 SEF
7506 141* B4 SEF
7506 142* B5 SEF
7506 160* DLT SEF
7506 164* LG SEF
7506 166* LT SEF
7506 172* HLT SEF
7506 255* Others
5-72
7507* Copy Jam History (Transfer Sheet)

Displays the copy jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with the
most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows:
CODE is the SP7-505-*** number.
SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See “Paper Size Hex Codes” below.)
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003)
DATE is the date the previous jam occurred
7507 1* Latest Sample Display:
7507 2* Latest 1 CODE: 007
7507 3* Latest 2 SIZE: 05h
7507 4* Latest 3 TOTAL: 0000334
7507 5* Latest 4 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
7507 6* Latest 5
7507 7* Latest 6
7507 8* Latest 7
7507 9* Latest 8
7507 10* Latest 9
7508* Original Jam History

Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with
the most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows:
CODE is the SP7-505-*** number.
SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See “Paper Size Hex Codes” below.)
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003)
DATE is the date the previous jam occurred
Service
Tables
75081* Latest Sample Display:
75082* Latest 1 CODE: 007
75083* Latest 2 SIZE: 05h
75084* Latest 3 TOTAL: 0000334
75085* Latest 4 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
75086* Latest 5
75087* Latest 6
75088* Latest 7
75089* Latest 8
750810* Latest 9
Paper Size Hex Codes

These codes are displayed by SP7507 and SP7508.
Paper Size Code (hex) Paper Size Code (hex)
A4 LEF 05 B4 SEF 8D
A5 LEF 06 B5 SEF 8E
B5 LEF 0E DLT SEF A0
LT LEF 26 LG SEF A4
HLT LEF 2C LT SEF A6
A3 SEF 84 HLT SEF AC
A4 SEF 85 Others FF
A5 SEF 86
5-73
7801 ROM No./Firmware Version Displays the ROM number and firmware
version numbers.
7803* PM Counter Display Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
7804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM counter. To reset, press .
7807 SC/Jam Counter Reset Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press .
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7-507, SP7-508.
7826 MF Error Counter Japan Only

Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
7826 1 Error Total A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will
occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
7826 2 Error Staple The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error will
occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
7827 MF Error Counter Clear

Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
7832 Self-Diagnosis Result Display Opens the “Self-Diagnose Result Display”

Execute to open the “Self-Diagnose Result Display” to view details about errors. Use
the keys on in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the information. If no
errors have occurred, you will see the “No Error” notation.
7833 Pixel Coverage Ratio

Displays the coverage ratio of the output (the ratio of the total pixel area of the image
data to the total printable area on the paper). Note that this value is not directly
proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course it is one factor that
affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the type, total image
area and image density of the original, toner concentration and developer potential.
7833 1* Last Pages 0% to 100%.
7833 2* Average Pages 0% to 100%.
7833 3* Toner Bottles In Use 0 to 65,535 copies
7833 4* Copy Count: Previous Toner Bottle 0 to 999,999 copies
7833 5* Copy Count: Toner Bottle Before Previous 0 to 999,999 copies
7834 Clear Pixel Coverage Data

These SPs clear the counters for the following items.
7834 1 Last & Average
7834 2 Toner Bottles
7834 3 Page Count: Bottle
7834 4 Dot Coverage Clear
7834 255 All Coverage Counts
5-74
7836 Total Memory Size

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7852* ADF Exposure Glass

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the
scanning glass of the ADF.
7852 1* Dust Check Counter Counts the occurrences. Counting is done only if
SP4999 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is
switched on.
7852 2* Dust Check Clear Counter Clears the count. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets
this counter to zero.
7901* Assert Info. DFU

These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC
code generated by the machine.
7991 1* Source File Name Module name
7991 2* Line Number Number of lines
7991 3* Result Value
Service
Tables
5-75
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211~SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401~SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691~SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an ‘application’). Before reading
the Group 8Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
PREFIXES WHAT IT MEANS

T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
F: Fax application. application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.
(document server) The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the
document server. Each counter will be discussed
case by case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web
(external network Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
applications, for (Software Development Kit) will also be counted
example) with this group in the future.
5-76
The Group 8SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of
displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS
/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application
> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Service
Full Bleed No Margins
Tables
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor
machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS” is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on
the network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
5-77
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS

PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2
only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8counters
are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK
NOTE: All of the Group 8SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the
Counter Reset SP7 808.
5-78
8001 T:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each
8002 C:Total Jobs application is used to do a job.
8003 F:Total Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8004 P:Total Jobs Note: The L: counter is the total number of times
8005 S:Total Jobs the other applications are used to send a job to
the document server, plus the number of times a
8006 L:Total Jobs
file already on the document server is used.
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is
specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
Service
Tables
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
5-79
8011 T:Jobs/LS These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
8012 C:Jobs/LS document server by each application, to reveal
8013 F:Jobs/LS how local storage is being used for input.
8014 P:Jobs/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8015 S:Jobs/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
from within the document server mode screen at
8016 L:Jobs/LS
the operation panel.
8017 O:Jobs/LS
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS These SPs reveal how files printed from the
8022 C:Pjob/LS document server were stored on the document
8023 F:Pjob/LS server originally.
8024 P:Pjob/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8025 S:Pjob/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
8026 L:Pjob/LS
8027 O:Pjob/LS
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
5-80
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl These SPs reveal what applications were used to

8032 C:Pjob/DesApl output documents from the document server.
8033 F:Pjob/DesApl [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl from within the document server mode screen at
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041 T:TX Jobs/LS These SPs count the applications that stored files
8042 C:TX Jobs/LS on the document server that were later accessed
8043 F:TX Jobs/LS for transmission over the telephone line or over a
8044 P:TX Jobs/LS network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image
by I-Fax).
8045 S:TX Jobs/LS
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8046 L:TX Jobs/LS
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned
Service
Tables
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl These SPs count the applications used to send
8052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl files from the document server over the
8053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl telephone line or over a network (attached to
8054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
8055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
5-81
8061 T:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8062 C:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8063 F:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
8064 P:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8065 S:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8066 L:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
8067 O:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application,
over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
806x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set for
Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8066 1)
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
806x 4 Bookle Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
t mode, the Staple counter also increments.
806x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and
set for folding (Z-fold).
806x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print
job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064 6.)
806x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
5-82
8071 T:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the
job, regardless of which application was used.
8072 C:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
8073 F:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
8074 P:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the
8075 S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the
8076 L:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages
in the job.
8077 O:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
807x 1 1 Page 807x 8 21~50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 807x 9 51~100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 807x 10 101~300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages 807x 11 301~500 Pages
Service
Tables
807x 5 5 Pages 807x 12 501~700 Pages
807x 6 6~10 Pages 807x 13 701~1000 Pages
807x 7 11~20 Pages 807x 14 1001~ Pages
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
5-83
8111 T:FAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8113 F:FAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax
directly on a telephone line.
• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the
job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination
where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (812x)
also increments.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8121 T:IFAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either
directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax.
8123 F:IFAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored
on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.

• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
5-84
8131 T:S-to-Email Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
8135 S:S-to-Email Jobs
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, without
storing the original on the document server.

• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
8141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router
server.
Service
Tables
8145 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a “Color” job.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
5-85
8151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts.
8155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
8161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission
8163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs jobs. A job is counted from when it is registered for
sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
5-86
8191 T:Total Scan PGS These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8192 C:Total Scan PGS application that uses the scanner to scan images.
8193 F:Total Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8195 S:Total Scan PGS
8196 L:Total Scan PGS
• SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of
physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
Service
Tables
5-87
8201 T:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8203 F Lsize Scan Pgs. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8205 S:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SP codes count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not
counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display..
8211 T:Scan PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the
8212 C:Scan PGS/LS document server .
8213 F:Scan PGS/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8215 S:Scan PGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
8216 L:Scan PGS/LS within the document server mode screen at the operation
panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen
• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
5-88
8221 ADF Org Feeds [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back
side scanning.
8221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side
count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or
duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side
scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads
face up.)
8221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count
is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
Service
Tables
8231 Scan PGS/Mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
8231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in
the ADF at one time.
8231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
8231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operation
panel.
8231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
8231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original
directly on the platen.
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
5-89
8241 T:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs,
regardless of which application was used.
8242 C:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
8243 F:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8245 S:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
8246 L:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8241 8242 8243 8245 8246
824x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
824x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
824x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
824x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
824x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
5-90
8251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt These SPs show how many times Image Edit features
8252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt have been selected at the operation panel for each
8254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt application. Some examples of these editing features
8256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt are:
8257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt • Erase> Border
• Erase> Center
• Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed breakdown of
exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how
the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
Service
8291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp These SPs count the number of pages stamped
Tables
8293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
the operation panel, and with the Store File button
from within the Copy mode screen
5-91
8301 T:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing)
page size [SP 8-441].
8302 C:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
8303 F:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].
8305 S:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP 8-445].
8306 L:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
830x 1 A3
830x 2 A4
830x 3 A5
830x 4 B4
830x 5 B5
830x 6 DLT
830x 7 LG
830x 8 LT
830x 9 HLT
830x 10 Full Bleed
830x 254 Other (Standard)
830x 255 Other (Custom)
5-92
8311 T:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
8315 S:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts.
831x 1 1200dpi ~
831x 2 600dpi~1199dpi
831x 3 400dpi~599dpi
831x 4 200dpi~399dpi
831x 5 ~199dpi
• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
8381 T:Total PrtPGS These SPs count the number of pages printed by the
8382 C:Total PrtPGS customer. The counter for the application used for
8383 F:Total PrtPGS storing the pages increments.
8384 P:Total PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8385 S:Total PrtPGS The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
from within the document server mode screen at the
8386 L:Total PrtPGS
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
8387 O:Total PrtPGS
Service
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
Tables
counter.
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
• Reports printed to confirm counts.
• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
• Test prints for machine image adjustment.
• Error notification reports.
• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
5-93
8391 LSize PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages printed from the
8402 C:PrtPGS/LS document server. The counter for the application used to
8403 F:PrtPGS/LS print the pages is incremented.
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
8411 Prints/Duplex This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted

as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last pages printed
only on one side are not counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-94
8421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
8423 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
8424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at
8427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
842x 2 Duplex> Duplex
842x 3 Book> Duplex
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
Service
Tables
842x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
842x 9 8> 8pages on 1 side (8-Up)
842x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
• These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need
to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Original
Count Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
5-95
8431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
regardless of which application was used.
8432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below
with the copy application.
8434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
with the print application.
8436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
8437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
with Other applications.
843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count
for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
843x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
843x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were applied,
including page numbering and date stamping.
5-96
8441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
8443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
8444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
8445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
8446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
Service
Tables
844x 6 DLT
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
5-97
8451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
8461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
8462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
8463 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
8464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other
5-98
8471 PrtPGS/Mag [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8471 1 ~49%
8471 2 50%~99%
8471 3 100%
8471 4 101%~200%
8471 5 201% ~
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
Service
Tables
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-99
8511 T:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8514 P:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
8514 1 RPCS
8514 2 RPDL
8514 3 PS3
8514 4 R98
8514 5 R16
8514 6 GL/GL2
8514 7 R55
8514 8 RTIFF
8514 9 PDF
8514 10 PCL5e/5c
8514 11 PCL XL
8514 12 IPDL-C
8514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8514 14 Other
• SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
5-100
8521 T:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
8522 C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
8523 F:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
application.
Note:
• Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
8524 P:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print application.
8525 S:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
8526 L:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
852x 1 Sort
852x 2 Stack
852x 3 Staple
852x 4 Booklet
852x 5 Z-Fold
852x 6 Punch
Service
Tables
852x 7 Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8531 Staples This SP counts the amount of staples used by

the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8581 T:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
5-101
8591 O:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8591 1 A3/DLT
8591 2 Duplex
8591 3 Staple
8631 T:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone
number.
8633 F:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone
number.
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8631 and SP8633 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
5-102
8641 T:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8643 F:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images
using I-Fax.
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
Service
Tables
5-103
8651 T:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail
for both the Scan and document server applications.
8655 S:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail
for the Scan application only.
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
8661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8665 S:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
5-104
8671 T:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a
PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8675 S:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC
with the Scan application.
8681 T:PCFAX These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax. These
TXPGS SPs are provided for the Fax application only, so the counts for
8683 F:PCFAX SP8681 and SP8683 are the same.
TXPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8691 T:TX PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document
8692 C:TX PGS/LS server. The counter for the application that was used to store
Service
the pages is incremented.
Tables
8693 F:TX PGS/LS
8694 P:TX PGS/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8695 S:TX PGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8696 L:TX PGS/LS
Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8701 TX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8701 1 PSTN-1
8701 2 PSTN-2
8701 3 PSTN-3
8701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8701 5 Network
5-105
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1]

These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats listed below.
8 711 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 711 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8 711 3 PDF
8 711 4 Other
8715 S:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1]

These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan
application, counted by the formats listed below.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8741 RX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8741 1 PSTN-1
8741 2 PSTN-2
8741 3 PSTN-3
8741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8741 5 Network
8771 Dev Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development
rollers) for black and other color toners.
Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the same
as the Total count.
8781 Pixel Coverage Ratio

This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based
on the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
8791 LS Memory Remain This SP displays the percent of space available

on the document server for storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
8801 Toner Remain [0~100/ 0 / 1]

This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows
the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note:
• This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is
better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
• This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine,
the count is done for black only.
5-106
8831 Pixel Cover Ave. Average Pixel Coverage

8831 1 Accum. Ave. K
8831 2 Accum. Ave. M Do not display for this machine.
8831 3 Accum. Ave. C
8831 4 Accum. Ave. Y
8841 Pixel Cover Last Average Pixel Coverage

001 Last Page K
002 Last Page M Do not display for this machine.
003 Last Page C
004 Last Page Y
8851 Toner Coverage 0-10% [0~9999999]

These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners.
8851 1 K Black toner
8851 2 M Magenta toner Do not display for this machine.
8851 3 C Cyan toner
8851 4 Y Yellow toner
8861 Toner Coverage 11-20% [0~9999999]

8861 3 C Cyan toner
Service
Tables
8871 Toner Coverage 21-30% [0~9999999]
8871 3 C Cyan toner
8881 Toner Coverage 31 -% [0~9999999]

8881 3 C Cyan toner
8901 Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Previous) DFU

8911 Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Before Previous) DFU
5-107
8941 Machine Status [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
8941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
8941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
8941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
8941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing background
printing.
8941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing background
printing. Does not include time machine remains
powered off with the power switches.
8941 6 SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8941 7 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8941 8 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
8941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total down time due to toner end.
8951 AddBook Register

These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8951 1 User Code User code registrations. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
8951 4 Group Group destination registrations.
8951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations for
relay TX.
8951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
8951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with [0~255 / 0 / 255]
the Program (job settings) feature.
8951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with the
Program (job settings) feature.
8951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
8951 10 Scanner Program Scanner application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
5-108
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING: SP2-902

NOTE: Always print a test pattern to confirm correct operation of the machine.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-902.
2. Press or .
• IPU Test Print
• Test Pattern
3. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See
the tables below.)
4. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes. This selects the
test pattern for printing.
5. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for
the test print (paper size, etc.)
6. Press Start C twice. (Ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start the test
print.
7. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-2: IPU Test Print)

No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
Service
Tables
0 None 8 Grayscale (Horizontal)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 9 Grayscale (Vertical)
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 10 Cross Pattern
3 Vertical Line (2-dot) 11 Cross Shape
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot) 12 Argyle Pattern
5 Alternating Dot Pattern 13 Cross Pattern (256)
6 Grid Pattern (1-dot) 14 Cross Pattern (64)
7 Vertical Strips
5-109
Test Pattern Table: SP2-902-3 Printing Test Patterns

No. Test Pattern
0 None
1 Vertical Line (1-dot)
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot)
3 Vertical Line (2-dot)
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot)
5 Grid Pattern (1-dot)
6 Independent Pattern (1-dot)
7 Independent Pattern (2-dot)
8 Full Dot Pattern
9 Black Band
10 Trimming Area
11 Argyle Pattern
12 Hounds Tooth Check (2-Dot Horizontal)
13 Checker Flag Pattern
14 Black Band (Vertical)
15 Independent Pattern (4-Dot)
16 Horizontal Line (1-Dot) (Reversed LD1, LD2)
17 Grid Pattern (1-dot pair) (Reversed LD1, LD2)
18 Independent Pattern (1-dot) (Reversed LD1, LD2)
19 Grayscale (Horizontal)
20 Grayscale (Vertical)
21 Grayscale (Horizonta/Vertical)
22 Grayscale (Grid)
23 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
24 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
25 Grayscale (Vertical/Horizontal Margin)
26 White Pattern
27 Grid (1-dot pair) (OR Outside Data 1)
5-110
5.2.5 INPUT CHECK

Main Machine Input Check: SP5-803
2. Enter the number (1 – 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
Reading
Number Bit Description
0 1
7 Fusing Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Near End Sensor 2 Activated Deactivated
5 Near End Sensor 1 Activated Deactivated
1: Paper Feed 1 4 Not Used --- ---
(Upper Tray) 3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Activated Deactivated
2 Paper Size Sensor 3 Activated Deactivated
Service
Tables
7 Duplex Unit Set Sensor Unit set Unit not set
6 Near End Sensor 2 Off On
5 Near End Sensor 1 Off On
2: Paper Feed 2 4 Fusing/Paper Output Motor Lock Not Locked Locked
(Lower Tray) 3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Activated Deactivated
7 Zero Cross Signal Detected Not detected
6 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not present Present
5 Exhaust Fan Lock Signal Not locked Locked
3: Registration 4 Cooling Fan Lock Signal Not locked Locked
and Others 3 Main Motor Lock Signal Not locked Locked
2 Toner Overflow Sensor Tank not full Tank full
1 Cover Open Cover closed Cover opened
0 Registration Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5-111
Reading
0 1
7 Duplex reverse path door Closed Open
6 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5 Not used
4: By-pass 4 Paper Size Sensor 4, By-pass Activated Deactivated
Feed 3 Paper Size Sensor 3, By-pass Activated Deactivated
2 Paper Size Sensor 2, By-pass Activated Deactivated
1 Paper Size Sensor 1, By-pass Activated Deactivated
0 Unit Set Signal Yes No
7 Not used Yes No
6 Unit Set Signal Connected Not connected
5 Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
4 Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5: Relay Unit 3 Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
(Bridge Unit) 2 Left Cover Switch Switch pressed Switch not pressed
(cover closed)
1 Middle Cover Switch Switch pressed Switch not pressed
(cover closed)
0 Right Cover Switch Switch pressed Switch not pressed
(cover closed)
7 Feed Motor Lock No Yes
6 F-Gate Signal Active Not active
5 Height Sensor Feed height Not feed height
4 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
6: Unit Set
3 Fusing Unit Detected Not detected
2 Total Counter Not detected Detected
1 Key Counter Detected Not detected
0 Key Card Present Detected Not detected
7 Front cover/open closed Open Closed
6 Vertical feed path Clear Not clear
5 2nd Tray Height Sensor Paper not at upper Paper at upper limit
limit
4 1st Tray Height Sensor Paper not at upper Paper at upper limit
7: Paper End
limit
3 Lower Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
2 Upper Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
1 Lower Paper End Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
0 Upper Paper End Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5-112
Reading
0 1
7 Dip Switch - 8 On Off
8: DIP 4 Dip Switch - 5 On Off
Switches 3 Dip Switch - 4 On Off
7 Not used
6 Right cover open/closed Closed Open
5 1-Bin Unit Set Detected Not detected
4 LD, HP sensor Positioned Not positioned
9: Duplex Unit
3 Exit Sensor (Jam) Paper detected Paper not detected
2 Entrance Sensor (Jam) Paper detected Paper not detected
1 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
0 Duplex Unit Switch Cover closed Cover open
7 Tray 4: Bit 1
8 Tray 4: Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Capacity
5 Tray 3: Bit 1 1 1 Full
10:
4 Tray 3: Bit 0 1 0 50% or more
Remainder of
Feed Tray 1 3 Tray 2: Bit 1 0 1 10% or more
2 Tray 2: Bit 0 0 0 Out, or tray not set
1 Tray 1: Bit 1
Service
Tables
0 Tray 1: Bit 0
7 By-pass Yes/No
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
11:
4 Not Used
Remainder of
Feed Tray 2 3 Not Used Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Capacity
2 LCT: Bit 2 1 1 1 Full
1 LCT: Bit 1 1 0 0 80% or more
0 LCT: Bit 0 0 1 1 50% or more
0 1 0 30% or more
0 0 0 10% or more
5-113
Reading
0 1
7 Mailbox 9-bin Not full or no tray Full
5 Not used - -
12: Full Exit 4 Finisher: Shift Tray 1 Not full or no tray Full
Tray 1 3 Finisher: Shift Tray 2 Not full or no tray Full
2 Not used - -
1 1-Bin Exit Not full or no tray Full
0 Machine Exit Not full or no tray Full
13: Full Exit 4 Mailbox 4-bin Not full or no tray Full
Tray 2 3 Mailbox 3-bin Not full or no tray Full
0 Mailbox Proof Tray Not full or no tray Full
Table 1: By-pass Feed Table Paper Size Data

Number. Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Paper Width
1 1 1 1 Post Card
1 1 1 0 B6 SEF
1 1 0 1 B5 SEF
1 1 0 0 A5 SEF / 5.5"
4: By-pass
1 0 1 1 B4 SEF
1 0 0 1 A4 SEF / 8.5" / 8"
0 1 1 1 A3 SEF
0 0 1 1 11" x 17"
5-114
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007

2. Enter the number (1 – 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
Reading
Group Bit No. Description
0 1
7 Original width sensor 4 Paper not detected Paper detected
1
3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Original B5 sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
0 Original LG sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original stopper
down
Service
Tables
6 Pick-up HP sensor Cover closed Cover opened
5 Top cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened
2 4 Lift sensor Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller down
3 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
0 Interval Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
3 0 Original A4 sensor
5-115
5.2.6 OUTPUT CHECK

NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check: SP5-804

1. Open SP mode 5-804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
B195S901.WMF
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched on for a long time.
5-116
SP5-804 Output Check Table

No. Description No. Description
1 1st Paper Feed CL 45 Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
2 2nd Paper Feed CL
3 3rd Paper Feed CL (PTU) 47 Relay Junction Gate Solenoid
4 4th Paper Feed CL (PTU)
5 By-pass Paper Feed CL 50 Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6 LCT Paper Feed CL 51 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
52 Positioning Roller Solenoid (Finishers)
13 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
14 LCT Pick-up Solenoid 56 Toner Bottle Motor
57 Transfer Belt Positioning Clutch
17 Transport Motor 1 (Finisher)
18 Transport Motor 2 (Finisher) 62 Quenching Lamp
19 Exit Motor (Finisher) 63 Charge Bias
20 Staple Motor (Finisher)
21 Punch Motor (Finisher) 67 Development Bias
25 LCT Motor 69 Transfer Belt Voltage

26 Bank Motor (Paper Tray Unit) 70 ID Sensor LED
27 Fusing Exit Motor
28 Main Motor 75 Exhaust Fan Motor
29 Duplex Transport Motor 76 Elec. Equipment Cooling Fan Motor
30 Duplex Inverter Motor (Rev.)
31 Duplex Inverter Motor (Fwd.) 78 Relay Fan Motor
Service
32 Feed/Development Motor 79 Fusing Fan Motor
Tables
85 Total Counter
35 Bank Relay Clutch (Paper
Tray Unit)
36 Relay Clutch
38 LCT Relay Clutch 92 Shift Tray Lift Motor (Finisher)

39 Registration Clutch 93 Jogger Motor (Finisher)
40 Development Clutch 94 Stapler Positioning Motor
41 Exit Junction Gate Solenoid 95 Stack Feed Out Motor (Finisher)
(Upper Unit)
42 Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid 96 Shift Motor (Finishers)
(Lower Unit)
97 Stapler Rotation Motor (Two-Tray Finisher)
5-117
ARDF Output Check: SP6-008)

1. Open SP mode SP6-008.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
No. Description
1 Feed Motor (Forward)
2 Feed Motor (Reverse)
3 Drive Motor (Forward)
4 Inverter Motor (Forward)
5 Inverter Motor (Reverse)
6 Feed Clutch
7 Inverter Solenoid
8 Pick-up Motor (Forward)
9 Pick-up Motor (Reverse)
5.2.7 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS: SP5-990
1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you
wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists)
1 All Data List
2 SP Mode Data List
3 UP Mode Data List
4 Logging Data List
5 Self-Diagnostics Results List
6 Non-Default
7 NIB Summary
8 NetFile Log
21 Copy UP Mode List
22 Scanner SP Mode List
23 Scanner UP Mode List
2. Press “Execute” on the touch panel.

3. Select “Single Face” or “Both Face”.
4. After printing the list, press “Close” to return to the SP mode display.
5. Press Exit twice to close the SP Mode screen and return to copy mode.
5-118
5.2.8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT: SP1-109

When paper wrinkling or image offset occurs, the pressure from the pressure roller
OHP
Paper feed direction [A]
B195S902.WMF
can be adjusted by changing the position of the pressure springs. At this time, the
nip bandwidth can also be checked with SP1-109.
1. Execute SP5-802 to perform a free run of about 50 sheets.
2. Open SP1-109-1, press , and then press Yes to confirm the selection.
3. Press Copy Window to return to the copy window.
4. Place an OHP sheet (A4/8.5" x 11" sideways) on the by-pass feed tray.
5. Press Start C twice. The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for about 10
seconds, then it exits automatically.
Service
Tables
6. Check the nip bandwidth [A]. The relationship between the position of the
pressure spring and the bandwidth is as follows.
NOTE: Check the nip bandwidth around the center of the OHP.
Pressure spring position Nip width
Upper (default position) 6.0 ± 0.5 mm
Lower 6.5 ± 0.6 mm
If the width is out of the above specification, the pressure spring should be
replaced.
5-119
5.2.9 MEMORY CLEAR: SP5-801

Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP7-003-1: Electrical total counter value
SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.

2. Open SP mode 5-801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules or select the appropriate number from the table below.
5801 Memory Clear Comments
5801 1 All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below. *1
5801 2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine
and processing settings. *1
5801 3 SCS Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information. *1
5801 4 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the registration setting for the image
memory handler by deleting all image files on
the HDD.
5801 5 MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
5801 6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
5801 7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all
TX/RX settings, local storage file numbers, and
off-hook timer.
5801 8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs
registered, the printer SP Bit SW, and printer
CSS counter.
5801 9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner
and all the Scanner SP modes.
5801 10 Web Deletes the NFA management files and
Service/Network thumbnails, and initializes the JOB login ID.
Application
5801 11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface
settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, WebStatusMonitor
settings, and the TELNET settings.
5801 12 R-FAX Initializes the Job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, Job History, and local storage file
numbers.
5801 13 Clear DCS Settings Initialization
5801 14 Clear UCS Settings Initialization
1*
: Resetting 1~3 resets the operation panel screen coordinates, so after executing 1, 2, or 3,
you must re-calibrate the screen.
5-120
4. Press Execute, and then follow the prompts on the display to complete the
procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
• Do the laser beam pitch adjustment (SP2-109).
• Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.21).
• Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.21.4).
• Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been
changed from their factory settings.
• Do SP 3-001-2 (ID Sensor Initial Setting).
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
Service
Tables
5-121
5.2.10 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up. Use the following
procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine
beeps once release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed for
a few seconds the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal
operation.
5.2.11 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.

2. Hold down and then press System Settings.
NOTE: You must press first.
B195S903.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
5-122
Copier Setting Reset

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.

2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press first.
B195S904.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
Service
Tables
5-123
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 22 September 2006
5.3 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
1. Turn off the main power switch.

2. Remove the SD card [A] cover. [A]
3. Insert the SD card [B] containing the software
you wish to download into SD card slot C3.
4. Turn on the main power.
5. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD
panel
6. Monitor the downloading status on the
operation panel. [B]
• While downloading is in progress, the LCD
will display “Writing”. When downloading has B195S913.WMF
been completed, the panel will display “OK”.

• For operation panel software, the Start key lights red while downloading is
in progress, and then lights green again after downloading is completed.
CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the
new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
7. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and
remove the SD card.
8. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7.
9. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally.
5-124
22 September 2006 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
5.4 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
5.4.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824)
1. Turn off the main switch. [A]

2. Remove the SD card cover [A].
3. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card slot C3.
5. Execute SP5-824.
6. Press to start uploading the NVRAM data.
[B]
B195S905.WMF
Service
Tables
5-125
UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA 22 September 2006
5.4.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825)

The following data are not downloaded from the SD card:
• Total count categories (SP7-003-*** Copy Counter)
• C/O, P/O Counter (SP7-006-*** C/O, P/O Count Display)
• Dupelx, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning
counters (system settings).
1. Turn off the main switch. [A]

2. Remove the SD card cover [A].
3. Plug the SD card [B] into SD card slot C3..
5. Execute SP5-825.
6. Press to start downloading the NVRAM data.
Note that the following errors could occur during

[B]
downloading:
• If a card is not installed in the card slot and a B195S906.WMF
message tells you that downloading cannot proceed, you cannot execute
downloading, even by pressing .
• If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you
press a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the
card is abnormal and the execution will halt.
5-126
22 September 2006 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5.5 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

5.5.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial
settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-
diagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart
shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC code is
displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction
or abnormal condition.
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow
Power On
Initialization
Memory Check for

Self-Diagnostic Test
Self-Diagnostic
Mode Selection
CPU Check
Service
Tables
ASIC Check Font ROM Check
Memory Check RTC Check
Program ROM, IC Card

DIMM CRC Check I/FCheck
SSCG Check Network Check
OPC Check Engine I/F Check
Illegal Interrupt
NVRAM Check Check
System OS,
HDD Check Application Check
IEEE1284
I/F Check
B195S914.WMF
5-127
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 22 September 2006
5.5.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually
in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-
diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No. Name
G02119350 Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down , press and hold down , and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine.
You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel, and then you will see the
results of the test.
5-128
22 September 2006 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
A report like the one below is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test
is executed, whether errors were detected or not.
MODEL NAME XXXX

Serial No. : ACLD000034 Firmware P/# : ACP82XXXX [1/1]
Self-Diagnosis Report Firmware Version : 2.49.01 Wed Nov 22 13:15:30 2000
[System Construction]
Kernel Version : NetBSD 1.3.3 (SHINYOKOHAMA_ROM) #0: Sat Nov 11 16:15:35 JST 2000
CPU System Bus Clock : 100.0 MHz CPU Pipeline Clock : 200.0 MHz
Board Type :7 ASIC Version : 1397306160
RTC Existence : existence RAM Capacity : 100.663296 MB
HDD Existence : existence HDD Model :
[Total Counter ]
0001000
[Program No. @]
MAIN : ACP82XXXX ENGINE : Ver1.96
LCDC : V1.39 PI :
ADF : B3515620B SIB : B0045383
FIN : FIN_SDL :
BANK : A6825150 LCT :
MBX : FCU :
DPX :
[Error List @@@]

SCCODE (ERROR CODE ) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE)
SC835 (110C) SC820 (0001) SC820 (0002) SC820 (0003)

SC820 (0004) SC820 (0005)
Service
Tables
B195S907.WMF
5-129
USER PROGRAM MODE 22 September 2006
5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE

The user program (UP) mode is accessed by users and operators, and by sales
and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copier’s default settings. The
default settings can be reset at any time by the user. ( 5.2.11)
5.6.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE

UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display
To enter the UP mode, press User Tools/Counter .
B195S908.WMF
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, press System Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the User
Tools/Counter display, and then press exit to return to the copy window.
B195S909.WMF
5-130
22 September 2006 USER PROGRAM MODE
Copier/Document Server Features

In the User/Tools Counter display, press Copy/Document Server Settings.
B195S910.WMF
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the User
Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings

In the User/Tools Counter display, press Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner
Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more
settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen.
Service
Tables
B195S911.WMF
5-131
USER PROGRAM MODE 22 September 2006
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Counter.
B195S912.WMF
View the settings, press Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter
display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
5-132
22 September 2006 DIP SWITCHES
5.7 DIP SWITCHES

Controller: DIP SW1
DIP SW No. ON OFF

1 ROM Boot SD Card Boot
2~7 Keep at “OFF”
8 Keep at "ON"
I/O Board: DIP SW101
DIP SW No. Function ON OFF

1 Copy Speed 35 cpm (180 mm/s) 45 cpm (230 mm/s)
2 Jam Detection Jam Detection Off On
(see Note)
3 --- --- Keep at "OFF".
4 Print Output for --- Keep at "OFF".
Debugging
5 SC Detection SC Detection Off SC Detection On
JPN NA EUR Taiwan Asia Korea
6 Destination OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
Service
Tables
NOTE: Disabling jam detection is effective only for the main machine (not for the
options).
5-133
USING THE DEBUG LOG 22 September 2006
5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main
features:
• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure
below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the
HDD. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.
5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved the until the “Save Debug Log” function
has been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode.
• Press S (Clear Modes) then use the 10-key pad to enter .
• Press and hold down # (Clear/Stop) for more than 3 seconds.
• Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel.
• Enter then press .
2. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press .
COPY : SP-5857-001
Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
_1_
Initial 0
3. On the control panel keypad, press “1” then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
5-134
22 September 2006 USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press .
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card)
_2_
Initial 2
NOTE: Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD

card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related SC
1 Engine SC Error
code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-
2 Controller SC Error
related SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
3 Any SC Error
you specify by entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.
Service
Tables
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This example
shows “Engine SC Error” selected.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__OFF__ __ON__
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys, then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Any SC Error
__670
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section “4. Troubleshooting”.
5-135
6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch “5859”.
Under “5859” press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10

KEY NO. COPY PRINTER SCANNER WEB
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848(COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource
Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on

the HDD (the target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you
selected SP5-858and the memory modules selected with SP5-859.
5-136
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
• The initial settings are all zero.
• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the “PRINTER” column only.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
Service
Tables
5-137
5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD
1. Insert the SD card into service slot of the copier.

2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
NOTE: The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger
than 4MB, you can switch to another SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any
other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct
customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously
switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard
disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, pressJ (Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter “01” then hold down \ for at least 3 sec. until
the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for
later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.

The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.
5-138
5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
Service
Tables
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this
operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched
off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to
create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required
to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new
log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857-
017).
5-139
22 September 2006 OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
43 11
42 12
41 13
14
40 15
16
39
17
38 18
19
37 20
21
36
Descriptions
Detailed
23 22
24
25
26
27 B195D901.WMF
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
6-1
OVERVIEW 22 September 2006
1 Exposure Glass 23 By-pass Pick-up Roller

2 2nd Mirror 24 By-pass Paper End Sensor
3 1st Mirror 25 By-pass Paper Feed Roller
4 Exposure Lamp 26 By-pass Separation Roller
5 Original Width Sensors 27 Upper Relay Roller
6 Original Length Sensors 28 Feed Roller
7 Lens 29 Separation Roller
8 SBU 30 Pick-up Roller
9 Scanner Motor 31 Bottom Plate
10 Hot Roller 32 Development Unit
11 Entrance Sensor 33 Charge Roller
12 Inverter Gate 34 Fθ Mirror
13 Inverter Roller 35 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)
14 Pressure Roller 36 Polygonal Mirror Motor
15 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 37 Laser Unit
16 Upper Transport Roller 38 Toner Bottle Holder
17 Transfer Belt 39 Exit Junction Gate
18 OPC Drum 40 Exit Roller
19 Registration Roller 41 Paper Exit Sensor
20 Lower Transport Roller 42 3rd Mirror
21 Duplex Exit Sensor 43 Scanner HP Sensor
22 By-pass Tray
6-2
22 September 2006 OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

9 1
8
3
4
7 5
6 B195D902.WMF
1 ARDF
2 Interchange unit
3 Duplex unit
4 By-pass tray
Descriptions
5 Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Detailed
6 Paper tray unit
7 Two-Tray Finisher
8 Bridge unit
9 1-Bin Tray
6-3
OVERVIEW 22 September 2006
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1 9
PCU Drive
Fusing
2
8
3 6
Transfer 5
4 Development B195D002A.WMF
1 Transfer Belt Contact Clutch 6 Paper Feed/Development Motor

2 Registration Clutch 7 Development Clutch
3 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 8 Main Motor
4 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 9 Fusing/Exit Motor
5 Relay Clutch
In this machine, the development unit is provided with its own motor, separate from
the main motor.
6-4
22 September 2006 BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
RIO3 ・IEEE1284 ・Wireless LAN Circuit

Option×2 ・MLB2 ・Bluetooth
GS
TEL
Relay
RGU
CPU NVRAM Primary Ext. Tel
64 MB Comm. Line
RM7035C LSD
Circuit
DTMF
SPI
Rec,
SD SP
CARD SD FAME
DRV
CARD
SiG4-ASD
ASIC PHY CCUDRV or
PCI
ASIC Shaker MBU SG3-NEO
HDD ATA100 USB2.0 Primary
Trumpet FROM
Backup
CCUIF
SG3-NEO
RAM-DIMM DIMM SRAM Reset EXSRAM
SSTL2
RAM-DIMM Option (Expan.） Option
SM Bus SAF FACE3
BACK
RTC SEEP SSCG UP FCUI/F
ROM(1kbit) Controller GWFCU3
　　　　　　　　PCI(RAPI)
MB +5V
UART NRS
UART
+5VE MK1I/F
SDRAM F-ROM
ICIB
8MB 2MB
SIB
Sync．SCI CDICA BICU
OPU
VLCDC LDB
I2C GAVD PMACA LD
Type-R PMACA LD
CCD LVDS LVDC
LM98513 LVDS RI1001A
4.7μm Driver Reciver EEPROM
Polygon
motor
DAC P/H DC-DC
eSOC I 2C SRAM FROM +5VE
1
AC-DC
+5V
H8/ (m66485) 256kB 2MB
+24V
GASBUP +12V
DC-DC
SBU 3297 -12V 2
Dulex
Unit Feed
UART Motor Fuser AC
UART LD Main Fuser Unit Drive
ADF Rotate Motor Motor PSU
AKS DC-DC
Conv. Bypath
Exposure Tray
Inverter
Lamp UART
eIO eIO Driver LCT
5V　　　12V IOB UART
BANK
MDB
Scan. Sync.SCI UART
Driver Sensor
Motor P.P. 1bin Finisher
Acyuator Tray
Descriptions
B408 B545 B546
Detailed
B195D920.WMF
This machine uses the GW (Grand Workware) architecture, which allows the copier
to be expanded as an MFP by installing simple modular components (SD cards) on
the controller board. The BICU and FCU are connected to the controller via a PCI
bus.
6-5
BOARD STRUCTURE 22 September 2006
SBCU (Scanner and Base engine and Image Control Unit). This is the engine
control board. It controls the following functions.
• Engine sequence
• Timing control for peripherals
• Image processing, video control
• Scanner Motor
Controller. The GW Controller (05S) controls memory and all peripheral devices.
The NCU (Network Control Unit) and USB 2.0 are built into this control board.
FCU (Facsimile Control Unit). This option controls fax communications and fax
features.
ICIB (Copy Data Security Unit). This option provides copy protection of sensitive
documents. Once a document is copied or printed with an RCPS or other printer
driver that supports this function, the hard copy cannot be copied on a copier that
supports hard copy protection.
IOB (Input/Output Board). The IOB uses the new eI0 chips and handles the
following functions.
• Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the main unit
• PWM control for the high voltage supply board
• Serial interface with peripherals
• Fusing control
• Paper feed control
The IOB is located behind the rear covers for easy access. The same IOB is used
for both the B291/B296 and B295/B297 but the DIP switches must be set correctly
for each model. ( 3.19.2)
LDB (Laser Drive Board). Holds the laser diodes. The board and diodes are
controlled by the GAVD Type-R mounted on the BICU not the LDB itself.
MB (Mother Board). Interfaces the BICU with controller and the optional FCU.
OPU (Operation Panel Unit). Controls operation panel and display.
PSU (Power Supply Unit). The improved PSU on this machine consumes less
than 1 W when the machine is in the energy save (low power) mode.
SBU (Sensor Board Unit). Receives analog signals from the CCD (now encased
in plastic, not ceramic) and converts them into digital signals.
SIB (Scanner Interface Board). Controls the scanner, and serves as the signal I/F
board for the SBU and the OPU. The SIB passes signals between the BICU and
the scanner unit components, and transmits video signals from the SBU to the
BICU.
6-6
6.2.2 CONTROLLER
PONCTL Ctrl Normally ＯＮ
1.3VE P 1.8VE Engine Energy
Saver OFF
CPU
1.5VE P
3.3VE
(RM7035C-466) SSCG
2.5VE P ICS960009
3.3VE P 5VE 5V
CPU I/F
Extension Connector
LVC244
HDD1
CTL HDD(1) CTL HDD(1)
LVC245
DATA HDD(1) DATA HDD(1)
ATA100
SSTL_2 I/F DDR SDRAM

SO-DIMM (PC2100)
ASIC
SD
SD
SD I/F
Trumpet
Bootable SD
LV07
DEBUG(0) I/F DEBUG(0) I/F

DEBUG
DEBUG(1) I/F DEBUG(1) I/F
I2C(GIO)
PCI BUS (Rapi64)
SDCL Option Board Slot 1

VHCT VHCT
244 244
K
PEACE CSS
CSS I/F CSS I/F Option Board Slot 2

(RIO3)
(Ri03)
PEACE I/F PEACE I/F
ENGINE I/F
Selectable
SD
SD
PCI66 BUS (32bit) / LOCAL BUS
SD(A) I/F
SD
ALVC244
ALVC245
SD
External SD I/F (PortB) RCS0

RCS1
LVC244
PCI I/F (PCIAD 16:1) LAL(8:1)

LV07
Energy Save Ctrl Energy Save Ctrl
LAL(16:9) FLASH
LVC244
WUP/RDY
ASIC
ASIC PCI I/F (PCIAD 16:1) 16MB
LVC374
LAH(24:7)
Shaker
Bassoon
VHCT244
PANEL I/F PANEL I/F AHLE

LVC245 LVC244
LVC125
PCI I/F (PCICMD 3:0) OE/WE

BUFDIR
USB
USB2.0 I/F PCI I/F (PCIAD 15:0) LD(15:0)
LD(8:0)
TCLK
PHY
NVRAM
NIC
100Base MII I/F

(Std)
OSC
Descriptions
25MHz
Detailed
RTC I2C
SECURE ROM×2
IC
Card
EEPROM
I/F
NVRAM SPI1
32kB× 2 SPI2
SDCLK
USBCLK
TIO I/F XTL

30MHz
SSCG
ICS960008
B291D926.WMF
The controller controls all applications, including copier, printer, scanner, and fax
applications. To add the optional printer, scanner, or fax applications, SD cards
must be inserted in the SD card slots of the controller. The fax option, however,
requires installation of an FCU.
6-7
ASCI Trumpet. Contains the dedicated GW controller chips of the shared

resources (the CPU, memory, and HDD hardware) for the copying and printing
functions.
• CPU (RM7035C-466) The central processing unit that controls the operation of
the controller board.
• HDD. The interface for connection of the flat film cable connection to the HDD
unit.
• SD (Bootable C3). Service slot for firmware version updates, moving
applications to other SD cards, and downloading/uploading NVRAM contents.
• DDR SDRAM. The image memory for the printer function where image
compression, image rotation and other operations are done.
ASIC Shaker. Controls the following functions: USB, Ethernet, PCI (optional
boards for Bluetooth, FireWire, Wireless LAN, and Centronics), debug serial, I2C,
applications on SD cards mounted in SD card slots C1 and C2, and the energy
save features.
• SD. This is the interface for SD card slots C1 and C2.
• Board Option Slots 1, 2. Only one of the following options can be installed in
either Slot 1 or Slot 2: IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 (Centronics),
IEEE802.11b G813 (Wireless LAN), or Bluetooth Interface Unit B736. The
following options can also be installed in either slot: File Format Converter B609
(MLB), and Key Browser Unit B720
• Flash ROM. Stores the program. Maximum capacity: 32 MB.
• USB. The interface for USB 2.0 devices. Supports both low-speed and high-
speed modes. USB support is built-into the controller. No installation is required
for the USB function. But, SP5985 001 must be set to "1" to enable the network
functions.
• NIB. The Ethernet interface connection. Network support is built-into the
controller. No installation is required for the network function. But, SP5985 002
must be set to "1" to enable the network functions.
• EEPROM. Stores the data for the SP code settings.
• NVRAM. The memory that stores the system configuration and other information.
6-8
HDD: A 3.5" HDD (more than 20 GB) can be connected using an IDE I/F. The hard
disk is partitioned as shown below.
How the HDD Is Partitioned
Name Power OFF Size (MB) Files Function Comments
a Remains 256 256 Object Area ROM update, etc.
b Remains 256 --- Swap Area Debugging
Copy server, local
storage, print job Document server
d Remains 7900 3000
storage, document application.
storage
Stamps: 100 MB
Management (user
Remains 1000 --- Image Overlays: 900
stamps, etc.)
MB
imh management,
Erased 5370 100 Electronic sorting used for other
applications
SAF = Store and
e Remains 300 2500 SAF Thumbnails
Forward
Stored on HDD even
Font download, form
f Remains 500 6600 after cycling machine
registration
off/on.
Spooling long print
g Remains 500 5000 Job spooling area
jobs
h Remains 2000 1000 LS thumbnails MCS
SDK = Software
i Remains 200 --- SDK Log
Development Kit
j Remains 1000 10000 For SDK SDK
k Remains 200 50 Job Log
l Remains 150 30 Fax, Debug Log SCS, Fax
Address Book (Local,
m Remains 300 256 UCS
Distribution, LADP)
n Remains 200 10 --- DCS
Distribution History 2 MB used
Descriptions
(Application), forDCS/Scanner
Detailed
o Remains 1002 16102 Temporary area for applications.
emails, For email TX
(DCS)
p Remains 500 10100 --- ---
For print jobs using
PDF, PCL, PS, RTIFF.
Temporary storage
q Erased 500 1000 Jobs erased after
area for printer.
machine is cycled
off/on.
This ROM data on the
HDD s used in the
r Remains 30 1~2 ROM update data
rescue or recover
modes.
Total 22.1 GB
6-9
Allotment of Temporary Pages on the HDD

Application Capacity (MB) Pages
Common Area 4415 1000
Copy 400 200
NFA 25 50
Fax 256 1000
Print Collating 100 100
Scanner 100 50
Remote Fax 64 100
Sample Print --- ---
MCS Thumbnails 10 10
Swapping --- ---
Other --- ---
6-10
22 September 2006 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
[A]
B195D904.WMF
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[F]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
B195D167.WMF
Exposure
The xenon lamp [A] exposes the original. The reflected light is passed to the CCD,
Descriptions
where it is converted into analog data, processed, and stored in the memory. The
Detailed
data is retrieved and sent to the laser diode for printing
Drum charge
The charge roller [B] gives a negative charge to the organic photoconductive
(OPC) drum. The charge remains on the surface of the drum because the OPC
layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark.
Laser exposure
Processed data from the scanned original is retrieved from the memory and
transferred to the drum by two laser beams [C], which form an electrostatic latent
image on the drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on
the drum depends on the laser beam intensity, controlled by the BICU.
Development
The magnetic developer brush on the development roller [D] contacts the latent
image on the drum. Toner particles are electrostatically attracted to the areas of the
drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge on the drum.
6-11
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW 22 September 2006
Image transfer
Paper is fed into the area between the drum surface and the transfer belt [E] at the
proper time to align it with the image on the drum. The transfer bias roller applies a
high positive charge to the reverse side of the paper through the transfer belt. This
positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper while
the paper is electrostatically attracted to the transfer belt.
Separation
Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrical attraction between the
paper and the transfer belt. Pick-off pawls [F] help separate the paper from the
drum.
ID sensor
The ID sensor [G] measures the reflectivity of the pattern formed by the laser on
the surface of the drum. This output signal is used for toner supply control and also
measures the drum surface reflectivity, which is used for charge roller voltage
control.
Cleaning
The drum cleaning blade [H] removes any toner remaining on the drum surface
after the image is transferred to the paper.
Quenching
The light from the quenching lamp [I] electrically neutralizes the charge on the
drum surface.
Cleaning
The 2nd drum cleaning blade [J] removes any remaining toner.
6-12
22 September 2006 SCANNING
6.4 SCANNING
6.4.1 OVERVIEW 1 2 3 4 5
11 12
10 9 8 7 6 B195D905.WMF
1 Exposure lamp 7 Original length sensors 1, 2

2 1st Scanner 8 Original width sensors
3 Exposure glass 9 2nd Scanner
4 Lens block 10 Anti-condensation heater (option)
5 Scanner drive motor 11 Exposure glass (for document feeder)
6 Original length sensor 3 12 Scanner HP sensor
The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp). The image is
reflected onto a CCD (charge coupled device) on the lens block via the 1st, 2nd,
and 3rd mirrors, and through the lens on the lens block.
Descriptions
The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector, and the 1st mirror.
Detailed
The exposure lamp is energized by a dc supply to avoid uneven light intensity while
the 1st scanner moves in the sub scan direction (down the page). The entire
exposure lamp surface is frosted to ensure even exposure in the main scan
direction (across the page).
The light reflected by the reflector is of almost equal intensity in all directions, to
reduce shadows on pasted originals.
When the optional optics anti-condensation heater is installed on the left side of the
scanner, it turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in.
6-13
SCANNING 22 September 2006
6.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE

[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B195D907.WMF
Book Mode
Scanner drive motor [A] and timing belt drive the scanner drive shaft [B]. The drive
shaft drives the pulleys attached to the two scanner wires [C] (front and back). The
scanner wires move the 1st and 2nd scanners [D] on their rails. The 2nd scanner
speed is half that of the 1st scanner.
The scanner interface board (SIB) controls the scanner drive motor. In full size
mode, the 1st scanner speed is 230 mm/s during scanning.
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the
magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner drive motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done
by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the
scanner drive motor speed using SP4-008.
ADF mode
The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner home position
sensor [E] detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the
original through the ADF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change
in the sub-scan direction is done by changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification
in the main scan direction is done in the BICU board, like for book mode.
NOTE: Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the
ADF motor speed using SP6-017. In the main scan direction, it can be
adjusted with SP2-909, like for book mode.
6-14
22 September 2006 SCANNING
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE
[C]
[A]
[B] B195D906A.WMF
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] detect the original length. These reflective photo sensors are referred
to collectively as the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors.
While the power is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is always
Descriptions
Detailed
sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover
sensor [C] is activated after the platen reaches about 15 cm above the exposure
glass as it is closed. The main CPU detects the original size by the on/off signals
received from the APS sensors.
NOTE: If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the main CPU determines
the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start C key is pressed.
6-15
SCANNING 22 September 2006
L1 L2 L3
W1
W2
B195D909A.WMF
Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
A3 11” x 17” O O O O O 00011111
B4 10” x 14” O O O X O 00011101
F4 8.5” x 14” (8” x 13”) O O O X X 00011100
A4-L 8.5” x 11” X O O X X 00001100
B5-L X X O X X 00000100
A4-S 11” x 8.5” X X X O O 00000011
B5-S X X X X O 00000001
A5-L, A5-S 5.5” x 8.5”, 8.5” x 5.5” X X X X X 00000000
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present X: Low
For other combinations, "CANNOT DETECT ORIG. SIZE" will be indicated on the
operation panel display.
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine's productivity.
However, if the by-pass tray is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy
paper is lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-
pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area,
disregarding the original size sensors.
6-16
22 September 2006 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING
CCD
SBU SIB
SIB
LD
Mother Board
Controller
LD (GAVD)
Drum Driver IPU
FCI
Controller
HDD
LDDR BICU
B195D903.WMF
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
SBU: The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the analog signal from the CCD to an
8-bit digital signal and sends it to the SIB.
SIB: Relays image signals and controls the scanner.
BICU: The BICU (Base Engine Image Control Unit) performs timing control and
Descriptions
command control. The IPU on the BICU processes auto shading, filtering,
Detailed
magnification, γ correction, and gradation. The memory controller performs image
compression, decompression, and memory address control (for binary picture
processing mode only)
LD Unit: Performs dual channel multi-beam exposure, multiple exposure, and
synchronous detection.
Controller: Performs dual channel multi-beam exposure, multiple exposure, and
synchronous detection.
6-17
IMAGE PROCESSING 22 September 2006
6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)
SBU BICU
SIB
A/D
Serial Driver
Converter
Analog
CCD
8 bit Serial Data

Processing A/D IPU
Converter
ASIC
GA
B195D910.WMF
The CCD converts the light reflected from the original into an analog signal. The
CCD line has 7200 pixels at a resolution of 600 dpi.
The CCD has two output lines to the analog processing ASIC, one for handling odd
and one for handling even pixels. The analog processing ASIC performs the
following operations on the signals received from the CCD:
Z/C (Zero/Clamp): Adjusts the black level for even pixels to match the odd pixels.
Signal composition: Analog signals for odd and even pixels from the CCD are
merged by a switching device.
Signal amplification: The analog signal is amplified by amplifiers in the AGC
circuit. The maximum gains of the amplifiers are controlled by the CPU on the
BICU board.
After the above processing, the analog signals are converted to 8-bit signals by the
A/D converter. This gives a value for each pixel on a scale of 256 shades of gray.
Then, this data goes to the BICU via the SIB.
6-18
6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS)
0.5mm
[A]
15mm
75mm
Sub scan direction

B195D911.WMF
This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies.

The copier scans the auto image density detection area [A]. This corresponds to a
narrow strip at one end of the main scan line, as shown in the diagram. As the
scanner scans down the page, the IPU on the BICU detects the peak white level
for each scan line, within this narrow strip only. From this peak white level, the IPU
determines the reference value for A/D conversion for the scan line. Then, the IPU
Descriptions
sends the reference value to the A/D controller on the SBU.
Detailed
When an original with a gray background is scanned, the density of the gray area is
the peak white level density. Therefore, the original background will not appear on
copies. Because peak level data is taken for each scan line, ADS corrects for any
changes in background density down the page.
As with previous digital copiers, the user can select manual image density when
selecting auto image density mode and the machine will use both settings when
processing the original.
6-19
6.5.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

Overview
SIB BICU
Mother Board
Controller
SBU
IPU
LDDR
LD 1
LD FCI HDD
LD 2 Driver
GAVD
B195D906.WMF
The image data from the SBU goes to the IPU (Image Processing Unit) IC on the
BICU board, which carries out the following processes on the image data:
1. Auto shading
2. Filtering (MTF and smoothing)
3. Magnification
4. γ correction
5. Grayscale processing
6. Binary picture processing
7. Error diffusion
8. Dithering
9. Video path control
10. Test pattern generation
The image data then goes to the HDD.
6-20
6.5.5 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES

The user can select one of the following modes with the User Tools screen: Text,
Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation. Each of these modes has a range of different
settings (e.g. Soft, Normal, Sharp, etc). For each mode, a Custom Setting options
is also available. This Custom Setting holds the values selected with the SP modes,
which can be adjusted to meet special requirements that cannot be covered by the
standard settings.
To display this screen, press User Tools/Counter> Copier/Document Server
Settings> General Features> Copy Quality.
B195D912.WMF
Mode Function
Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. Ignores background
Text
texture. ( pg. 6-24)
Descriptions
Detailed
Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate
Text/Photo grayscaling, better than that achieved in the Text mode.
( pg. 6-25)
Photo Best possible reproduction of photographs. ( pg.6-26)
Reproduction similar to Text mode, but of lower contrast. Ideal for
Pale
copying thin originals. ( pg.6-27)
Attempts to achieve the best reproduction of copied originals, which
Generation Copy
have faded due to making copies of copies. ( pg.6-28)
6-21
General Image Processing Flow

Signals from SBU Processing conducted as required.
Ð
Shading Correction
Ð
Pre- Filter Background

Erase
Ð
Pre-Filter Smoothing
Ð
Main Scan
Magnification
Ð (Text/Photo, Photo) Primary Compression, Controller
Decompression
Independent Dot Erase HDD
Filtering
Ð Secondary Compression,
(Text, Pale, Generation) Decompression
γ Coefficient Sent to HDD
Ð Video Control Scanner/Printer Application

Grayscale Processing FCU
Ð FAX Application
LD Unit
6-22
6.5.6 SUMMARY OF IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS

Shading correction: Compensates for the possible differences in the amount of
light at the edges and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or
scatter among pixels of the CCD.
Pre-Filter Background erase: Attempts to eliminate the heavy background texture
from copies (newspaper print or documents printed on coarse paper). Elements
below the selected threshold level are eliminated.
Pre-Filter Smoothing: Reproduces halftones while reducing the incidence of
moiré which can occur as a result of compressing and then decompressing the
image.
Main scan magnification: Adjusts magnification to the desired level by processing
adjusting multiple, adjacent pixels in the direction of main scanning. Adjustment of
magnification in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanning speed.
Independent dot erase: Attempts to recognize and eliminate scattered,
independent dots in copies. Processes only pixels of high density and eliminates
those of low density.
Filtering (MTF filter/smoothing): Performs mainly edge enhancement with the
MTF filter. Performs smoothing only in the Photo mode. The matrix size of the filter
is 9 pixels x 7 lines.
Gamma (γ) coefficient: Controls the image density for images processed with
grayscaling. Copy density adjustment is achieved with special notch γ coefficient
conversion. The best γ coefficient suited for the selected mode can be stored and
adjusted as needed.
Grayscale processing: Performs reproduction of grayscales, using mainly error
Descriptions
Detailed
diffusion. (In the Photo mode, conducts processing with dithering.)
6-23
6.5.7 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS AND RELATED SP MODES

Text Mode
The Text mode achieves quality reproduction of text and sharp lines and ignores
background texture. Processing is conducted with a high resolution MTF filter;
special processing with the γ coefficient prevents background reproduction and
achieves the best reproduction of images with error diffusion. Because the Soft and
Normal settings use a weak MTF filter, the quality of the image is improved with the
elimination of moiré. The Sharp selection uses an MTF filter stronger than that of
the Normal setting, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image Shading Correction

Correction
Ð
Pre-Filter SP4903 65 (Background Erase Level: Text Mode)
Background Erase
Processing
Ð
Pre-Filter Smoothing SP4903 10 (Pre-Filter: Text)
Ð
Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 (Main Scan Magnification)
Ð
Independent Dot Erase SP4903 60 (Independent Dot Erase: Text Mode)
Ð
Filter Processing MTF Correction SP4904 20~23 Text (General Quality) ( 0)
Ð
Density Control γ Coefficient
Ð
Grayscale Error Diffusion
Processing
NOTE: An SP code number and name set in bold italic denotes an SSP (Special
Service Program) mode. To access an SSP, enter the SP mode: press and
hold down on the 10-key pad then “Copy SP” on the touch-screen.
6-24
Text/Photo Mode
Text/Photo mode achieves high quality reproduction of pictures with accurate
grayscaling. Processing is conducted with the special γ coefficient which
reproduces a wide range of grayscale. Compared with the Text mode, text
reproduced in the Text/Photo mode appears lighter and textured backgrounds
could appear on copies, but the incidence of moiré is reduced with and edge
detection filter. Because Photo Priority uses an MTF filter weaker than that of the
Normal setting, the quality of the image is improved with the elimination of moiré.
The Text Priority selection uses an MTF filter stronger than that of the Normal
setting, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.

Correction
Ð
Pre-Filter SP4903 67 (Background Erase Level:
Background Erase
Processing Text/Photo Mode)
Ð
Pre-Filter Smoothing SP4903 13 (Pre-Filter: Text/Photo)
Ð
Ð
Independent Dot Erase SP4903 62 (Independent Dot Erase Level)
Descriptions
Ð
Detailed
Filter Processing MTF Correction SP4904 25~28 Text/Photo (General) Quality
( ”Text Photo Mode”, pg.6-36)
Ð
Ð
Grayscale Error Diffusion
Processing
6-25
Photo Mode
Photo mode emphasizes grayscale processing to achieve the best possible
reproduction of photographs and eliminate moiré by using the highest density and γ
coefficient in the reproduction of grayscales and dithering. Print Photo performs
smoothing and dithering for photos copied from magazines, newspapers, etc. The
Normal selection uses a higher resolution setting and employs error diffusion but
does not use smoothing to improve the appearance of text in photographs. Glossy
photo paper employs MTF filter processing and error diffusion to copy glossy or
matte photographs and achieves a low incidence of moiré, thus reproducing copies
of photographs of high resolution.
For photo mode, the features used depend on which type of greyscale processing
has been selected for Photo mode (either ‘dithering and smoothing’ or ‘error
diffusion and MTF’); this depends on the setting of SP 4904 001. Details are
explained later in this section.

Correction
Ð
Pre-Filter SP4903 66 (Background Erase Level: Photo
Background Erase
Processing Mode)
Ð
Pre-Filter Smoothing SP4903 12 (Pre-Filter: Photo Mode)
Ð
Ð
Filter Smoothing/MTF SP4904 024 Photo (General Quality) ( pg. 6-35)
Processing Correction
Ð
Ð
Grayscale Dither/Error Diffusion SP4904 2 (Quality Photo Mode)
Processing
6-26
Pale (Low-Density Mode)

Pale achieves image quality comparable with Text mode, but of lower contrast.
Pale employs an MTF filter stronger than that employed by the Text mode and
uses a darker γ coefficient, thus increasing the incidence of copying textured
backgrounds. Ideal for copying extremely thin originals. Soft employs an MTF filter
weaker than Normal, thus achieving a softer image with less moiré. Sharp employs
an MTF filter stronger than that of Normal, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
Ð
Pre-Filter SP4903 68 (Background Erase Level: Light
Background Erase
Processing Original)
Ð
Pre-Filter Smoothing SP4903 15 (Pre-Filter: Light)
Ð
Ð
SP4903 63 (Independent Dot Erase: Light
Independent Dot Erase
Original)
Ð
Filter SP4904 29 Pale (General) Quality ( pg. 6-37)
Descriptions
MTF Correction
Processing
Detailed
Ð
Ð
Grayscale
Error Diffusion
Processing
6-27
Generation Copy Mode

Generation Copy, based mainly on Text mode, aims to achieve the best
reproduction of copied originals (so called “generation copies” or copies of copies).
This mode 1) employs an MTF filter weaker than that of the Text mode to eliminate
spurious dots, 2) uses the γ coefficient to smooth the image, and 3) uses
generation processing to thicken thin lines. Soft employs an MTF filter weaker than
the Normal setting to achieve a softer image with less moiré. Sharp employs an
MTF filter stronger than that for Normal to emphasize lines for better image quality.
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
Ð
Pre-Filter SP44903 69 (Background Erase Level:
Background Erase
Processing Generation Copy)
Ð
Pre-Filter Smoothing SP4903 16 (Pre-Filter: Generation Copy)
Ð
Ð
SP4903 64 (Independent Dot Erase:
Independent Dot Erase
Generation Copy)
Ð
SP4903 75 ~ 77 (Line Width Correction:
Generation Mode
Generation Copy)
Filter SP4904 30 Generation (General) Quality

MTF Correction
Processing ( pg. 6-37)
Ð
Ð
Grayscale
Error Diffusion
Processing
6-28
6.5.8 PRE-FILTERING
SP mode settings 4903 10 ~ 15 select pre-filters by changing the filter coefficient
settings.
Original
SP No. Default Setting Mag. Smoothing
Mode
Text SP4903 10 0 0 25% ~ 400% OFF
Photo SP4903 12 0 1 25% ~ 50% Weak
Text/Photo SP4903 13 0 2 25% ~ 50% Medium
Pale SP4903 15 0 3 25% ~ 50% Strong
Generation SP4903 16 0 4 25% ~ 99% Weak
↓ 5 25% ~ 99% Medium
Range 0~9 6 25% ~ 99% Strong
7 25% ~ 400% Weak
8 25% ~ 400% Medium
9 25% ~ 400% Strong
These SP mode settings are provided to reduce the incidence of moiré in the
reproduction of images whose data signals have been compressed in the direction
of the main scan. However, these SP adjustments can cause different effects in the
reproduction of images depending on:
Descriptions
• Whether they contain areas shaded with dot screening (newspaper,
Detailed
magazine photos)
• Their reduction ratios.
These adjustments can also cause blurring in the reproduction of images that
contain:
• Low density dots
• Low contrast text characters
• Fine lines
While filter processing is provided to reduce the incidence of moiré generated from
digital signals, you must always pay attention to how these adjustments affect text
characters and fine lines.
6-29
6.5.9 BACKGROUND ERASE

SP4903 65 ~ 69 cut the background from around images scanned from an original
of rough texture such as a newspaper or parchment. The larger the setting done for
this SP, the more background drops out from behind the image or text.
This SP mode setting for image processing executes separately from the ADS
(Auto Image Density) function that is performed in the SBU to set the peak white
level for scanning to eliminate background.
For example, if this SP is set for “20”, then 255
the scanning data up to 20 is set to “0” and
cut from the image. The range for this SP
code adjustment is 0 ~ 255. The
recommended range for a normal
document is 0 ~ 60. An official document
on rough texture paper would fall in the
recommended range of 120 ~ 160. The
correct setting for any original will vary with
the texture and quality of the background,
but remember that selecting a higher
INPUT
numbers for this setting will eventually 0 20 255
lower the quality of the document or cause B195D913.WMF
unexpected results.
Mode Background Erase Filter Default Range

Text SP4903 65 0
Photo SP4903 66 0
Text/Photo SP4903 67 0 0 ~ 255
Pale SP4903 68 0
Generation Copy SP4903 69 0
NOTE: The “0” setting switches off the background erase filter.
6-30
6.5.10 INDEPENDENT DOT ERASE

Independent dot erase (set with the SP mode settings listed in the table below)
remains in effect even when a “Custom Setting” is selected with the User Tools.
Independent dot erase targets for elimination random, irregular shaped black dots
on the surface of the original that would otherwise appear in the copy after
scanning and printing. The strength of the application of this feature can be
adjusted for each mode.
The filter compares each pixel with the pixels around an area 7 pixels x 7 lines. If
the sum of the pixels at the edges is smaller than the threshold value, the object
pixel is changed to zero (white). depending on the strength of the SP mode setting.
Setting a larger setting increases the number of dots erased, but if set too high, this
SP can also remove small or fine text characters or even portions of large text
characters.
Mode Independent Dot Erase Filter Default Range

Text SP4903 60 5
Text/Photo SP4903 62 0
0 ~ 15
Pale SP4903 63 0
Generation Copy SP4903 64 8
NOTE: The “0” setting switches off the filter.
Descriptions
Detailed
6-31
6.5.11 LINE WIDTH CORRECTION

This section describes how to select a setting for line width correction (LWC) for
the Generation Copy mode. LWC (Line Width Correction) can make lines thicker or
thinner in generation copies.
SP4903 75 LWC: Generation Mode

Setting Effect
0 No correction
1 Lighter lines
2 Darker lines (Default)
3 Thick lines
SP4903 75 adjusts the thickness of lines in faint

generation copies. Specifically, this adjustment
[A]
affects the lines targeted for adjustment by:
• SP4903 76 (LWC Threshold (Main Scan):
Generation Mode). Targets main scan, lines
parallel to the direction of feed [A].
• SP4903 77 LWC Threshold (Sub Scan):
Generation Mode). Targets sub scan, lines at
right angles to the direction of feed [B]. [B]
For sharp thin lines, set SP4903 75 for a higher

LWC setting, and for softer lines set a lower setting.
For thick lines, select “3”. Scan Direction
• To thin (or thicken) lines in the main scan B195D914.WMF
direction, select an SP4903 75 setting larger (or

smaller) than the setting for SP4903 76
• To thin (or thicken) lines in the sub scan direction
select an SP4903 75 setting larger (or smaller)
than the setting for SP4903 77.
However, remember that too large a setting can cause unexpected results in
copied images.
SP Mode Default Range

SP4903 76 LWC Threshold (Main Scan): Generation Mode 1
0~5
SP4903 77 LWC Threshold (Sub Scan): Generation Mode 1
6-32
6.5.12 FILTERING
Interactive SP Codes
Overview
The tables in this section are for quick reference. For details about how each SP
code operates and interacts with other SP settings, please refer to the sections that
follow.
Many of the SP codes used for image processing adjustments are interactive in
that they exist as master and slave SPs. Use the master SP codes for gross
adjustment. If you need to fine adjust a master setting, set the master setting to “0”
to access its slave SP codes.
NOTE: In the tables below, the master SP codes are set in bold type. The slave
SP codes are indented and set in normal type.
Keep the following points in mind while you are using these SP codes:
• The slave SP codes cannot be accessed until the master SP is set to “0”.
• For the slave SP code settings to take effect, the master SP code must remain
set to “0”.
• If the master SP code is reset to any value other than “0”, then the slave SP
codes are disabled and their adjustments have no effect on image processing.
• If a master SP code is provided with both a Strength and Level (coefficient)
adjustment, adjust the Strength setting first to achieve the approximate effect
that you want, then do the Level adjustment.
Descriptions
Detailed
6-33
Text Mode
Adjust the image for the Text mode with the four master settings within their
allowed ranges (for ranges see Section “5. Service Tables”. To fine adjust a master
setting set it to “0” then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 020 = 0 Text (General) Quality 25-64%
SP4903 020 Main Scan Filter Level: Text 25%-64%
SP4903 021 Sub Scan Filter Level: Text 25%-64%
SP4903 022 Main Scan Filter Strength: Text 25%-64%
SP4903 023 Sub Scan Filter Strength: Text 25%-64%
SP4904 023 = 0 Text (General) Quality 257%-400%
6-34
Photo Mode
Dithering or Error Diffusion for Photo Mode?
Use SP4904 001 to select either dithering or error diffusion to process image fills
and halftones.
0: Selects the dithering and smoothing filter.
1: Selects the error diffusion and MTF filter.
Photo Mode Dithering: SP4904 001 = 0

If you select “0” for SP4904 001 to enable dithering halftones, only one SP code is
available for fine adjusting dithering.
SP4903 037 Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode
Photo Mode Error Diffusion: SP4904 001 = 1

If you select “1” for SP4904 001 to enable error diffusion, all the SP codes in the
Mode tables below (Text Mode, Text/Photo Mode, etc.) are available for
adjustment.
Use the master SP codes gross adjustment of the image processing mode after
you have set SP4904 001 = 1 for error diffusion. If you need to fine adjust a master
setting, set the master setting to “0” to access its slave SP codes.
Adjust the image for the Photo mode with the one master setting within its allowed
range (for the range, see Section “5. Service Tables”). To fine adjust the master
setting set it to “0” then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 024 = 0 Photo (General Quality)
Descriptions
SP4903 036 Photo MTF (Edge)
Detailed
SP4903 038 Photo MTF (All)
SP4903 091 Filter Strength: Photo (Edge)
SP4903 092 Filter Adj.: Photo (Edge Det.)
SP4903 093 Filter Adj.: Photo (Mag.%)
SP4904 013 Halftone Adjustment: Edge Detection
6-35
Text/Photo Mode
Adjust the image for the Text/Photo mode with the four master settings within their
allowed ranges (for ranges, see Section “5. Service Tables”). To fine adjust a
master setting set it to “0” then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 025 = 0 Text/Photo (General) Quality 25%-64%
SP4903 039 Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 25%-64%
SP4903 040 Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 25%-64%
SP4903 079 Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 25%-64%
SP4903 080 Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25%-64%
SP4903 081 Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 25%-64%
SP4904 008 Gray Adj: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25-64%
SP4903 083 Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154%
SP4903 084 Filter Adj. Text/Photo (Mag.%) 65%-154%
SP4904 009 Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154%
SP4904 027 = 0 Text/Photo (General Quality) 155%-256%
SP4903 087 Filter Adj.; Text/Photo (Mag.%) 155%-256%
SP4903 090 Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 257%-400%
Also, SP4904 007 adjusts the error diffusion process that is used in text/photo
mode.
Gray adjustment: At areas defined as edges, error diffusion is done on text to
create sharp lines to better define text characters, but in other areas, grayscale
processing for photographs is done. Select a lower setting for better reproduction
of photographs and a higher setting for sharper text. For details, refer to the SP
table.
6-36
Pale Mode
Adjust the image for the Pale mode with the one master setting within its allowed
range (for range see Section “5. Service Tables”. To fine adjust the master setting
set it to “0” then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 029 = 0 Pale (General) Quality
SP4903 055 Filter Level: Light Original
SP4903 056 Filter Strength: Light Original

Adjust the image for the Generation Copy mode with the one master setting within
its allowed range (for range see Section “5. Service Tables”. To fine adjust the
master setting set it to “0” then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 030 = 0 Generation (General) Quality
SP4903 057 Filter Level: Generation Copy
SP4903 058 Filter Strength: Generation Copy
Descriptions
Detailed
6-37
Text Mode MTF Filter

This section describes how to select the MTF filter coefficient and filter strength for
the Text mode. You can use the SP mode settings listed in the table below to
adjust these items for scanning in Text mode:
• MTF filter coefficient for the main scan and sub scan
• MTF filter strength for the main scan and sub scan
Text Mode Coefficient Strength
(Mag.) Main Scan . Sub Scan . Main Scan . Sub Scan .
25% ~ 64% SP4903 20 SP4903 21 SP4903 22 SP4903 23
65% ~ 154% SP4903 24 SP4903 25 SP4903 26 SP4903 27
155% ~ 256% SP4903 28 SP4903 29 SP4903 30 SP4903 31
257% ~ 400% SP4903 32 SP4903 33 SP4903 34 SP4903 35
Ranges 0 ~ 15 0 ~ 13 0~7 0~7
Strengthening the MTF filter sharpens the edges of text characters and improves
the appearance of low contrast text but can also cause moiré to appear in photos
on the same original.
Conversely, weakening the MTF filter softens the edges of text characters and
reduces the occurrence of moiré but low contrast characters may fade.
Strengthen or weaken the MTF filter for the Text
mode only when necessary. [A]
Adjustment of the MTF filter coefficient performs
very fine level adjustment of the applied strength
of the MTF filter. Adjustment of the MTF filter
strength greatly affects the rate of the change
applied to the image. Basically, you should first
just the MTF filter strength in 1 step increments [B]
without adjusting the coefficient to achieve nearly
the effect you want, and then use the coefficient
settings for fine adjustment.
Coefficient and strength adjustments for main
scan affect lines parallel to the direction of Scan Direction
scanning [A]. B195D916.WMF
Coefficient and strength adjustments for sub scan

affect lines at right angles to the direction of
scanning [B].
6-38
Text/Photo, Photo Mode Filter

SP mode settings listed in Columns 2~4 below adjust the clarity of originals that
contain text, thin lines, and photos; the SP codes of Columns 5~6 are intended to
adjust the clarity of originals with text and thin lines or only photos.
NOTE: The photo mode settings are only valid if SP 4904 001 is set to 1.
Filter
Filter Setting: Filter Setting: Filter Adj.: Filter Adj.:
Mode, Mag. Strength:
Edge All Edge Det. Mag.
Edge
Text/Photo
SP4903 39 SP4903 40 SP4903 79 SP4903 80 SP4903 81
25 ~ 64%
Text/Photo
SP4903 43 SP4903 44 SP4903 82 SP4903 83 SP4903 84
65 ~ 154%
Text/Photo
SP4903 47 SP4903 48 SP4903 85 SP4903 86 SP4903 87
155 ~ 256%
Text/Photo
SP4903 51 SP4903 52 SP4903 88 SP4903 89 SP4903 90
257 ~ 400%
Photo (Error
SP4903 36 SP4903 38 SP4903 91 SP4903 92 SP4903 93
Diffusion)
Ranges 0~7 0~7 0~3 0~15 0~15
Filter Setting: Edge (Column 2): Provides filter processing of edges to improve
the clarity of originals that contain text and lines. Selecting a larger value sharpens
the clarity. However, increasing the value also increases the possibility of
producing moiré in the image.
Filter Setting: All (Column 3): Provides filter processing for the overall image, not
to improve just text, lines, or photographs, but to improve the image as a whole.
Descriptions
This filter coefficient reduces the incidence of moiré in images that contain shaded
Detailed
areas created with dots. Increasing the value improves reproduction of low contrast
text and lines. However, increasing the value also increases the possibility of
producing moiré in the image.
Filter Strength: Edge (Column 4): Aims to increase the strength of the “Filter
Setting: Edge” effect that processes edges to improve the clarity of originals that
contain text and lines. Increasing this setting not only increases the strength of the
effect and creates thicker text characters and lines, but can also cause moiré to
appear in the image. On the other hand, decreasing this setting lessens the effect,
creating thinner characters and lines and also reduces the incidence of moiré.
Filter Adj.: Edge Detection (Column 5): Broadens the range of the effect of the
“Filter Setting Edge” SP. Lowering this setting broadens the range for edge filter
processing and increases clarity. Also, using this SP together with “Filter Adj. Mag.”
below can sharpen edges to an extent that an abnormal looking image is created.
6-39
Filter Adj.: Magnification (Column 6): Allows gradual adjustment of clarity in

original images that contain varying degrees of clarity between text and lines, or
between areas of the same image. Increasing these settings in large increments
could easily cause moiré to appear in the images. These settings should always be
changed in small increments.
Follow these general rules with these settings:

• Increasing the settings dramatically increases clarity but can also increase the
incidence of moiré.
• Reducing the settings produces a smoother image, reduces the incidence of
moiré, but also reduces the effect of the filters.
• Adjusting the “Filter Adj. Mag.” SPs in combination with other settings can even
produce abnormal images.
Also, SP4904 007 adjusts the error diffusion process that is used in text/photo
mode.
Pale, Generation Mode Filter

The SP mode settings listed in the table below are used to adjust MTF filter
coefficient and strength for the Pale mode and Generation Copy modes.
Mode Coefficient Strength

Pale Mode SP4903 55 SP4903 56
Generation Copy SP4903 57 SP4903 58
Ranges 0~6 0~7
Strengthening the MTF filter sharpens the edges of text characters and improves
the appearance of low contrast text but can also cause moiré to appear in photos
on the same original. Conversely, weakening the MTF filter softens the edges of
text characters and reduces the occurrence of moiré but low contrast characters
may fade.
Strengthen or weaken the MTF filter for the Text mode only when necessary.
Adjustment of the MTF filter coefficient performs very fine level adjustment of the
applied strength of the MTF filter. Adjustment of the MTF filter strength greatly
affects the rate of the change applied to the image. Basically, you should first just
the MTF filter strength in 1 step increments without adjusting the coefficient to
achieve the effect you want, and then use the coefficient settings for fine
adjustment.
6-40
Photo Mode Smoothing for Dithering

Strengthening this SP4903 37 (Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode) makes images
smoother and reduces the occurrence of moiré but can also cause fading.
Strengthen this setting only when necessary.
NOTE: This setting is valid only if SP 4901 001 is at 0.
Smoothing Coefficient Range
SP4903 37 (Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode) 0~7
Photo Mode Grayscale

This SP mode adjustment sets how grayscales are processed when the user
selects Photo mode on the operation panel.
SP4904 1 Grayscale Photo Mode

Setting Description
0 Dithering and smoothing
1 Error diffusion, MTF filter correction for edges
If “0” is selected, the image grayscales are processed with dithering and filter
processing, just as they are processed with the “Print Photo” selection on the
operation panel. In this case the filter processing means smoothing only. The filter
coefficient for smoothing can be adjusted with SP4904 37 (Smoothing Filter in
Photo Mode).
If “1” is selected, then the image grayscales are processed with error diffusion
processing, just as they are processed with the “Normal” and “Glossy Photo”
settings on the operation panel. The MTF filter applied is the same as that applied
for the “Normal” setting.
To achieve better photo image quality with slightly less clarity in lines and text,
Descriptions
select “0” for dithering. You can also adjust SP4904 2 to achieve better
Detailed
reproduction of photographs.
On the other hand, to achieve better clarity in text and lines, with a slight sacrifice
in the quality grayscale and smoothness in photographs, select “1” for error
diffusion. To improve the clarity of fine lines and text, you can also increase the
strength of the MTF filter. However, increasing the strength of the filter can also
increase the incidence of moiré in areas of newspaper, magazine, or other
photographs created with dot screening.
6-41
Photo Mode Image Quality

This section describes how to select a setting to improve image quality in the Photo
mode with dithering in order to create an extremely smooth photo image.
Generally, a larger dithering matrix uses rougher dither pattern to reproduce a
smoother gray image, but lowering the resolution can make text and lines more
difficult to see. Conversely, a smaller dithering matrix uses a finer dithering pattern
to reproduce a gray image of rougher texture, but raising the resolution can make
text and lines easier to see.
SP4904 002 Quality Photo Mode

Picture Text
Setting Dither Pattern Processing Priority
Quality Quality
0 8 x 8 (75 lines) High Low Dot screen areas
Filled areas (highest priority)
1 8 x 8 (106 lines) Highest Low
Default
2 6 x 6 (142 lines) Medium Medium Filled areas
3 4 x 4 (212 lines) Low High Resolution
For these dither adjustments to take effect, SP4904 1 (Grayscale Photo Mode)
must be set to “0” to enable dithering.
Here are some general rules:
• If your main concern is reproducing legible text, use the smaller matrixes, but
a smaller matrix could cause spurious lines to appear in images.
• When using the smallest matrix with setting “3” (4 x 4), you should switch off
the smoothing filter for the Photo mode by setting SP4903 37 to “0”.
• Use the largest dither matrix (setting “0”) for originals that contain dot
screening such as newspaper and magazine photographs.
6-42
6.5.13 OTHERS
Vertical Black Line Correction
This section describes how to select a setting to correct vertical black lines.
SP4904 5 (Special Text Density) adjusts the overall intensity of the image to
eliminate vertical black lines in originals caused by documents scanned on a copy
machine with dirty optics.
SP Mode Default Range

SP4904 5 Special Text Density 0 0~7
Normally, the default setting (0) leaves this feature switched off.
Select a higher setting to increase the effect or a lower setting to decrease the
effect. High density vertical black lines may require a higher setting, but a higher
setting could cause the overall density of the copy to lower, or could cause low
density areas to drop out completely.
NOTE: Generally, this SP code corrects most low density vertical black lines but
may not be able to correct extremely dark or wide black lines.
Density Settings
This section describes how to adjust the density settings for the Pale mode
Generation Copy mode, and Text mode.
SP4904 3 is used to switch the density characteristics to binary digital processing
for black and white originals to achieve better balance between text and images,
correct shadows that appear around text in handwritten documents, to enhance
documents written in pencil, or to achieve stark contrast when copying blueprints,
Descriptions
Detailed
building plans, etc.
SP4903 3 Density Setting for Low Density Original Mode
Settings Density Characteristics
0 Selects γ normal density (Default).
1 Digitizes to near binary image.
SP4904 4 is used to switch between normal density and better reproduction of

areas with graduated fill in originals copied in the Generation Copy mode. To
improve the appearance of graduated fill areas of high density, set to “1” so the
process can ignore black and more accurately reproduce areas with graduated fill.
For example, the “1” setting is ideal for copying Generation Copy originals of
medical charts that contain images of internal organs.
6-43
SP4904 4 Density Setting for Copied Original Mode

Settings Density Characteristics
0 Selects normal density (Default) for Generation Copy originals.
1 Produces better gradation in fill areas of high density.
If “1” is selected for SP4904, the following SP mode settings may also need
adjustment.
SP No. Function Recommended Setting
SP4903 57 Filter Level: Generation Copy 4 (or change as required)
SP4903 58 Filter Strength: Generation Copy 2 (or change as required)
SP4903 64 Independent Dot Erase: Generation Copy 0 (OFF)
SP4903 69 Background Erase Level: Generation Copy 0 OFF
SP4903 75 Line Width Correction: Generation Mode 0 (LWC OFF)
ADS Level
This section shows you how to adjust the center notch for the ADS (Automatic
Density Setting) level. The notches are not displayed during ADS adjustment. Of 7
steps (notches) the center notch is 4. This is the value adjusted with this SP code.
SP5106 6 (ADS Level Selection) selects the image density used in ADS mode. For
example, if you set SP5106 66 to “2”, pressing the Auto Image Density key toggles
the display off and manual notch 2 is selected. This SP code is adjusted, if the
customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic density adjustment.
This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies.
The copier scans the auto image density detection area, a narrow strip at one end
of the main scan line. As the scanner scans down the page, the IPU on the BICU
detects the peak white level for each scan line in this narrow strip only. The IPU
uses this peak white level as a reference value for analog-to-digital conversion of
the scan line, then the IPU sends the reference value to the A/D controller on the
SBU.
When an original with a gray background is scanned, for example, the density of
the gray area becomes the peak white level density, so the original background will
not appear on copies. Because peak level data is taken for each scan line, ADS
corrects for any changes in background density down the page.
As with previous digital copiers, the user can select manual image density when
selecting auto image density mode and the machine will use both settings when
processing the original.
6-44
6.5.14 PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF SP MODES

Solving Problems
This section describes some common problems that can be solved with SP code
adjustments. This table lists the recommended settings; fine adjustments may be
required for the actual type of originals that the customer is copying.
NOTE: To do the settings in the table below, first you must set the Master SP code
to “0”. ( ”FILTERING”, 6-23~6-31)
Job User Tool Custom Setting Adjustment
Eliminate blue lines from graph • Lighten the image density for • Increase the setting of
paper, or erase shadows caused Text mode. SP4903 60 (Independent Dot
by originals that have been pasted • Select “Soft” for Text mode Erase) to about 6 ~ 10.
up for layout. (User Tools). • Increase the setting of
SP4903 65 (Background
Erase) to about 20 ~ 60.
Eliminate orange or other color • Increase the setting of
backgrounds from official SP4903 60 (Independent Dot
documents. Erase) to about 10 ~ 15.
• Increase the setting of
SP4903 65 (Background
Erase) to about 120 ~ 160.
Reproduce blue lines of graph • Darken the image density for
paper. Text/Photo mode.
• Select “Sharp” for the
Text/Photo mode (User Tools).
De-emphasize fine lines in jagged • Select “Soft” for Text mode Weaken the MTF filters for Text
valleys and reduce the occurrence (User Tools). mode:
of moiré. • SP4903 24, Main Scan: 9
• SP4903 25, Sub Scan: 13
• SP4903 26, Main Scan: 2
• SP4903 27, Sub Scan: 2
Reduce the occurrence of moiré • Select “Soft” for Text mode Weaken the MTF filters for Text
Descriptions
when reducing the size of the (User Tools). mode reduction:
Detailed
original for copying. • SP4903 20, Main Scan: 14
• SP4903 21, Sub Scan: 13
• SP4903 22, Main Scan: 1
• SP4903 23, Sub Scan: 1
Reproduce areas of graduated fill • Select “Glossy Photo” for Photo
in high density originals in Photo mode (User Tools).
mode.
Sharpen text in Photo mode. • Select “Normal” or “Glossy Set SP4904 1 to “1” to enable
Photo” for Photo mode (User error diffusion.
Tools). Strengthen the settings for the
Photo mode MTF filters
coefficients:
• SP4903 36: Select “3”
• SP4903 38: Select “1”
Improve the appearance of • Select “Sharp” for Pale mode Strengthen the MTF filters for
originals handwritten with pencil, (User Tools). Pale mode:
or make lighter copies of color • Select “Sharp” for Text mode • SP4903 55: Select “3”
originals (invoices and other (User Tools). • SP4903 56: Select “4”
commonly used business forms) Strengthen the MTF filters for
Text mode:
• SP4903 24: Set to “9”.
• SP4903 25: Set to “13”.
• SP4903 26: Set to “3”.
• SP4903 27: Set to “3”.
6-45
Recommended Settings for MTF Filters

Text Mode
– Text Mode Filter Setting (25% ~ 64%) –
MTF Strength Strong ← Default → Weak
Default Settings: Sharp Normal Soft
SP4903 20 Main Filter Level: Text 15 14 12 10 9 9 14 10 9
SP4903 21 Sub Filter Level: Text 13 13 12 12 13 10 13 13 10
SP4903 22 Main Filter Strength 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
SP4903 23 Sub Filter Strength: Text 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
–Text Mode Filter Setting (65% ~ 154%) –

SP4903 24 Main Filter Level 9 9 15 14 12 10 9 14 11
SP4903 25 Sub Filter Level 13 11 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
SP4903 26 Sub Filter Strength 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
–Text Mode (155% ~ 256%) –

–Text Mode (257% ~ 400%) –

6-46
Pale Mode
SP4903 55 Filter Level: Light
5 4 3 2 6 4 3 2 6
Original
SP4903 56 Filter Strength:
4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2
Light Original

SP4903 55 Filter Level: Light
2 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4
Original
SP4903 56 Filter Strength:
2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
Light Original
Descriptions
Detailed
6-47
LASER EXPOSURE 22 September 2006
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.1 OVERVIEW
5 6 7 8
4
B195D917.WMF
1 9
1 LD unit 6 Synchronization detector

2 Cylindrical lens 7 BTL (Barrel Toroidal Lens)
3 Polygonal mirror 8 F-theta mirror
4 Shield glass 9 Toner shield glass
5 Mirror
This machine uses two laser diodes to produce electrostatic images on an OPC
drum. The laser diode unit converts image data from the BICU board into laser
pulses, and the optical components direct these pulses to the drum. To produce a
high quality copy image, these are 256 gradations for the laser power.
The output path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above. The LD unit
outputs two laser beams to the polygon mirror through the cylindrical lens and the
shield glass.
Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects two full main scan lines. The laser
beams go to the F-theta mirror, mirror, and BTL (barrel toroidal lens). Then these
laser beams go to the drum through the toner shield glass. The laser
synchronization detector determines the main scan starting position.
NOTE: The front door and upper right door (transfer door) are equipped with safety
switches that automatically shut down the laser unit when either door is
opened.
6-48
22 September 2006 LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC)

The LD driver on the LDDR drives the laser diode. Even if a constant electric
current is applied to the laser diode, the intensity of the output light changes with
the temperature. The intensity of the output decreases as the temperature
increases.
In order to keep the output level constant, the LDDR monitors the electrical current
passing through the photodiode (PD). Then it increases or decreases the current to
the laser diode as necessary, comparing it with the reference level. This auto
power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing while
the laser diode is active.
The reference levels are adjusted on the production line. Do not touch the variable
resistors on the LDDR in the field.
Descriptions
Detailed
6-49
6.6.3 DUAL BEAM WRITING

[B] [C]
This LD unit employs two laser diodes
[A] (LD) and [B] (L2). Each face of the [E]
polygon mirror writes two main scan [D]
lines, and twelve main scans are
[A]
produced when the polygon mirror
rotates once. This reduces polygon
motor rotation speed, reduces noise
generated by the polygon motor, and
reduces the frequency of the image data
clock.
The two laser beams follow the path:
collimating lenses [C] Î prism [D] Î
polygon mirror [E]
B195D918.WMF
2 mm
P1
P2
P1: 400 dpi

P2: 600 dpi
B195D919.WMF
The two laser beams arrive on the drum surface about 2 mm apart in the main
scan direction and about 0.06 mm apart (at 400 dpi) in the sub scan direction. The
two-mm difference in the main scan direction allows the machine to detect the laser
synchronization signal for each beam.
6-50
22 September 2006 LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.4 LASER BEAM PITCH CHANGE MECHANISM

[C]
[B]
[A]
B195D543.WMF
The LD positioning motor [A] moves the LD unit housing [B] up and down and
changes the position of L2 (L1 does not move).
Descriptions
Both LD unit positions are at fixed distances from the LD unit home position sensor
Detailed
[C].
Usually, the LD unit moves directly to the proper position. However, when the
number of times that the resolution has changed reaches the value of SP2-109-5
(Auto Pitch Adjustment Interval), the LD unit moves to the home position, and this
re-calibrates the LD unit positioning mechanism.
6-51
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES
BICU LDDR Upper Right

Cover Switch
CN312-15,4,2 CN402-1,4,14 +5V CN403-1
LD5V CN403-3
LD2 Front Cover

LD1
CN301-10
Safety Switch
CN109-8
PSU +5V
B195D930.WMF
To ensure personal safety and to prevent the laser beam from inadvertently
switching on during servicing, power to the laser diode is switched off when the
front cover or upper right cover is opened. Four safety switches are installed in
series on the LD5 V line from the power supply unit (PSU) via the BICU board.
6-52
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3
11
10
9
4
7 5
6
B195D931.WMF
1. Toner Collection Coil 7. Charge Roller

2. Toner Collection Plate 8. Charge Roller Cleaning Roller
Descriptions
Detailed
3. Image Density Sensor 9. Drum Cleaning Blade 2
4. Pick off Pawl 10. Quenching Lamp
5. OPC Drum (φ60 mm) 11. Drum Cleaning Blade 1
6. Transfer Entrance Guide
6-53
6.7.2 DRUM CLEANING
[B] [A]
B195D932.WMF
The PxP (Polyester Polymerization) toner of this machine is of much finer particle
size so in addition to the stationary cleaning blade, mounted with two screws at the
bottom of the PCU, an additional cleaning blade [A] has been added to increase
the efficiency of drum cleaning.
The new cleaning blade is held in contact with the drum by two small springs [B]
(one on each end) that keep the cleaning blade in contact with the drum. This
cleaning blade is not a counter blade.
The tension of these springs has been reduced for this model in order to reduce
the amount of pressure applied by the bladed against the drum.
Every time the PCU is opened for replacement or cleaning, the spring closest to
the front of the PCU must moved in order to retract the cleaning blade away from
the OPC drum. After cleaning or replacement, the spring must be returned to its
original position to keep the blade in contact with the OPC drum for normal
operation. For details, see Section “3 Replacement and Adjustment”.
6-54
6.7.3 DRIVE MECHANISM [A]

[C]
The drive from the main motor [A] is
transmitted to the drum [B] through a [E]
series of gears, a timing belt [C], and [B]
the drum drive shaft [D].
The main motor has a drive controller,
which outputs a motor lock signal when [D]
the rotation speed is out of the
specified range. The flywheel [E] on the
end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes B195D933.WMF
the rotation speed (this prevents
banding and jitter on copies).
6.7.4 DRUM PAWLS

The pick-off pawls [A], mounted in the
holders [B] on the drum and in contact
with the drum, strip paper from the drum if
it has not yet separated. The gears [C] are
removable, and the positions of the
holders can be adjusted.
[A]
[B]
[C]
Descriptions
B195D934.WMF
Detailed
6.7.5 DRUM TONER SEALS
Seals have been added to the structure
of the PCU (photoconductor unit) to
further prevent toner leakage.
B195D935.WMF
6-55
DRUM CHARGE 22 September 2006
6.8 DRUM CHARGE

6.8.1 OVERVIEW
[F] [D] [E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B195D936.WMF
This copier uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum.

The drum charge roller [A] contacts the surface of the drum [B] to give it a negative
charge. The high voltage supply board [C] supplies a negative dc voltage to the
drum charge roller through the charge roller terminal [D], bias plate [E], and the
rear roller bushing [F] to give the drum surface a negative charge of –950V.
6-56
22 September 2006 DRUM CHARGE
6.8.2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION

Correction for Environmental Conditions
3 cm 3 cm
ID Sensor Pattern 3 cm
Sub Scan Direction
Charge Voltage -1500 V
On
Laser Diode
Off
Drum Potential -850 V
-600 V
Development Bias -550 V
-400 V
-150 V
ID Sensor Output V sg (4.00 V)
V sdp (3.50 V)
V sp (0.31 V)
t
B195D506.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
The voltage transferred from roller to drum could vary with the temperature and
humidity around the drum charge roller. The lower the temperature or humidity, the
higher the applied voltage required.
The ID sensor measures the effects of ambient conditions, and any small change
in drum potential caused by changes in temperature/humidity is reflected in the
amount of toner transferred to the drum.
This measurement is done immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner density
control. After creating ID sensor pattern [A], another pattern [B] is made. To do this,
the LD switches off, the charge roller voltage drops, and the drum potential is
reduced to -600V. At the same time, development bias returns to -550V. The drum
potential is now slightly higher than the development bias, so only a very small
amount of toner transfers to the drum. The ID sensor measures the density of
pattern [B], and Vsdp, the output voltage, is compared with Vsg which was read
from the bare drum at the same time.
6-57
DRUM CHARGE 22 September 2006
6.8.3 CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS

NOTE: This correction is done for the bypass tray only.
The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrower than sizes
accepted by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in
the by-pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed
below in order to avoid jams and copy quality problems.
SP Mode SP Name
SP2001 1 Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Width 216 - 297 mm (Default: -1450 V)
SP2309 1 Paper Lower Width [a] Width limit (Default: 150 mm)
SP2309 2 Paper Upper Width [b] Width limit (Default: 216 mm)
SP2914 1 C-alpha Adjust 10V/step (Default: 150 V)
SP2914 2 C-beta Adjust 10V/step (Default: 0 V)
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.
SP 2309 1 SP 2309 2
0 mm Default: 150 mm Default: 216 mm 297 mm
Voltage: Voltage: Voltage:

SP2001 1 + SP2914 1 SP2001 1 + SP2914 2 SP2001 1
Default: -1500 + 150 V Default: -1500 + 0 V Default: -1500 V
B195D928.WMF
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray
is 200 mm, the charge roller voltage will be –1500 +0 V.
6-58
22 September 2006 DRUM CHARGE
6.8.4 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING

An ID sensor pattern is created after the main machine is powered on, and after
finishing a job of 10 or more sheets.
The ID sensor pattern production interval can be adjusted with SP2-210 (ID Sensor
Pattern Interval).
ID sensor pattern ID sensor pattern
Vsp/Vsg Vsp/Vsg
1 2 3 8 9 10 1 2 3 12 13 14 15
........ ........
Series of copies
Vref Decision New Vref Decision New Vref Decision

B195D937.WMF
6.8.5 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING
[B]
Descriptions
[A]
Detailed
B195D938.WMF
The drum charge roller [A] (always in contact with the drum), gets dirty easily.
The brush roller [B] remains in contact with the charger roller to clean the charge
roller.
6-59
6.9 DEVELOPMENT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
7 1
B195D939.WMF
1 Drum 5 Mixing Auger

2 Development Roller 6 Development Filter
3 Paddle Roller 7 Doctor Blade
4 TD Sensor
6-60
6.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM [A]
The feed/development motor [A]

drives the development roller [B]
through the gears and the paddle
roller gear [C].
[B]
The drive shaft engages and
disengages the paddle roller gear
when the development unit is
inserted into and removed from the
machine. [C]
NOTE: The development drive
gears are helical gears,
quieter than normal gears.
B195D940.WMF
6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING
[B]
[C]
[C]
[A]

[D]
Descriptions
Detailed

B195D941.WMF
The dual mixing roller consists of the outer paddle [A] and the inner auger [B].
The outer paddle moves developer to the front and supplies it to the
development roller. Developer that spills off by the doctor blade passes through
the holes [C] in the outer paddle, and is transported to the rear by the inner
auger.
While the dual mixing roller is moving the developer, some developer also passes
back to the development unit through the holes in the bottom of the paddle roller .
New toner from the toner bottle and recycled toner from the toner collection coil
both enter the development unit at [D].
6-61
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

Mechanism
Black areas of the latent image are at a
low negative charge (about –150 V) and [A]
white areas are at a high negative charge
(about –850 V). [D]
To attract negatively charged toner to the [B]
black areas of the latent image on the
drum, the high voltage supply board [A]
applies a bias of –560 volts to the
development roller throughout the image
development process. The bias is applied [C]
to the development roller shaft [B]
through the bias terminal spring [C] and
B195D942.WMF
bias terminal [D].
The development bias voltage (-560 V) can be adjusted with SP2-201
(Development Bias).
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only)
The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrow than sizes accepted
by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in the by-
pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in
order to avoid jams and misfeeds.
SP Mode SP Name
SP2201 1 Development Bias Width 216 - 297 mm (Default: -560V)
SP2309 1 Paper Lower Width [a] Width limit (Default: 150 mm)
SP2309 2 Paper Upper Width [b] Width limit (Default: 216 mm)
SP2914 3 Process Control Setting (Bγ) Adjust 10V/step (Default: 200V)
SP2914 4 Process Control Setting (Bδ) Adjust 10V/step (Default: 50V)
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.
SP 2309 1 SP 2309 2
0 mm 297 mm
Default: 150 mm Default: 216 mm
Voltage: Voltage: Voltage:

SP2201 1 + SP2914 3 SP2201 1 + SP2914 4 SP2201 1
Default: -560 + 200 V Default: -560 + 50 V Default: -560 V
B195D915.WMF
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray
is 200 mm, the development bias voltage will be –560 + 50 V.
6-62
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY

Toner bottle replenishment mechanism
[F]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[B]
B195D800.WMF
[A]
When the toner bottle is installed in the bottle holder [A], pin [B] slides up the side
of the PCU [C], pulling out the toner shutter [D]. When the toner bottle holder lever
[E] is returned to its original position, the cap [F] pulls away and is kept in place by
the chuck [G].
Descriptions
The toner bottle holder lever [E] cannot be lowered:
Detailed
• Until a toner bottle is installed in the holder. This prevents toner falling out of the
holder unit as a result of lowering the handle with no toner bottle installed.
• Until the holder and bottle have been pushed into the machine completely and
locked in place. Instruct the customer to always follow the bottle replacement
instructions of the new decal attached to the toner bottle.
The toner bottle has a spiral groove [H], which rotates the bottle to move toner to
the development unit. When the bottle holder unit is pulled out, the chuck [G]
releases the toner bottle cap and the toner shutter [D] closes and blocks the
opening.
6-63
Toner supply mechanism
[A]
[B]
[C]
B195D943.WMF
[D]
[F]
[E] B195D944.WMF
B195D924.WMF
The toner supply motor [A] rotates the toner bottle [B] and the mylar blades [C]
(see below).
Toner falls into the toner bottle holder, and the toner supply mylar blades [C]
transfer the toner to slit [D]. Installing the PCU opens the shutter [E].
The toner falls into the development unit through the port.
The left side of the entrance seal is higher than the right. This improves the
efficiency of seal on the left side, especially when the PCU is removed.
6-64
[C] [A]
Toner Scatter Prevention
[B]
To reduce toner scattering, a velvet strip [A]
extends across the length of the fusing unit,
Seals are attached at each end of the strip [B]
and [C].
B195D945.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
6-65
Toner density control

There are two modes for controlling and maintaining constant toner supply: sensor
control (both direct and indirect) and image pixel count control. The mode can be
changed with SP2-208-1 (Toner Supply Mode).
NOTE: The factory setting is sensor control mode; image pixel count mode should
only be used temporarily until a defective TD or ID sensor can be replaced.
Sensor Control Mode

In the sensor control mode, the amount of toner required to print the page is
calculated by the CPU; it adds up the image data value of each pixel and converts
the sum to a value between 0 and 255. (255 would mean a completely black page.)
The machine must vary toner supply for each copy in order to maintain the correct
amount of toner in the developer and to account for changes in drum reflectivity
due to changes in temperature and humidity. The CPU uses data from the TD
sensor and ID sensor to determine whether or not the toner supply motor should be
switched on and to calculate how long it should remain on in order to supply more
toner to the mixture in the development unit.
TD Sensor. When new developer of standard toner concentration is installed,
namely 20 g of toner per 500 g of developer (4.0% by weight), the TD sensor must
be set to its initial setting of 3.0V with SP2-801. This initial setting is used as the
toner supply reference voltage or Vref. For every copy cycle, the TD sensor directly
checks the toner density in the developer mixture, and after 10 copies these 10
readings are averaged and this value becomes TD sensor output voltage Vt(10).
The machine compares Vt(10) with Vref. If Vt(10) is greater than Vref, the toner
concentration in the development unit judged to be low. When Vt(10) is detected to
be greater than Vref 20 times, then this indicates that the toner concentration is
consistently low, Vref is incremented by 0.1V, and the conditions are checked
again. The result of this check determines the value of K, the toner supply rate
coefficient, which is one of the factors that is used in the toner supply motor on-
time calculation.
ID Sensor. In addition to comparing Vt(10) from the TD sensor and Vref, after
every 10 copies the ID sensor, located at the lower right area of the drum, checks
both the reflectivity (Vsg) and the pattern on the drum (Vsp), created by the laser
diodes and charge roller. If the reflected light is too strong, this indicates that toner
is low and toner is added to the development unit. (The frequency of these checks
can be adjusted with SP2-210 (ID Sensor Pattern Interval).
6-66
Image Pixel Count Mode

This mode should only be used only as a temporary measure while waiting for
replacement parts, such as a TD sensor. This mode controls the toner supply
amount using the same method for determining the toner bottle motor on time.
However, the values that were in effect when the toner density control mode was
changed over to image pixel count mode with SP2-208-1 (Toner Supply Mode)
remain in effect and cannot be changed.
6.9.6 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION

Toner Near End
The machine triggers the toner near-end alert and starts to rotate the toner supply
bottle when either of the following two conditions occur.
• The machine detects (1) the toner supply rate (amount of toner supplied per
second set with SP2209 1) drops to 25, (2) the current output of the TD sensor
(Vt) has dropped below the target value after 40 samples, and then (3) still fails
to detect the target Vt after an additional 40 samples.
• The machine determines that the toner density is too light after it detects that (1)
the difference between Vref (the TD sensor reference voltage) and the averaged
density of the previous 10 copies is more than 0.2V, and (2) Vsp (the reflectivity
of the ID sensor pattern) is greater than 0.7V.
Toner End
After the machine enters the toner near-mode, it will trigger the toner end alert if
any of the conditions below continue to exist:
• TD sensor output does not reach the target value within 90 copies after the toner
near-end alert ("90" is the default setting for SP2213).
Descriptions
• The ID sensor output from reading the ID sensor pattern (Vsp) is extremely low
Detailed
(light).
• The averaged TD sensor output Vt exceeds 0.15V.
6-67
6.9.7 TONER END RECOVERY

If the front door is opened and then closed while a toner near end/end condition
exists, the machine will attempt to recover. When the front door is closed, the toner
supply motor turns on to supply toner. The machine checks the TD sensor output 2
seconds after the main motor turns on (Vtp), and the sensor is checked again
every 1 second (Vtp1)
The machine detects the toner concentration using Vref, Vt (10), Vtp, and Vtp1. If
the toner concentration is still too low, the toner supply motor remains on for
another 10 seconds while the machine checks Vt. If toner concentration is judged
to be at the standard level, then the toner near end/end condition is cancelled and
K (toner supply coefficient) is reset. If toner concentration has not reached the
standard level, the toner supply motor rotates continuously until it does (maximum
motor on time is 16 seconds) and then it will switch off.
6.9.8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS

The TD sensor is checked every copy. If the readings from the TD sensor become
abnormal during a copy job, the machine holds the GAIN factor constant (GAIN is
normally calculated from TD sensor readings) to allow toner supply to vary with
only pixel count for the rest of the copy job. Then at the end of the copy job, an SC
code is generated and the machine must be repaired.
The ID sensor is checked every 10 copies. If readings become abnormal, an SC
code is generated and the machine must be repaired. If this happens during a copy
job, Vref is not changed, the copy job is allowed to finish, and then the SC code is
generated.
If spare parts are not available, the technician can use SP2-208-1 to temporarily
put the machine in image pixel count mode. ( Chapter 5 Service Tables)
6-68
22 September 2006 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING
6.10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING

6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING [D] [E]
[A]
This machine employs a counter blade
system. After the image is transferred to
paper, a cleaning blade [A] removes any
toner remaining on the drum. The toner
collection coil [B] carries scraped off toner
to the toner collection plate [C].
The collar [D] on the cleaning blade
bracket contacts the outer rim of cam gear
[E], which moves the cleaning blade side to
side. This side-to-side movement [C]
disperses accumulated toner to prevent [B]
early blade edge wear at one location.
B195D946.WMF
The drum reverses about 5 mm after every
print job to remove particles on the edge of
the cleaning blade.
[A]
6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING
Toner collected by the toner collection
coil [A] is transported to the opening [B].
This toner falls into the development unit
with new toner coming from the toner
Descriptions
bottle. The paddle roller [C] mixes the
Detailed
collected toner with the new toner.
NOTE: A screen filter [D) has been
added to strain out paper dust
and other foreign matter.
[B]
[C]
B195D947.WMF
[D]
6-69
6.11 PAPER FEED

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
4 5
3 6
1 2
16 7 8
15 9
10
14 B195D948.WMF
13 12 11
1 Upper pick-up roller 9 Lower paper feed roller

2 Upper paper height sensor 10 Lower separation roller
3 Upper paper feed roller 11 Lower paper height sensor
4 Upper relay sensor 12 Lower pick-up roller
5 Upper relay roller 13 Lower paper size dial
6 Upper separation roller 14 Lower paper size switch
7 Lower relay sensor 15 Upper paper size dial
8 Lower relay roller 16 Upper paper size switch
Each paper tray, which employs the FRR system, can hold 500 sheets. Two relay
sensors, positioned above each set of relay rollers, detect paper jams. A selection
dial allows you to select the setting for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
6-70
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE

The feed/development motor [A] drives [A]
the pick-up and feed mechanism of both [C]
the upper and second paper feed stations
through gears and the paper feed
clutches [B].
When the paper feed clutch turns on, the [B]
pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and
separation roller start rotating to feed the
paper. The paper feed clutch stays on
until shortly after the registration sensor
[C] actuates. B195D949.WMF
6.11.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE

MECHANISM
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the
machine, the separation roller [B] is [C]
away from the paper feed roller [C] and [E]
the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper
position.
[A]
Descriptions
[B]
Detailed
B195D950.WMF
When the paper tray is set into the

machine, it pushes the release lever [E].
This causes the pick-up roller [D] to go
down and the separation roller [B] to
move up and contact the paper feed
roller.
[D]
B195D951.WMF
6-71
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT [H] [E] [D]
The paper size switch [A] detects when

the paper tray [B] is set in the machine,
[F] [A]
and the tray lift motor [C] rotates, and
the coupling gear [D] on the tray lift
motor engages the pin [E] on the lift
arm shaft [F]. Then the tray lift arm [G] [G]
lifts the tray bottom plate [H].
[C]
[B]
B195D952.WMF
[J]
When the paper tray is set in the machine,
the pick-up roller [I] lowers. When the top
[K]
sheet of paper reaches the proper height
for paper feed, the paper pushes up the
pick-up roller, and the actuator [J] on the
pick-up roller supporter activates the
paper height sensor [K] to stop the tray lift
motor.
After several paper feed cycles, the paper [I]
level gradually lowers and the paper
height sensor is de-activated. The tray lift B195D953.WMF
motor turns on again until this sensor is

activated again.
When the paper tray is removed from the
machine, the tray lift motor coupling gear
disengages the pin on the lift arm shaft,
and the tray bottom plate then drops
under its own weight.
6-72
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION
[B]
[A]
[C]
B195D954.WMF
If there is paper in the paper tray, the paper end feeler [A] is raised by the paper
stack, and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivates.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout
[C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
Descriptions
Detailed
6-73
6.11.6 PAPER REGISTRATION

[C]
[F]
[D]
[G] [E]
[H]
[A]
[B]
B195D955.WMF
The registration drive roller [A] and idle roller [B] correct the skew of the paper to
ensure that the leading edge of the paper is positioned correctly at the drum. The
paper feed/development motor [C] drives the registration mechanism.
The registration sensor [D] is positioned just before the registration rollers. When
the leading edge activates the registration sensor, the registration clutch is
switched off and the registration rollers stop turning. However, the relay clutch [E]
remains on slightly longer. This delay allows more time for the paper to press
against the registration rollers and buckle slightly to correct any skew. The
registration sensor also detects misfeeds.
Next, the registration clutch [F] actuates and the relay clutch at the correct time to
align the paper with the image on the drum. The registration rollers then feed the
paper to the image transfer section.
Two new dust blades have been added around the registration roller. The idle roller
dust blade [G] cleans the registration idle roller. This dust blade has a small dust
box that collects paper dust that must be emptied periodically.
The registration roller dust blade [H] cleans the registration roller. For details about
how to remove and clean these new parts, see Section “3 Replacement and
Adjustment”.
6-74
6.11.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

The paper size switch includes four microswitches. Actuators behind the paper size
dial actuate the sensors.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To
determine the paper size, the CPU reads which switches the actuator has turned
off.
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If
the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the printer control
board recognizes that the paper tray is not installed.
When the paper size actuator is at the “ ” mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using one of the user tools
on the machine’s operation panel.
Models Paper Size Switch

North America Europe/Asia 1 2 3 4
81/2" x 13" Portrait A3 Portrait ON ON OFF ON
A4 Landscape A4 Landscape ON ON ON ON
A4 Portrait A4 Portrait ON OFF ON ON
11" x 17" Portrait A5 Portrait OFF OFF ON ON
81/2" x 14" Portrait 8" x 13" Portrait ON OFF OFF OFF
81/2" x 11" Portrait 81/2" x 11" Portrait ON ON OFF OFF
81/2" x 11" Landscape 81/2" x 11" Landscape ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON OFF
ON: Pushed OFF: Not Pushed
Descriptions
Detailed
6-75
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY

6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1
[1] 2
3
B195D956.WMF
1 Paper feed roller

2 Paper end sensor
3 Pick-up roller
4 By-pass tray
5 Separation roller
6-76
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION
[A]
[B]
B195D957.WMF
[C]
[D]
Descriptions
Detailed
[E] B195D958.WMF
The by-pass unit is directly driven by the copier through gear [A].
When the print key is pressed, the pick-up solenoid [B] turns on and the pick-up
roller [C] moves onto the paper. When the by-pass tray runs out of paper, the
paper end feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the by-pass tray and the paper end
sensor [E] is activated.
6-77
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
B195D959.WMF 11" 81/2" 51/2"
A3 B4 A4L B5L A5L B6L

B195D960.WMF
The paper size sensor board [A] monitors the paper width.
The rear side fence is connected to the terminal plate. The pattern for each paper
width is unique. Therefore, the copier determines which paper has been placed in
the by-pass tray by the signal output from the board. However, the copier does not
determine the paper length from the by-pass tray hardware.
6-78
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW
1
2
3
6
B195D961.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
1 Entrance sensor 4 Upper transport roller
2 Inverter gate 5 Lower transport roller
3 Inverter roller 6 Exit sensor
6-79
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT
B195D962.WMF
1 Inverter roller 4 Transport motor

2 Inverter motor 5 Lower transport roller
3 Upper transport roller
6-80
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION

To increase the productivity of the duplex unit, copies are printed as follows.
Longer than A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise

The duplex unit can store only one sheet of copy paper.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
[A]
2 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 7
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
[B] B195D963.WMF
Up to A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise
The duplex unit can store two sheets of copy paper
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
[A]
Descriptions
2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
Detailed
1 2 1 3 2 4 3 4
[B] B195D964.WMF
6-81
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM

[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[G]
B195D965.WMF
B195D967.WMF
Feed-in
The inverter gate solenoid [A] stays off and the inverter rollers [B] rotate clockwise.
A sheet of paper is sent to the inverter section [C].
NOTE: The cover guide has been eliminated in order to accommodate paper sizes
longer than A4/LT in the reverse feed path which has been lengthened in
the design of this machine.
Inversion and Exit

The inverter gate solenoid turns on and the inverter motor turns on in reverse
shortly after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the entrance sensor [D].
As a result, the inverter gate [E] is opened and the inverter roller rotates
counterclockwise. The paper is sent to the copier through the upper and lower
transport rollers [F, G].
6-82
22 September 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.14.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3
10
4
9
8 5
B195D966.WMF
1 Transfer belt 6 OPC
Descriptions
2 Drive roller 7 Pick-off pawls
Detailed
3 Transfer belt cleaning blade 8 ID sensor
4 Transfer roller 9 Contact lever
5 Idle roller 10 Transfer belt contact clutch/cam
6-83
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 22 September 2006
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM [B]

[A]
After the main motor switches on during [F] [C]
copying, the transfer belt contact clutch [A]
switches on after a specified interval and [E]
the cam [F] makes a half-turn to raise the
contact lever [E] and bring the transfer belt
[D] into contact with the drum.
The actuator [C], on the same axis as the
cam, and the transfer belt position sensor
[D]
[B] detect whether the drum and transfer
belt are in contact.
When the main motor is off, or when the ID
sensor pattern is being measured, the B195D968.WMF
transfer belt unit separates from the drum.
The ID sensor pattern must not be transferred to the belt. Also, the transfer belt
and drum must not remain in contact for too long, to prevent contamination of the
drum with oil or other foreign material from the transfer belt.
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM

[E]
The belt contact and release mechanism
[A]
consists of the belt contact clutch [A], cam
[B], and contact lever [C]. The belt contact [B]
clutch turns on and the cam attached to
the clutch rotates half a complete rotation.
The contact lever, riding on the cam, is
lifted up and the springs [D] push the belt
into contact with the drum.
The transfer belt position sensor [E]
detects the home position of the cam (this
is when the belt is away from the drum). [C]
The belt must be released from the drum
between copy jobs in order to prevent the [D]
B195D969.WMF
ID sensor pattern from being rubbed off
and to prevent contamination of the drum
from the surface of the belt.
6-84
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

MECHANISM
[C]
When the registration clutch switches on to align
the leading edge of the paper [A] with the image
on the drum [B], the transfer belt is [C] is away
from the drum.
[B]
[A] B195D970.WMF
At the designated time after the main motor

switches on, the transfer belt contact clutch
switches on and the transfer belt touches the
drum.
Descriptions
Detailed
B195D971.WMF
When the paper enters the gap between the belt

and the drum, the high voltage supply board [D]
applies a high positive current to the belt to
transfer the image to the paper. [D]
After receiving the image from the drum, the paper
is fed by the belt. The paper moves to the end of
the transfer belt unit, where it separates from the
belt as the belt curves away. Then the paper
moves on to the fusing unit.
B195D972.WMF
6-85
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE

Mechanism
[C]
[B] [A]
[D]
[E]
B195D973.WMF
The high voltage supply board [A] applies a positive current to the transfer belt [B]
through the terminal block [C], terminal plate [D], and the bias roller [E].
The high voltage supply board adjusts the current to the roller to keep a small but
constant current flow to ground through the belt, paper, and drum. If this current is
not kept constant, efficiency of toner transfer and paper separation will vary with
paper thickness, type, environmental condition, or changes in transfer belt surface
resistance.
6-86
Correction for paper width and thickness

A range of SP modes is available in order to adjust the machine so it can handle
papers of non-standard size and thickness.
For paper width, there are two thresholds. The factory settings are 150 mm (5.9”)
and 216 mm (8.5”). Below 216 mm, the transfer current can be increased. By
default, the current is multiplied by 1.2 for the main machine paper trays. For paper
widths below 150 mm, the transfer current can be set higher, but by default it is
kept the same as the current for paper widths below 216 mm. The higher current
allows for the tendency of the current to flow directly from the transfer belt to the
drum and not through the paper which could cause an insufficient amount of toner
to transfer to narrow width paper.
Thick paper must be fed from the by-pass tray because SP modes are available
only for the by-pass tray in order to accommodate thick paper. By default, the
current for paper narrower than 216 mm is 1.5 times the normal current.
This illustration shows the SP modes, which control these currents. The base
transfer current (‘current’ in the diagram) depends on SP 2-301. This is different for
various parts of the image, and is different for the by-pass tray; see the next page
for details.
SP2-309-1 SP2-309-2
0 Default: 150 mm Default: 216 mm 297 mm
Paper Tray
SP2-309-3 SP2-309-4
Current x 1.0
Current x 1.2 Current x 1.2
By-pass Tray
Descriptions
SP2-309-5 SP2-309-6
Detailed
Current x 1.0
Current x 1.5 Current x 1.5
B195D974.WMF
6-87
Currents applied to leading edge, image areas - by-pass feed

Transfer current can also be adjusted for the leading edge and the image area, and
for by-pass feed. The timing for starting to apply leading edge current, for the
switchover from leading edge current to image area current, and for switching off at
the trailing edge can also be changed.
The table below lists the SP modes you can use to adjust these settings.
SP2-301 Transfer Current Adjustment

Image areas SP2-301-1 1st Side of Paper
SP2-301-2 2nd Side of Paper
SP2-301-4 By-pass Feed
Leading edge SP2-301-3 Leading Edge
areas
SP2-301-5 Leading Edge By-pass Feed
SP2-911 Transfer Current Timing
Timing SP2-911-1 On Timing (at leading edge)
SP2-911-2 Switch Timing (from leading
edge to image area current
SP2-911-3 Off Timing (at trailing edge)
6-88
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM
[A]
[C]
[B]
B195D975.WMF
The cleaning blade [A], always in contact with the transfer belt, scrapes off toner
and paper dust remaining on the transfer belt.
Scraped off toner and paper dust falls into the toner collection tank [B] in the
transfer belt unit. This toner is not recycled. When the toner overflow sensor [C]
detects toner overflow, the toner overflow indicator lights. Up to 999 copies can be
made before the toner overflow condition shuts down the machine.
Descriptions
Detailed
6-89
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 22 September 2006
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

1 2 3 4
18
17 5
6
16
7
8
15
9
14
10
13
12 11 B195D976.WMF
6.15.1 OVERVIEW
1 Paper exit sensor 10 Cleaning roller

2 De-curler rollers 11 Entrance guide
3 Junction gate 12 Fusing lamp (center)
4 Idle roller (duplex unit) 13 Fusing lamp (ends)
5 Fusing unit exit sensor 14 Thermistors (center/end)
6 Spring 15 Thermostats (center/end)
7 Fusing exit guide plate 16 Hot roller
8 Pressure roller 17 Hot roller strippers
9 Pressure arm 18 Exit roller
6-90
22 September 2006 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE [A]

The fusing exit motor [A] drives the
fusing unit through the gears [B] and
[C]
also drives the paper exit rollers [C]
through a gear and a timing belt [D].
[B]
[D]
B195D603.WMF
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM

[A]
The fusing unit drive release mechanism
automatically disengages the fusing unit [E] [D]
drive gear [A] when the right door [B] is
opened.
When the right cover is opened, the
actuator plate [C] pulls release wire [D]. [C]
The wire pulls the fusing drive gear bracket
[E] and the fusing unit drive is disengaged.
Descriptions
[B]
Detailed
B195D978.WMF
6-91
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM

The entrance guide [A] has two holes on
each side to adjust for paper thickness to
prevent creasing. Normally, the left screw
hole [B] on each side is used.
For thin paper, use screw holes [C] to
move the entrance guide to the left. This
setting allows more direct access to the
gap between the hot and pressure rollers,
and prevents thin paper from buckling
against the hot roller which can cause
blurring at the leading edge of the copy.
[B]
[C]
[A] B195D979A.WMF
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS

[D]
The exit guide plate [A] also functions as a
pressure roller stripper. The exit guide
plate can be moved in order to remove
jammed paper.
Stacking has been improved by mounting [A]
[B]
a face-curl correction mechanism at the
paper exit roller.
Two de-curler rollers [B] and [C] have been
added under the exit roller [D] to correct
the curl that paper acquires during [C]
transport through the fusing unit.
B195D980.WMF
6-92
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER [D] [A]
The pressure springs [A] apply constant [E]

pressure between the hot roller [B] and the
pressure roller [C].
The applied pressure can be changed by
adjusting the position of the pressure
springs. The left position [D] is the normal
setting. The right position [E] increases the [B]
[C]
pressure to prevent insufficient fusing by
the fusing unit. B195D981.WMF
A stopper counters the tension of the of the

pressure springs to keep the pressure roller
pressing against the hot roller with constant
pressure.
This prevents the pressure roller from [A]
flattening and increasing the width of the nip
band as shown at [A]. This can lead to paper
slippage and paper jams in the fusing unit.
B195D925.WMF
Descriptions
Until the machine is installed, two screws
Detailed
and maintain a gap between the
pressure roller and hot roller.
This relieves pressure on the surface of the
pressure roller and prevents it from
becoming deformed during storage before
the machine is shipped.
These screws are removed and discarded
when the machine is installed.
B195D982.WMF
6-93
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
B195D983A.WMF
The cleaning roller [A], in constant contact with the pressure roller [B], collects
toner and paper dust from the surface of the pressure roller.
Because the cleaning roller is metal, it can collect adhering matter better than the
pressure roller, which is coated with Teflon.
6-94
6.15.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER CLEANING

Toner clinging to the hot roller strippers can cause black dots to appear on the
back sides of copies. To ensure that the hot roller strippers are clean and not
contaminated by old toner;
• The widths of the strippers have been reduced from 3 mm to 0.5 mm.
• The machine can be set so the fusing/exit motor switches on and rotates the
drum freely for 5 sec. at the beginning of every job. This feature can be switched
on with SP5959. The amount of time for free rotation can be adjusted with this
SP code. Make sure that the customer understands that increasing this SP
setting slows down the start of the job.
• The machine switches on the fusing/exit motor and rotates the drum after the job.
The drum rotation sequence at the end of a job depends on the size of the job.
Small Jobs
Job End
1st Cleaning
Fusing Motor
15 s 15 s
B195D921.WMF
After the machine prints a total of 5 sheets (five jobs of 1-sheet each for example,
Descriptions
or a continues print of up to 29 pages), 15 sec. after the job ends the fusing/exit
Detailed
motor switches on for 15 sec. and then stops. This 15 sec. on/off cycle, called the
1st Cleaning is done once.
6-95
Medium Jobs
1st Cleaning x2
Job End
Fusing Motor
15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s
B195D922.WMF
After the machine prints a job of 30 to 99 continuous pages, the 1st Cleaning is
done twice. (15 sec. after the job ends the fusing/exit motor switches on for 15 sec.,
pauses for 15 sec. then switches on again for 15 sec.)
Large Jobs
Job End 1st Cleaning + 45 sec. wait + 1st Cleaning
Fusing Motor
15 s 15 s 45 s 15 s
B195D923.WMF
After the machine prints a job of over 100 continuous pages, the 1st Cleaning is
done, there is a pause of 45 sec. then the 1st cleaning is done again.
6-96
SP Settings for Post-Job Cleaning

The previous description of stripper cleaning with drum rotation after small, medium,
and large print jobs is based on the default settings of SP3905. These settings can
be adjusted.
These are the SP codes that control how cleaning is done at the end of a job.
No. Name Function

Number Rotations Sets the number of times the 1st Cleaning is
3905 001
done. Default: 1
Number of Pages Sets the number of pages (accumulative total)
3905 002 to print before 1st Cleaning is done ("Small
Jobs" on previous page. Default: 5
No. addtnl. sheets for 2nd Sets the number of pages to print (continuous
3905 003 HR stripper cleaning print job) before 1st Cleaning is done twice
("Medium Jobs" on previous page). Default: 30
No. addtnl. sheets for 3rd Sets the number of pages to print (continuous
HR stripper cleaning print job) before 1st Cleaning is done once,
3905 004
then done again after a 15 sec. interval ("Large
Jobs" on previous page).(Default: 100
No. addtnl. sheets for 3rd Sets the number of times that the cycle for
HR stripper cleaning SP3905 004 is repeated for "Large Jobs".
3905 005
Default: 0. If set to "1", for example, the
cleaning sequence is repeated once.
This SP determines what happens if a new job
starts while cleaning is in progress. Default: 0
Job/HR stripper cleaning (Off): If a new job starts while cleaning is in
3905 006
priority setting progress, cleaning is canceled so the new job
can start. If you set this SP to "1", a new job
cannot start until cleaning has been completed.
Descriptions
Detailed
Here are some important points to keep in mind about hot roller stripper cleaning:
• If the machine switches to any of the energy saver modes (low power mode, etc.)
while cleaning is in progress, the cleaning cycle will not be interrupted.
• The cleaning cycle is not interrupted by free rotation of the hot roller when the
machine is getting ready to print.
• Opening the front door, however, while cleaning is in progress will stop a
cleaning cycle.
6-97
6.15.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A] B195D985A.WMF
The fusing unit has two fusing lamps: the first fusing lamp (center: 650W) [A] heats
the center of the fusing roller, and the second fusing lamp (ends: 650W) [B] heats
both ends of the hot roller. This arrangement ensures even heat on all surfaces of
the roller.
In order to control the temperature of the roller, two high response thermistors are
attached to the unit, one near the center [C] and one at the end [D] of the hot roller.
6-98
Temperature Control
B079 (35 cpm) °C B082 (45 cpm)

°C
Fusing Temp.
200 200
Fusing Temp. 175°C
170°C
165°C
145
160°C 140
135
130 Center
Center End
100 End 100
50
Center
Center
50
End
End
Main SW ON Re-load Main SW ON Re-load
B195D929.WMF
There are two types of temperature control:

• On/off control (Default)
• Phase control.
Either mode can be selected with SP1104 (Fusing Temperature Control).
After the machine is powered on, the CPU checks the ac frequency for 500 ms, in
case phase control is selected later for the temperature control, and then switches
on the fusing lamp.
As soon as both the center and end thermistors detect the print ready temperature
(also known as the “re-load” temperature), the machine can operate. The “reload”
temperature is 3 °C below the fusing temperature (this depends on the settings of
SP1105 1~4, 7, 8). As soon as the thermistors detect the fusing temperature, the
Descriptions
CPU switches the lamps off but frequently switches on/off again in order to
Detailed
maintain the fusing temperature.
The default temperatures of SP1105 for these models are set 10 ~ 30 degrees
lower than the temperatures for the previous machines. Some new SP codes have
been added and others removed. For details, see Section “5. Service Tables”.
6-99
Fusing Idling Temperature

If copies are not sufficiently fused soon after the main power switch is turned on,
fusing idling should be enabled with SP1103 1.
When fusing idling is enabled, it is done when the temperature reaches the print
ready (“re-load”) temperature. The re-load temperature can be adjusted with
SP1105 5,6.
In the opposite case, even if fusing idling is disabled, it is done when the
temperature at power-up ≤ 15 °C
The fusing idling time is as follows.
Temperature at Fusing Idling Mode

power-on 0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP1103 1
15 °C or less 30 s 30 s
SP1103 2
Higher than 15°C Not done 30 s
6-100
6.15.10 CPM DOWN FOR THICK PAPER

When printing on thick paper the machine automatically controls and lowers the
line speed to below 45 ppm to ensure sufficient heat to fuse the toner to the thicker
paper.
• After switching from Normal to Thick Paper for printing, the machine halts
temporarily and re-starts for 35 cpm running.
• If the previous job included stapling or other finisher processing, these settings
remain in effect for the next job on thick paper after the line speed is adjusted.
• If the print job on thick paper does not include an image on the page (a cover),
then the speed is not adjusted down from 45 cpm to 35 cpm.
NOTE: The previous machine automatically reduced line speed 30% (ppm
down) for thick paper. In these models, however, the speed is reduced
from 45 cpm to 35 cpm for the 45 cpm machine. This adjustment is
performed automatically for the B295/B297 (45 cpm) machine only.
Note these other important points regarding cpm down for thick paper on the 45
cpm machine:
• When the line speed switches from 45 cpm to 35 cpm for thick paper, the
transfer current changes to the settings specified with SP2301 (Transfer Current
Adjustment). (For details, see Section “5. Service Tables”.) Bias voltage,
development and other settings are not affected.
• Fusing temperature adjustment switches on, but no operation can start until the
machine reaches the temperature specified for the job.
• The ID sensor pattern is created and the line speed remains the same until the
end of the job.
• The intensity of the LD unit is lowered evenly, 30 steps from its specified value.
Descriptions
Detailed
6.15.11 OVERHEAT PROTECTION
If the hot roller temperature becomes greater than 250°C, the CPU cuts off the
power to the fusing lamp, and SC543 (Fusing Overheat Error) will be displayed.
Even if the thermistor overheat protection fails, there is a thermostat in series with
the common ground line of the fusing lamp. If the temperature of the thermostat
reaches 199°C, the thermostat opens, removing power from the fusing lamp. At the
same time, the copier stops operating. At this time, SC542 (Fusing Temperature
Warm-up Error) will be displayed.
6-101
ENERGY SAVER MODES 22 September 2006
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES

6.16.1 OVERVIEW
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Key On

-or-
Energy Saver Timer Energy Saver Key Off
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s) Return Time Less than 3 s
Operation Sw. Off

-or-
Auto Off Timer - Energy Saver Timer Energy Saver Mode
(Low Power Mode)
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open/Close
Original Set ADF
Auto Off Mode
Return Time Less Than:
10 s: Model A-C2b
15 s: Model A-C2c
Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc.

Printer Data in After Printing
Off Stand-by
Mode
B195D987.WMF
When the machine is not used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Energy saver mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
• Energy timer (UP mode)
• Auto off timer (UP mode)
• Auto off disabling (SP mode)
6-102
22 September 2006 ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE

Entering the energy saver mode
The machine enters energy saver mode when one of the following is done.
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for a second.
• The energy saver timer runs out after the end of a job.
What happens in energy saver mode
When the machine enters energy saver mode, the fusing lamp drops to a certain
temperature, and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the
Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the CPU receives the image print out command from an application (e. g. to print
incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the fusing temperature rises to print
the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
• Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
• An original is placed in the ADF
• The ADF is lifted
• A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The recovery time from energy saver mode is about 3 s.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Temp. +24V System +5V
Descriptions
Switch Saver LED
Detailed
Energy B291/B296: 130oC
On On On On
Saver B295/B297: 150oC
6-103
ENERGY SAVER MODES 22 September 2006
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when the
machine enters Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off mode when one of the following
is done.
• The auto off timer runs out
• The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
If one or more of the following conditions exits, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters Off Mode.
• Error or SC condition
• An optional G4 unit is installed
• Image data is stored in the memory
• During memory TX or polling RX
• The handset is off hook
• An original is in the ADF
• The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
6-104
22 September 2006 ENERGY SAVER MODES
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
recovery time is about 10 s (B291/B296) or 15 s for the (B295/B297).
Energy
Operation System
Mode Saver Fusing Lamp +24V Note
Switch +5V
Mode
Off
Off Stand-by Off Off On On
(On when printing)
+5VE is
Off Off Off Off Off Off
supplied
Descriptions
Detailed
6-105
22 September 2006
7. SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration Desktop
Copy Process Dry electrostatic transfer system
Original Sheet/Book
Original Size Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Copy Paper Size Paper tray, A3/11" × 17" - A5 SEF
Duplex:
By-pass tray: A3/11" × 17" - A6 SEF
Non-standard Width: 100 - 297 mm (3.9" – 11.7")
sizes: Length: 148 - 432 mm (5.8" – 17.0")
Copy Paper Weight Paper Tray/ 64 - 105 g/m2 (20 - 28 lb.)
Duplex:
By-pass: 52 - 163 g/m2 (16 – 44 lb.)
Reproduction Ratios 7R5E: Metric version (%): 400, 200, 141, 122, 115,
93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
Inch version (%): 400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 93,
85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
Zoom: 25 ~ 400% in 1% steps
Copying Speed B291/B296: 35 cpm A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF)
B295/B297: 45 cpm, A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF)
First Copy Time B291/B296: 4.1 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF
B295/B297: 3.5 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF
Warm-up Time B291/B296: Less than 12.5 s (Basic), 15 s (MFP
B295/B297: Less than 12.5 s (Basic), 15 s (MFP
Continuous Copy 1~999 (operation panel entry)
Paper Capacity 1,050 sheets
(500 sheets/tray x 2 with 50 sheets in by-pass tray)
Paper Output A4, 81/2" x 11" and 500 sheets
smaller:
B4 and larger: 250 sheets
Power Source North America: 120V/60 Hz, More than 12.5 A
Europe/Asia: 220 – 240 V/50, 60 Hz, More than 6.8 A
Dimensions (w x d x h) Without ADF 670 mm x 650 mm x 720 mm (26.3" x 25.6" x 28.3")
With ADF 670 mm x 650 mm x 870 mm (26.3" x 25.6" x 34.3")
Weight Less than 79 kg (174 lb.)
Resolution 600 dpi (Scanning and Printing)
Gradation 256 levels (Scanning and Printing)
Original Archive More than 2,500 A4 pages for document server (ITU-T No. 4
Chart)
Spec.
Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange (630 g)

Total Counter Electric counter
SPEC-1
22 September 2006
Power Consumption
Mainframe only
B291/B296 B295/B297
Copying Less than 1.3 kW Less than 1.3 kW
Warm-up Less than 1.4 kW Less than 1.4 kW
Stand-by NA Less than 123W NA Less than 148W
EU, Asia Less than 126W EU, Asia Less than 138W
Auto Off Mode NA Ave. 1.2W NA Ave. 1.2W
EU, Asia Ave. 1.2W EU, Asia Ave. 1.2W
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.44 kW (NA)
Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia) Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia)
Full system (including options)

B291/B296 B295/B297
Copying Less than 1.4 kW Less than 1.4 kW
Warm-up Less than 1.3 kW Less than 1.3 kW
Stand-by NA Less than 125W NA Less than 159W
EU, Asia Less than 130W EU, Asia Less than 149W
Auto Off Mode NA Ave. 8.5W NA Ave. 8.5
EU, Asia Ave. 8.5 EU, Asia Ave. 8.5
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.44 kW (NA)
Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia) Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia)
Noise Emission:
Mode Model Mainframe Only Full System
Copying B291/B296 NA 64.0 NA 69.8
EU, Asia 65.0 EU, Asia 65.0
B295/B297 NA 67.0 NA 70.9
Stand-by B291/B296 NA 34.0 NA 37.1
B295/B297 NA 34.0 NA 37.1
NOTE: 1) The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.
2) Full system measurements include the ARDF, Finisher and LCT unit.
3) In the above stand-by condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not
rotating.
SPEC-2
22 September 2006
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

1 2
11
12 3
4
7
5
9
8 7
10 B195V901.WMF
1. Platen cover 8. Paper tray unit

2. ARDF 9. Two-tray finisher (2 shift trays)
3. One-bin tray 10. Booklet Finisher
4. Duplex unit 11. 1000 Sheet Finisher (1 shift tray)
5. By-pass tray 12. Bridge Unit
6. LCT (Large Capacity Tray)
7. Copier
NOTE: The Bridge Unit is required for the optional finishers. Spec.
SPEC-3
22 September 2006
Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products
Item Key Machine Code

B291/B296 B291/B296
B295/B297 B295/B297
ARDF (See Note 1.) C B714
Platen Cover (See Note 1.) C G329
Paper Tray Unit C B542
LCT (Large Capacity Tray) C B543
1-Bin Tray C B544
Bridge Unit C B538
1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 2.) C B408
Copier Two-tray Finisher (See Note 2.) C B545
Booklet Finisher C B546
Punch Unit (See Note 3.) C B377-17 (2/3-hole) US
Punch Unit (See Note 3.) C B377-27 (2/4-hole) Metric
Punch Unit (See Note 3.) C B377-31 (4-hole) Northern Europe
Key Counter Bracket C A674
User Account Enhance Unit C G395
PI Board Kit C B669
Data Overwrite Security C B735
Copy Data Security Unit C B770
Scanner Accessibility Option U B815
Fax Option U B779
G3 Interface Unit U B780
Fax
SAF Memory C G578
Handset (USA model only) C A646
Printer/Scanner Unit U D315
Printer Unit U D316
RPCS Printer Unit U D317
Printer Upgrade Unit U D319
Printer/ Scanner Upgrade Unit U D319
Scanner PostScript3 Unit U D319
IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN C G813
Bluetooth C B736
Memory Unit 256 MB C G818
File Format Converter C B609
NOTE: 1) The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together.

2) The finishers require the paper tray unit and bridge unit.
3) The punch unit requires the two-tray finisher.
SPEC-4
22 September 2006
7.3 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

ARDF (B714)
Original Size: Normal Original Mode: A3 to B6, DLT to HLT
Duplex Original Mode: A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Original Weight: Normal Original Mode: 40 ~ 128 g/m2 (11 ~ 34 lb.)
Duplex Original Mode: 52 ~ 105 g/m2 (14 ~ 28 lb.)
Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Reproduction Range: 30 ~ 200% (Sub scan direction only)
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the copier
Power Consumption: Less than 60 W
Dimensions (W × D × H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4" x 20.4" x 5.9")
Weight: 12 kg
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B542)

Paper Size: A5 SEF to A3 SEF
51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17" SEF
Paper Weight: 64 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 (20 lb. ~ 28 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. )
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from the copier)
120 Vac: 115 V version (from the copier)
220 ~ 240 Vac: 224/240 V version (from the copier)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: Less than 25 kg (55.1 lb.)
Size (W x D x H): 540 mm x 600 mm x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.6" x 10.6")
Spec.
SPEC-5
22 September 2006
ONE-BIN TRAY (B544)

Paper Size: A5 SEF to A3 SEF
51/2”x81/2” SEF to 11”x17” SEF
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 (16 lb. ~ 28 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Power Source: 5 Vdc, 24 Vdc (from copier)
Power Consumption: 15 W
Weight: Less than 4 kg (8.8 lb.)
Size (W x D x H): 470 mm x 565 mm x 140 mm (18.5" x 22.2" x 5.5")
1000 Sheet Finisher (B408)

Upper Tray
Paper Size A3 to A6
11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"
Paper Weight 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb.)
Paper Capacity 250 sheets, A4, 81/2" x 11" or smaller, 80 g/m2 (20 lb.)
Lower Tray
Paper Size Staple Mode Off:
A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"
Staple Mode On:
A3, B4, A4, B5, 11" x 17" to 81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight Staple Mode Off: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 43 lb.)
Staple Mode On: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb.)
Stapler Capacity 30 sheets (A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14"
50 sheets (A4, B5, 81/2" x 11")
Paper Capacity Staple Mode Off:
1,000 sheets, A4, 81/2" x 11" or smaller, 80 g/m2 (20 lb.)
500 sheets, A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14", 80 g/m2 (20 lb.)
Staple Mode On:
80 g/m2 (20 lb.)
Number of Sets
Set Size 10 to 50
2 to 9
Size 10 to 30 31 to 50
A4, 81/2"x14" LEF 100 100 to 20 100 to 20
A4, 81/2"x11" SEF, B5 100 50 to 10 50 to 10
A3, B4, 11"x17", 81/2"x14" 50 50 to 10 ---
Staple Positions 1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear)
2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left
Staple Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Replenishment
Power Source DC 24 V, 5V (from copier)
Power Consumption 50 W
Weight 25 kg (55.2 lb.)
Dimensions 527 x 520 x 790 mm
20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1"
SPEC-6
22 September 2006
TWO-TRAY FINISHER (B545)

NOTE: The punch unit is an option for this machine.
Paper Size Normal/Shift Mode:
A3 to A5/DLT to HLT
(A6L in no shift mode and no staple mode)
Staple Mode:
A3 to B5/DLT to LT
Punch Mode:
2 Holes: A3 to A5/DLT to HLT
3 Holes: A3 to B5/DLT to LT
4 Holes (Europe/Asia) : A3 to A5/ DLT to HLT
4 Holes (North Europe): A3 to B5/DLT to LT
Paper Weight Normal/Shift Mode:
52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb.)
Staple Mode:
64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 23 lb.)
Punch mode (All types):
52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb.)
Tray Paper Capacity Upper Tray:
500 sheets (A4S ~ A5S/LTS, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
250 sheets (A3 ~ A4L/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
100 sheets (A5L/HLT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Lower Tray (Multi-tray Staple Mode):
1500 sheets (A4S/LTS, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
750 sheets (A3 ~ B5/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (A5S, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Lower Tray (Normal Mode):
2000 sheets (A4S/LTS, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
750 sheets (A3 ~ B5/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (A5S, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Stapler Tray Capacity No Mixed Original Mode:
50 sheets (A4 ~ B5/LT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
30 sheets (A3 ~ B4/DLT ~ LG, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Mixed Original Mode:
30 sheets
(A4S/A3, B5S/B4, LTS/DLT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple Position 4 positions
1 staple: 3 positions (Front, Rear, Rear-Slant)
2 staple: 1 position
Staple Replenishment Cartridge (5,000 staples)
Power Source 24 Vdc (from copier)
Weight Less than 53 kg (116.8 lb.) (without punch unit)
Spec.
Less than 55 kg (121.3 lb.) (with punch unit)

Size (W x D x H) 680 mm x 620 mm x 1030 mm
(26.8" x 24.4" x 40.6")
SPEC-7
22 September 2006
Booklet Finisher (B546)

Paper Size Tray Modes Sizes
Proof tray A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
No staple mode A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Staple Rear A4 SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF
Mode Front/Slant A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 SEF, B5
Shift LEF, DLT SEF, LG SEF, LT LEF/SEF
tray Rear/Slant A3 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF,
DLT SEF, LT LEF
2 Staple A3 SEF, A4, LEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF,
DLT SEF, LT LEF
Booklet Staple Mode A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, DLT SEF,
tray LT SEF
Paper Weight Tray Weight

Stack mode 52 g/m to 163 g/m2, 14 to 42 lb
2
Staple mode 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2, 17 to 21 lb

Saddle stitch mode 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2, 17 to 21 lb
64 g/m2 to 128 g/m2, 17 to 34 lb
(Cover sheet only)
Paper Capacity*1 Tray Modes Paper size Capacity

A4 LEF, LT LEF or 150 sheets
shorter
Proof tray
A4 SEF, LT SEF or 75 sheets
longer
A4 LEF, LT LEF or 1000
shorter sheets
No staple
A4 SEF, LT SEF or 500 sheet
longer
Shift tray A4 LEF, LT LEF or 750
shorter sheets, or
30 sets *2
A4 SEF, LT SEF or 500
Staple longer sheets, or
30 sets *2
1-5 sheets 25 sets
Booklet tray 6-10 sheets 15 sets
11-15 sheets 10 sets
*1
: 80 g/m2, 20 lb
*2: Setting DIP SW 3 No. 5 to ON releases the 30 set limit.
SPEC-8
22 September 2006
Staple Capacity Modes Paper size Total capacity

A4 LEF, LT LEF or shorter 50 sheets
Staple
A4 SEF, LT SEF or longer 30 sheets
Saddle stitch 15 sheets
Staple Position Staple mode: 4 positions
1 staple: 3 positions (Rear, Front/Slant, Rear/Slant)
2 staples: 1 position
Saddle stitch mode: 2 positions, 2 staples (center), fixed position
Staple Replenishment Cartridge
Staple: 5000 staples
Saddle stitch: 2000 staples
Power Source 24 Vdc (from copier)
Power Consumption Less than 170 W
Dimensions 689 x 603 x 1055 mm
(w x d x h) 27.1 x 23.7 x 41.5 in.
Weight: 49 kg (107.8 lb.)
*1
: 80 g/m2, 20 lb
BRIDGE UNIT (B538)

Paper Size Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 ~ 135 g/m2, 16 lb. ~ 42 lb.
LCT (B543)
Paper Size A4 (S)/LT (S)
Paper Weight 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 lb. ~ 28 lb.
Tray Capacity 1500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb.)
Remaining Paper Detection 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end)
Power Source 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier)
Weight Less than 17 kg (37.5 lb.)
Size (W x D x H) 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm
(15.4" x 19.7" x 15.4")
Spec.
SPEC-9

Service 500

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service 500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service 500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model A-C4.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

Symbol What it means

Cautions, Notes, etc.

1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-1

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 2-1

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1

5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

“Rating Voltage of Output

“Rating Voltage of Output

“Rating Voltage of Output

“Rating Voltage of Output

1. Temperature Range: 10 °C to 32 °C (50 °F to 90 °F)

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

A: Front: >75 cm (29.6")

670 mm (26.4") 180 mm (7.1")

680 mm (26.8") 670 mm (23.4") 520 mm (20.5")*1

*1 Without tray extended.

1. Input voltage level:

1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Place Copier on the paper tray unit

Install the copier

Install the bridge unit (if required)

If the customer requires the 1-bin tray:

Install the remaining options in any order

1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the main machine from the

3. Remove scanner cushion [B]. [C]

5. On the right side of the machine, open [D]

[C] [B] [D]

Development Unit and PCU

1. Open the front door.

8. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.

[A] [C] [B]

6. Press down the lock [A] to lock the side fences.

Initialize TD Sensor and Developer

Set Paper Size for Paper Trays

2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.

3. Press the Paper Size Setting tab.

Electrical Total Counter

HDD Caution Decal

1. Attach the HDD Caution decal [A] to the front cover.

1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542)

1.5.2 1-BIN TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. Unpack the 1-bin tray unit and remove the tapes.

9. Secure the 1-bin tray unit [A] ( x 1 M3 x14).

15. Attach the copy tray

16. Remove the scanner stand cover [A] ( x 2).

1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538)

1.7.2 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

9. Install two trays [A] ( x 1 each).

1.8.2 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown.

9. Secure the 1-bin tray unit [A] ( x 1 M3 x14).

16. Remove the scanner stand cover [A] ( x 2).

9. Install two trays [A] ( x 1 each).

4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Attach and tighten stud screws , .

1. Install [A] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown.

6. Install the heater brackets [E] ( x2, [F]

8. Install the ac harness assembly [G] ( x2,

2. Remove the controller box [C] ( x5).

3. Remove scanner rear cover [C] ( x2).

1. Disconnect the screws holding the operation panel [A] ( x2. )

6. Reinstall the cover [A] ( x3).

1. Connector cover [A] ( x1)

1. Rear upper cover [A] ( x2)